Subscriber Login   Users   Administrators
Online CE, compliance, and document control for clinical and histology laboratories

Laboratory Information and Courses from MediaLab, Inc.

These are the MediaLab courses that cover Laboratory and links to relevant pages within the course.

Learn more about laboratory continuing education for medical technologists to earn CE credit for AMT, ASCP, NCA, and state license renewal and recertification. Or get information about laboratory safety and compliance courses that deliver cost-effective OSHA safety training and continuing education to your laboratory's employees.



Alpha Thalassemia
Silent Carrier

The silent carrier form of alpha thalassemia results from one alpha chain gene loci deletion. Individuals who are silent carriers show no clinical disease and demonstrate normal results during routine laboratory testing.This form of alpha thalassemia is usually discovered upon genetic familial testing. Silent carrier alpha thalassemia parents can pass on the alpha thalassemia gene and possibly a more serious form of alpha thalassemia if they have children with a partner who also carries thalassemia genes.

View Page
References

Burtis, CA. & Ashwood, ER. Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry 2nd ed. W. B. Saunders. 1994.Harmening, DM. Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostatis 5th ed., F.A. Davis, 2008Lotspeich-Steininger, Stiene-Martin and Koepke, Clinical Hematology Principles, Procedures, Correlations, Lippincott 1992McKenzie, SB., Textbook of Hematology 2nd ed., Williams and Wilkins 1996.Miale, JB, Laboratory Medicine Hematology 6th ed., Mosby 1982.Nouwens, J and Spahn, M. Hemoglobin H Disease: A self-instructional unit 3rd ed., Educational Materials for Health Professionals, Inc. 1991.Doig, K. Rodak's Diagnostic Hematology 3rd ed. W.B.Sunders Co., 2007.

View Page
A 29-year-old female of Philippine descent is seen by her physician for fatigue. The patient states that a relative told her that their family has a long history of anemia.She presents with sclera icterus and her spleen is palpable. Routine blood work was initially ordered and these results were obtained:CBC ParameterPatient ResultReference IntervalsWBC6.1 X 10 9/L4.0 - 10.5 X 109/LRBC4.84 X 1012/L3.50 - 5.50 X 1012/LHemoglobin8.4 g/dL12.0 - 16.0 g/dLHematocrit28.8%36.0 - 48.0%MCV59 fL80.0 - 100.0 fLMCH17.4 pg26.0 - 34.0 pgMCHC29.3 g/dL32.0 - 36.0 g/dLRDW19.5 %11.0 - 15.0 %Platelets591 X 109/L150 - 400 X 109/LA peripheral blood smear is reviewed, revealing codocytes (target cells), as indicated by the blue arrows, and schizocytes (fragmented RBCs), as indicated by the red arrows. The majority of the RBCs that were seen in this smear were also microcytic and hypochromic.What additional laboratory tests should be performed to aid in the diagnosis of this disorder and associated anemia?View Page

Antibody Detection and Identification
References

Alba MA. Clinical Immunohematology Laboratory Manual. Albuquerque, NM: UNM Health Sciences Center; 2008.Brecher MF, Leger RM, Linden JV, Roseff SD, eds. Technical Manual 15th ed. Bethesda, Md. AABB; 2005.Harmening DM. Modern Blood Banking and Transfusion Practices. 5th ed. Philadelphia, Pa: F.A. Davis Company; 2005.

View Page
Examples of Antibodies to Low-Incidence Antigens

Antibodies to low-incidence antigens will be difficult to test for since most screen and panel cells do not have these antigens on the testing cells. Further testing may be needed at a reference laboratory where a larger selection of antibody panels are available to locate cells positive for these antigens.Suspect an antibody to a low-incidence antigen if: AHG crossmatch is incompatible and Other causes have been ruled out (positive donor DAT, ABO incompatibility) Examples of antibodies to low-incidence antigens are: anti-V, anti-Cw, anti-Kpa, anti-Jsa, and anti-Lua.

View Page

Antinuclear Antibody Testing: Methods and Pattern Interpretation
Antinuclear Antibody Test

The antinuclear antibody test (ANA) is a test used to screen for the presence of autoantibodies that are directed toward components in the nucleus of the cell. Clinicians use the ANA test to assess the likelihood that a given patient has a SARD. The results of the ANA test alone are not diagnostic for the SARD. The patient must also have clinical evidence of the disease as well. Because the early clinical presentation for many of the SARDs are nonspecific, the results of the ANA test and subsequent follow-up testing are key pieces to making the correct diagnosis.Rheumatoid arthritis (RA) is the most prevalent disease in this group; however, the ANA assay is not the primary laboratory test for RA. Instead, the test for RA looks for the presence of rheumatoid factor (RF) or more recently, cyclic citrullinated peptide antibodies (anti-CCP).For the other diseases in the SARD group, especially SLE and SSc, the results of the ANA test can be useful in determining a correct diagnosis. The utility of the ANA test is to detect the antibodies early in the disease process.The ANA results in conjunction with clinical presentation give the clinician solid evidence to intervene with an appropriate treatment. Studies have shown that once treatment is started, the formation of new antibodies slows or even halts.(Ref3)Currently there are no cures for the SARDs. Treatments primarily focus on keeping the patient comfortable and the immune response in check. Treatments can vary from non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, to immuno-suppressive drugs, to stem cell transplants. Individual treatment is often dependent on the severity of the disease and the response to the selected drug regimen.

View Page
History of ANA Testing

Slide-based ANA testing using a cell substrate started in the 1950s and continues to be the gold standard method. In the early days of ANA testing, rodent tissue (stomach, liver and/or kidney) was commonly used as the substrate. Rodent tissue however had several drawbacks such as small cell size, a lack of dividing cells (mitotics) and poor antigen expression that made interpretation of ANA patterns difficult. In the 1980s, cultured cell lines were examined for utility as an ANA substrate and the human epithelial- like cell line HEp-2 gained popularity. HEp-2's advantages over rodent tissue are: A large nucleus Better antigen expression Abundant mitotic cells that assist in interpretation of the ANA pattern (if grown properly).More recently a cell line called HEp-2000® has become popular for ANA detection. HEp-2000® is a HEp-2 cell line that has been transfected with the cDNA for overexpression of the SSA/Ro antigen. This results in a substrate with all of the original advantages of HEp-2 plus an added advantage of increased sensitivity for detection of antibodies directed to the SSA/Ro antigen and the ability to identify these clinically significant antibodies during the screening process.(Ref4)It has also been demonstrated that antibodies to SSA/Ro develop early in the disease process.(Ref5) Perhaps most importantly, if a woman has anti-SSA/Ro antibodies and becomes pregnant there is a risk of the antibodies crossing the placenta, resulting in the fetus developing neonatal lupus and congenital heart block in utero.The advantage of using these transfected cells is documented in the current Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) guidelines for ANA testing. Here they note the "dramatically increased" sensitivity of transfected cells for the detection of SS-A/Ro and the unaltered effect of transfection on other ANA patterns.(Ref6)

View Page
References

American College of Rheumatology, Committee on Rheumatologic Care, Position Statement, Methodology of Testing for Antinuclear Antibodies; Feb, 2009. Available at http://www.rheumatology.org/search/search.asp accessed on June 16, 2010Anuradah V, Chopra A, Sturgess A, Edmonds J. Cost-effective screening method for antinuclear antibody detection. Asian Pacific League of Associations for Rheumatology. 2004(7):13-18.Arbuckle MR, McClain MT, Rubertone MV, et al. Development of autoantibodies before the clinical onset of systemic lupus erythematosus. N Engl J Med. Oct 16 2003;349(16):1526-1533.Bossuyt X, Frans J, Hendrickx A, Godefridis G, Westhovens R, Marien G. Detection of Anti-SSA Antibodies by Indirect Immunofluorescence. Clin Chem. 10 7 2004;50(12):2361-2369.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (formerly NCCLS); Quality Assurance of Laboratory Tests for Autoantibodies to Nuclear Antigens: (1) Indirect Fluorescence Assay for Microscopy and (2) Microtiter Enzyme Immunoassay Methods; Approved Guidelines - Second Edition. CLSI I/LA2-A2. 2006;26(13).Fritzler MJ, Hanson C, Miller J, Eystathioy T. Specificity of autoantibodies to SS-A/Ro on a transfected and overexpressed human 60 kDa Ro autoantigen substrate. J.Clin.Lab.Anal. 2002;16:103-108.Fritzler MJ, Miller BJ. Detection of autoantibodies to SS-A/Ro by indirect immunofluorescence using a transfected and overexpressed human 60 kD Ro autoantigen in HEp-2 cells. J.Clin.Lab.Anal. 1995;9:218-224.Fritzler MJ, Wall W, Gohill J, Kinsella TD, Humbel RL. The Detection of Autoantibodies on HEp-2 Cells Using an Indirect Immunoperoxidase Kit (Colorzyme®). Diag Immunol. 1986;4:217-221. Keech CL, Howarth S, Coates T, Rischmueller M, McCluskey J, Gordon TP. Rapid and sensitive detection of anti-Ro (SS-A) antibodies by indirect immunofluorescence of 60kDa Ro HEp-2 transfectants. Pathology. 1996;28:54-57.Keech CL, McCluskey J, Gordon TP. Transfection and overexpression of the human 60-kDa Ro/SS-A autoantigen in HEp-2 cells. Clin.Immunol.Immunopathol. 1994;73:146-151.Kroshinsky D, Stone JH, Bloch DB, Sepehr A. Case records of the Massachusetts General Hospital. Case 5-2009. A 47-year-old woman with a rash and numbness and pain in the legs. N Engl J Med. Feb 12 2009;360(7):711-720. McCarty, G.A., Valencia, D.W., and Fritzler, M.J., Antinuclear Antibodies-Contempory Techniques and Clinical Application to Connective Tissue Disease. New York: Oxford University Press, Inc. 1984. Murray DL, Homburger HA, Horvat RT, Snyder MR, College of American Pathologists; S-C 2009: Antinuclear Antibody Screening Methods; CAP Surveys S-C Diagnostic Immunology;2009 Pollock W, Toh BH. Routine immunofluorescence detection of Ro/SS-A autoantibody using HEp-2 cells transfected with human 60 kDa Ro/SS-A. J.Clin.Pathol. 1999;52:684-687.Singer, M. and Berg, P., Genes & Genomes-A Changing Perspective. Mill Valley, CA: University Science Books. 1991.Sullivan KE. The complex Genetic Basis of Systemic Lupus Erythematosus, Reprint from 1999 and 2000; Lupus Foundation, Available at http://www.lupus.org/education/articles/geneticbasis.html Accessed June 16, 2010.Wallace DJ. New methods for antinuclear antibody testing: does it cut costs and corners without jeopardizing clinical reliability? Nat Clin Pract Rheumatol. Aug 2006;2(8):410-411.Willcocks LC, Carr EJ, Niederer HA, et al. A defunctioning polymorphism in FCGR2B is associated with protection against malaria but susceptibility to systemic lupus erythematosus. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. Apr 27 2010;107(17):7881-7885.

View Page

Authentic and Spurious Causes of Thrombocytopenia
Definition of Thrombocytopenia

Thrombocytopenia is a decrease in the number of platelets in the peripheral blood. Most laboratories use a reference range for platelets that is approximately 150 - 450 x 109/L. Thrombocytopenia occurs when the platelet count falls below the lower limit of this range. The image shows how a normal platelet count would appear on a peripheral blood smear (Wright-Giemsa stain; 1000x original magnification). Representative platelets are indicated by arrows.

View Page
Laboratory Findings

These laboratory findings are associated with TTP and HUS: Thrombocytopenia -- Platelet count is often less than 20 x 109/L in TTP, but may not be as low in HUS. Schistocytes (red blood cell fragments, as indicated by the arrows in the image to the right) may be observed on the peripheral blood smear. Schistocytes are the result of erythrocytic membrane damage caused by sheering of red blood cells as they pass through a fibrin mesh of clot formation occurring in the blood vessels. LDH, serum bilirubin, and reticulocyte counts are elevated. Prothrombin time (PT) and activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT) are usually normal. Proteinuria and hematuria may be present.

View Page
Laboratory Findings

Laboratory findings include: Thrombocytopenia Prolonged PT, aPTT, thrombin time Decreased fibrinogen Elevated D-dimers Schistocytes on the peripheral blood smearThrombocytopenia and schistocytes are also associated with TTP and HUS; it is the abnormal coagulation tests that distinguish DIC from these other conditions.

View Page
Which of the following laboratory results would you find with disseminated intravascular coagulation (DIC) but NOT with thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura (TTP) or hemolytic uremic syndrome (HUS)?View Page

Basic Tissue Orientation and Paraffin Embedding Technique
Introduction

The focus of this course will be on the technical process of producing human tissue blocks embedded in paraffin wax. Other embedding techniques using various media such as gelatin, ester wax, polyethylene glycol, and epoxy resin are also used in some histological techniques. However, in this course we will be discussing the method of embedding human tissue samples in molten, or melted, paraffin wax. This is the most commonly utilized method for routine tissue embedding and is the method most utilized in nearly all hospital histopathology laboratories for processing human tissue samples for diagnostic interpretation.In the order of events (chronology) of the total histology process, paraffin embedding takes place following tissue processing and prior to and in preparation for microtomy. For proficiency in paraffin embedding, the histologist needs:An understanding of basic anatomy for use in tissue type orientationKnowledge of basic tissue sampling methods used in gross dissectionTo develop manual dexterity and spatial reasoning in order to correctly orient the specimen in the tissue block for microtomyThis course will introduce and review some of the essential background information needed for correct embedding technique. Also discussed in this course will be guidelines for orientation of common histology specimens. Mastery of this information facilitates practice and application of these concepts during execution, to increase the histologist's technical proficiency at paraffin embedding in the histology laboratory.

View Page
Tools and Instrumentation

The Instrumentation and tools used for paraffin embedding can vary by laboratory. Methods to heat and hold paraffin in the molten state, as well as to harden it by cooling are required. Shown is a typical paraffin embedding center that is used in many clinical histology laboratories.

View Page
Know Your Paraffin

Whatever paraffin formula has been selected for use in your laboratory, its' ultimate performance will be mostly dependent on the melting point and polymerization that occurs as it solidifies through the process of crystallization. Most manufacturer will provide a list of the ingredients and additives as well as the product melting point on the paraffin media bag or packaging. For example: Melting point: 133-136° F (56-58° C)Working temperature: 140° F (60° C)Water bath temperature: 113-122° F (45-50° C)Store below: 86° F (30° C)A "rule of thumb" however, is that pure paraffin appears almost clear when solid. It is a "softer" paraffin and would be more ideal for sections that are 5 microns (μ) thick. In contrast, paraffin which contains a greater amount of additives or stabilizers will be "harder" and better suited to sections of 2 to 3 µ. However, any paraffin formula performance can be compromised by failing to monitor and control temperatures during the infiltration stage of tissue processing or during the embedding process.

View Page
Modern Paraffin Media

Pure paraffin wax is found as a white, odorless, tasteless, waxy solid. It's typical melting point, without additives, is between 46° to 68° C. Manufacturers have improved histology paraffin by improving and refining the purification methods of the basic paraffin wax base. Currently, most commerical histology paraffin is a mixture of the following components:Paraffin wax Hydrocarbon polymers or resins (increases hardness and support)Microcrystalline waxes and/or bees wax (reduces crystal size, regulates melting point, and increases adhesion for ribboning)Additive of dimethyl sulphoxide (DMSO), a hyrgroscopic compound, which improves infilltration of wax into the tissueThere are many different and specialized paraffin formulations available in the current market. There is no one best paraffin for every laboratory or laboratory situation. However, the performance of any paraffin formula is affected by the following variables:Melting point: Depends on the molecular weight and proportions of additivesDegree of polymerization: Related to the amount of stabilization additiveWorking temperature: Maintained during infilltration and embedding

View Page
Basic Tissue Orientation

Many different tissue specimens may be submitted to the typical histology laboratory. Identification of each tissue type is very important for proper embedding orientation. An understanding of the surgical techniques and grossing methods for common specimens will allow visual recognition of the more common tissue types.

View Page
Communication

Some suggestions for ways to provide orientation instructions for the embedding histologist:Agree as a department (histology staff, supervisors, pathologists' assistants, and pathologists) how you are going to identify and "flag" those specimens needing special orientation.Clearly indicate and seek to standardize, as much as possible, inking patterns and methods of submission for punch, shave, skin ellipse, and tiny lumen specimens.Realize that most histologists will relate the directions given in instructions to the block face. It is helpful to make embedding procedures and protocols as specific as possible, with diagrams that show orientation, arrangement in the block, and other details as the standard operating procedures (SOPs). Define what instructions such as "on edge," "up or down," or "on its side," will mean in your laboratory. This is something that is easy to misinterpret and can mean different things in different laboratories and situations. Train histologists to use the embedding log worksheet and your laboratory information system (LIS), so that they are able to easily find information such as tissue types, number of fragments, and number/letter designations of blocks submitted to histology. Make sure everyone is clear and "on the same page" to save a lot of frustration and possible loss of an irretrievable specimen due to miscommunication and misunderstanding.

View Page
Practices for Specimen Loss

The following steps can be taken if you open a cassette and it appears that NO specimen is within:Look carefully in the cassette lid and interior corners and crevices. If you still find no visible tissue, ALWAYS have a second (or even third person) verify and help you check for any tiny fragments that you might have missed.Check the gross description, it may indicate that the specimen was very minute and was not expected to survive processing. If the specimen has been submitted in lens paper or a mesh biopsy bag, scrape all surfaces with a warmed, dull knife and transfer ANY, perhaps unseen, cells or particles to a mold where you have placed a small amount of molten paraffin. Anything microscopic that might be present will be likely to "float" off the knife, and can then be transferred to the block where it may be visible in the final section. Retain the lens paper or mesh bag in the cassette lid to document that "no tissue was seen."Individual laboratory procedure should be followed when documenting specimen loss on the accession log and/or laboratory information system (LIS).Missing fragments (less than dictated) that have been inadvertently dropped, can sometimes be retrieved, salvaged, and identified by retaining cassette lids in a separate bag for 24 to 48 hours (or until the case is signed out).

View Page
References

Carson FL, Hladik C. Histotechnology: A Self-Instructional Text. 3rd ed. Chicago, IL: ASCP Press; 2009. Carson FL, Edgar LC, Tatum DS. Board of Registry Study Guide: Histotechnology Examinations. 2nd ed. Chicago, IL: ASCP Press; 2001.Ham AW, Cormack DH. Ham's Histology. 9th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott; 1987.Hansen JT. Essential Anatomy Dissector Following Grant's Method. 2nd ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2002.Lester SC. Manual of Surgical Pathology. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Elsevier; 2005.Ozan G, Goss G. Gross Dissection and Description. In: National Society for Histotechnology Self-Assessment. No 12. 2001.Sheehan DC, Hrapchak BB. Theory and Practice of Histotechnology. 2nd ed. Columbus, OH: Battelle Press; 1987.Spillan BS. Proper Tissue Embedding Practices. Histologic Magazine. April 1976;VI(2):79. Taber's Cyclopedic Medical Dictionary. 21st ed. Philadelphia, PA: FA Davis Co; 2005.Weaver J. Paraffin Embedding and Process Improvement. Presented by Teleconference Network of Texas, UT Health Science Center; 2010.Westra WH, Hruban RH, Phelps TH, Isacson C. Surgical Pathology Dissection: An Illustrated Guide. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Springer-Verlag; 2003.Winsor L. Tissue processing. In: Woods A, Ellis R eds. Laboratory Histopathology: A Complete Reference. New York: Churchill Livingstone; 1994.

View Page

Basics of Lean and Six Sigma for the Laboratory
Waste in the Laboratory

View Page
Batch Size Reduction

Traditionally, laboratory processes involved these steps:Phlebotomists collect all their morning samplesSamples brought back to the laboratory to be receivedPlasma/serum samples centrifuged in batches in high-volume centrifugesRacks of samples taken to the bench area for testing.Batch processing creates waste through excessive work in progress and excessive waiting. While the batches are being processed, the instruments and equipment used in the subsequent steps are often idle.Batch processing is more prone to errors than continuous processing. Also, batch processing is more problem-prone. The sooner the execution of a process, the sooner a problem will be detected and corrected. Fewer samples will be affected if batching is not done and there is equipment malfunction (e.g., unable to unlock/open centrifuge lid, pneumatic tube delivered to the wrong station, analyzer malfunction) or other problems occur (e.g., expired calibration curve, inadequate reagent on-board).

View Page
Laboratory Work Cell

Beside batch size reduction, cross-training staff is also a key to achieving a Lean laboratory operation. Not only is cross-training essential for Lean operation but it also makes sense, based on the current shortage of laboratory professionals. In a traditional laboratory, every section is separated and has its own staff and space. Daily workload is usually not evenly distributed, since it is based on the workload of a particular section. In a Lean laboratory work cell, automated analyzers (hematology, chemistry, immunoassay and urinalysis) are place together in a U shape. These automated/high volume analyzers are placed as close to the central processing area as possible to decrease excess motion, while manual/low volume testing is located in an area that is further away from specimen processing. The images on the right illustrate the traditional and work cell layouts. A work cell provides several advantages: Less staff is required to work in a work cell designEase of coverage during break timeLess wasted motionEnhanced team work

View Page
Additional Lean Processes and Concepts

In addition to 5S and the waste walk, other tools are considered essential in a Lean system. These tools are listed below:Lean Process/ConceptDefinitionLaboratory ApplicationPull systemA system where supply and production are dependent on demand. Instead of ordering the same amount of supplies on a fixed time interval, a laboratory utilizing a pull system would review data from the analyzer test counter or take inventory to match the order to the testing demand. Continuous flowOne-for-one process. No waiting between steps. Linking the rate of demand to the rate of production. Patient moves from registration to blood draw area to doctor without waiting.Blood sample arrives in the laboratory, is received, processed, and tested immediately rather than waiting to batch. Set up reductionPreparation of the work area and supplies in advance so that the process proceeds smoothly. Set up supplies into ready-to-use kits. Perhaps these can be set up by the prior shift during slow times. Error-proofing A system that doesn't let a worker make a mistake. Can be used in combination with visual signals. Many point-of-care instruments have automatic lockout of testing if quality controls are not tested, or if they fail, prior to patient testing. Value stream mapA picture that illustrates the flow of material, inventory, and product. Value stream maps are used for value stream analyses, which can allow an organization to identify waste in its processes through Lean thinking. The value stream map should start from the supplier and end at the customer. In a clinical laboratory the start would be when the physician place the order or when the courier drop off the sample. And the end would be when the results are sent to the client or physician. Different processes: preanalytical, analytical and postanalytical within the laboratory are included in-between. The value stream map can help to identify unneeded or non-value-adding steps and provide a high level review of the entire process.Takt time and level loadingTakt time is a measurement of the process flow over time that will help determine how to combine work to achieve the best flow. Based on the takt time, level loading helps to balance the volume and variety of work among employees so that work progresses at a more even pace. Cross-training allows a laboratory worker to help in another department when there is a lull in their department's workflow.

View Page
Recommended Lean Processes: Waste Walk

In order to determine where there is waste, the Lean system recommends taking a waste walk. The table below lists the types of waste that were discussed on the previous page and questions that you might ask as your team proceeds through a waste walk. You will probably not be able to get rid of all waste, but you can continually find ways to reduce it.Waste CategoryQuestionsDefect correctionAre you fixing errors in paperwork?Are you unable to process items because of illegible handwriting, errors, or other causes?OverproductionIs the laboratory producing more reports than needed?Is the laboratory printing, faxing, copying, and/or e-mailing more than is necessary?Are more tests or services being ordered or performed than required by the customer (eg, clinical staff) or for the patient?Excess motionAre you frequently searching for paper documents in cabinets and drawers?Are you regularly hand-carrying paperwork from one laboratory area to another, or one department to another?Excess movement of materialsDo you constantly need to locate and move a piece of equipment?Do you have temporary locations for supplies and equipment?WaitingIs there too much dependency on others to complete a task before you can begin a task?Are there delays in receiving information?Do patients wait for long periods of time before receiving care?Inventory Are files piling up? Is the laboratory purchasing excessive supplies of any kind?Are there obsolete items in the laboratory, eg, files,equipment, supplies, reagents?Excess processingIs the laboratory duplicating reports or information?Are you doing more work than is required for a particular process?Does the laboratory have unnecessary levels of authorization and approval?

View Page
Which of the statements below would be considered Lean thinking?View Page
Conclusion

Lean and Six Sigma are very powerful quality improvement tools, but they will only work if they are implemented appropriately. Certain factors will determine the outcome of Lean Six Sigma efforts.Support and commitment of the executive management team for Lean and Six Sigma effortsUnderstanding what resources are available prior to the start of the projectThe amount of training received by the staffStaff acceptance of Six Sigma and Lean conceptsThe size and scope of the projectsAbility for management to communicate the importance of projects to staffWithout support from senior members of the management team, most of the effort will eventually lose traction. It is important for management to understand what resources (financial and human) must be available before starting any project. Trying to complete multiple projects simultaneously when a laboratory barely has enough staff to complete the normal day-to-day work, or taking on an inter-departmental project as the first project will likely result in failure and will lead to staff frustration and resentment over future projects. There is no need to train the entire department to become Six Sigma Black Belts, but they should be trained on the basic principles before they begin participating in improvement teams. Management should include the staff in project selection as much as possible, since it is difficult for the team to perform if they do not understand the importance of the project. Lean and Six Sigma involve commitment from everyone in the organization, from the CEO to the employees. Only when an entire organization is committed will Lean Six Sigma become an organization's philosophical approach to improvement.

View Page
Measuring Quality

Laboratory quality indicators are commonly measured as averages or percentages. For example:The turnaround time (TAT) for HIV Western Blot averages 3.5 days.Type O units are available 99.9% of the time in an emergency release.In the first example, it might appears that 3.5 days is a reasonable TAT for a sendout test at first glance, but an average of 3.5 days means the result can be available anytime between the same day to a week later. A patient may have to schedule an appointment at least one week later to ensure the result is available. This may potentially delay treatment. As for the physicians, they want to know when their patients' results will come back; they are not interested in knowing the average but exactly when the result will be available. In the second example, 99.9% might sound impressive but it would translated into 1 out of every 1000 patients requiring emergency transfusion being at risk of ABO hemolytic reaction. In fact if 99.9% is used to measured quality of the processes that happened in our everyday life, that would translate into:18 plane crashes daily17,660 mail mix-ups hourly3,700 medication errors daily10 dropped babies daily$24.8 million worth of incorrect charges hourly500 wrong procedures performed weekly.Other industries realized long ago that measuring quality based on percentage or average is not adequate to satisfy the customers. The need for a higher standard of quality led to the use of Six-Sigma.

View Page
Process Sigma and Defects Per Million Opportunities (DPMO)

The core of the Six Sigma quality management approach is measurement of defects in order to get as close to zero defects as possible. Sigma is a statistical term that measures how far a process deviates from total accuracy or perfection. The process sigma, which is also known as the sigma level, is a measure of process capability. The higher the process sigma, the more capable the process is. A Six Sigma process has a short-term (DPMO) process sigma of 6. When determining the long-term process sigma, 1.5 is subtracted from the short-term metric, so that the long-term process sigma for a Six Sigma process is 4.5. Six Sigma is often wrongly defined as "3.4 defects per million products," when in fact, Six Sigma is actually defined as 3.4 defects per million opportunities (DPMO). Six Sigma's goal is to improve all processes to that level or better.To determine the number of opportunities a process contains, one should think of the number of opportunities in which a defect may occur. For example, if you are measuring emergency department (ED) stat turnaround times from order to completion, a defect would be any result not reported within the specified turnaround time. Opportunities for defects (delays) can occur in the three phases of laboratory testing (pre-analytical, analytical, and post-analytical phases). An example of DPMO and process sigma (sigma level) measurement is given on the following page.

View Page
"Define Phase" Tools: Voice of the Customer (VOC)

An organization should improve on parameters that are important to the customers; VOC is a tool that can be used to understand what the customers want from the customers' perspective. What the customers tells you are their expections might be different from what you believe they expect. The purpose of the Six Sigma project is to give to the customers what they want/need and not give the customers just what you think they want/need.Examples of VOC methods are shown in the table below:MethodAdvantageDisadvantageFocus groupAble to obtain detailed answers to specific questions.The number of customers able to participate is low.Interview Higher response rate than focus group or survey.Cost and time; must be conducted in person or by phone. One-on-one process can be costly and time-consuming.SurveyEasy and cost-effective; can be written or electronic surveyLow response rateThe method that is used is determined by the resources, including technology, that are available and the customers who are being evaluated. If a reference laboratory received 85% of their business from five clients, a focus group with representatives from those five clients would work well. For a laboratory with hundreds of ordering physicians, a survey would be preferred since it can reach out to all customers. If a laboratory wants to improve its employee satisfaction, interviews conducted by the Human Resources department or a consulting firm would be helpful.

View Page
DMAIC: Measure Phase

During the measure phase, the team will: Observe and review the current process.Measure the current process to established a baseline.The observation part is critical even for those that are involved in the process daily, since observation can often uncover errors or variations that are not obvious. Observation is also useful to eliminate bias. For example, management's perception of the workload is likely different from the perception of the employees. Observing and reviewing the process together in real-life as a team can eliminate those biases. After the team has had a chance to observe the process, it can then decide on the appropriate data to measure. Data can be either discrete or continuous. Discrete data contain distinct values. Discrete data are usually the result of counting something using whole numbers. Continuous data are data where the values can be any numeric values and not just whole numbers (eg, time, height, and temperature measurements). Here are some examples of continuous vs. discrete data that are used in the laboratory.ContinuousDiscreteAverage time from receipt to completion for stat samplesNumber of stat samples not completed within 1 hourTime between completion of stat test by the analyzer and LIS release Number of stat samples not released in LIS within 5 minutes after the test completed by analyzerTotal LIS downtimeIncidences of LIS downtime in one monthAverage wait time for outpatients prior to specimen collectionNumber of outpatients not drawn within 15 minutesAverage response time for physician to return page for critical resultThe number of critical result pages not return by the physician within one hour

View Page
Data Collection Plan: Baseline Measurement

It is critical that the right data are measured. If this does not occur, any improvement effort would likely fail. The team would ideally measure variables that will have a direct impact on the outputs. In choosing the type of data to collect, one should consider the time/cost of data collection, how those data tie into customer expectations, and the ability to obtain accurate data. After a decision is made by the team on what to measure, the team also needs to provide an operational definition, the source of data (eg, LIS, log book), prepare a plan, and refine the process as needed. The operational definition is especially important when multiple people are involved in data collection. In the earlier example regarding chemistry stat turnaround time, "received" in the lab could be defined in multiple ways. Some laboratories would define the "received time" as the time the sample physically arrived in the lab (via courier or pneumatic tube) but some might define it as the time the sample is accessioned in the LIS. The team would then proceed to write up a data collection plan. Ideally, the time period of data gathering should be reflective of the normal workflow of the laboratory. A time period that includes major holidays (Thanksgiving, Christmas and New Year), or is at the peak of an outbreak (eg, H1N1 virus) or during student summer vacation, if this is a CLS teaching laboratory, might not be reflective of the normal operation of the laboratory and will lead to skewed results. The period of time to measure will vary depending on the project scope and the resources that are available. Generally 2-3 weeks of data should be sufficient.

View Page

Beta Thalassemia
References

Burtis CA, Ashwood ER. Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry 2nd ed. WB Saunders; 1994.Doig, K. Rodak's Diagnostic Hematology. 3rd ed. WB Saunders Co; 2007.Harmening DM. Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostatis. 5th ed. FA Davis; 2008Hoffman R, Benz EJ Jr., Shattil SJ, Furie B, Cohen HJ, Silberstein LE. Hematology Basic Principles and Practice, 2nd ed. Churchill Livingstone; 1995.McKenzie SB. Textbook of Hematology, 2nd ed. Williams and Wilkins; 1996.McKenzie SB. Clinical Laboratory Hematology, 2nd ed. Pearson; 2010.Miale JB, Laboratory Medicine Hematology, 6th ed. Mosby; 1982.Stiene-Martin EA, Lotspeich-Steininger CA, Koepke JA, Clinical Hematology Principles, Procedures, Correlations, 2nd ed. Lippincott; 1998.

View Page
Laboratory Test Results

TestPatient ResultReference Intervals (Adult female)White blood cell (WBC) count 3.7 x 109/L4.4 - 11.3 x 109/LRed blood cell (RBC) count5.6 x 1012/L4.1 - 5.1 x 1012/LHemoglobin (Hb)10.5 g/dL12.3 - 15.3 g/dLHematocrit (HCT)36.6%35.9 - 44.6%MCV65.8 fL80.0 - 96.0 fLMCH19.9 pg27.5 - 33.2 pgMCHC26.7%33.4 - 35.5%RDW14.0<14.5Platelets249.0 x 109/L100.0 - 450.0 x 109/LTotal serum iron165 µg/dL60 - 150 µg/dL Iron-binding capacity230 µg/dL250 - 400 µg/dLThe RBC count is increased for the amount of hemoglobin present. The concentration of hemoglobin in the RBCs is slightly decreased (hypochromic) and the cells are small (microcytic). The variation in RBC size (RDW) is within normal limits.

View Page
Case History Summary

The laboratory findings in this case represent classic findings seen in beta thalassemia minor including: erythrocytosis, decreased hemoglobin, normal hematocrit, normal RDW, and the presence of codocytes (target cells). This patient does have a mild anemia, but some patients with beta thalassemia minor have no anemia. Hemoglobin electrophoresis confirms this diagnosis, showing an increased Hb A2 level and decreased Hb A.In addition, the slightly increased iron and slightly decreased TIBC contradict a suspicion of iron deficiency. These chemistry results are typical for beta thalassemia, even though the red blood cells are microcytic and hypochromic.

View Page

Body Fluid Differential Tutorial
Medulloblastoma in Cerebrospinal Fluid

Medulloblastoma is a malignant brain tumor that originates in the cerebellum. It is included in the family of primitive neuroectodermal tumors, or PNETs. It is a highly invasive brain tumor which is known to spread through the brain and cerebrospinal fluid.Patients with meduloblastoma will typically have spinal taps performed after resection to evaluate for the presence of metastasis. These samples are then evaluated in the laboratory.This cytospin shows multiple large bizarre tumor clumps. Note that there are also several tumor cells that appear to have ingested other tumor cells (see arrows).

View Page
References

Carr JH, Rodak BF. Body Fluids. In: Clinical Hematology Atlas, 3rd ed. St. Louis, Missouri: Saunders Elsevier; 2009: 231-253.Galagan KA, Blomberg D, Cornbleet PJ, Glassy EF. Color Atlas of Body Fluids: An Illustrated Field Guide Based on Proficiency Testing. Northfield, IL: College of American Pathologists; 2006.Kjeldsberg CR, Knight JA. Body fluids: laboratory examination of amniotic, cerebrospinal, seminal, serous & synovial fluids. Chicago, Illinois: ASCP Press; 1993.McKenzie SB, Williams JL. Morphologic Analysis of Body Fluids in the Hematology Laboratory. In: Clinical Laboratory Hematology, 2nd ed. Upper Sadle River, New Jersey: Pearson Education, Inc.; 2010: 583-611.

View Page
A patient with an infectious mononucleosis infection presents in the emergency room. Physicians order a spinal tap which is immediately sent to the laboratory for review. Please identify the cell in the image below from this patient's cerebrospinal fluid sample.View Page
Candida albicans - Germ Tube Formation

Candida albicans is known to be a germ tube producer. The elongated, but not quite hyphal, structures that are present in this fungal group are consistent with germ tubes (see arrows).While it is possible to speculate about fungal identity from the cytospin preparation, this is truly the microbiology laboratory's role. This cytospin would be reported as "positive" for yeast and after correlating results with the microbiology laboratory, and according to your laboratory's protocols.

View Page

Bone Marrow Aspiration Part I: Normal Hematopoiesis and Basic Interpretive Procedures
Introduction to Bone Marrow Aspirates and Biopsies

Bone marrow aspiration and biopsy are standard tools used in the hematology laboratory to aid in the evaluation and diagnosis of peripheral blood abnormalities. Some of these abnormalities include: cytopenias (such as neutropenia), thrombocytopenia and anemias. Bone marrow aspiration and biopsies are also used by hematology/oncology specialists in the diagnosis of leukemias, dysplastic syndromes, and proliferative syndromes. A bone marrow aspiration and biopsy may also be part of the evaluation of fever of unknown origin (FUO), failure to thrive(FTT) in the pediatric setting, as well as some metabolic and genetic disorders.A bone marrow aspirate sample is obtained by inserting a needle into the bone marrow space and withdrawing 5- 10 milliliters (mL) of marrow in several different syringes. These samples are then transferred to evacuated blood collection tubes containing the anticoagulants required for the types of assays desired. A portion of this liquid marrow is smeared for staining and evaluation under light microscopy. It can be sent for various types of laboratory assessment including : immunophenotyping, cytogenetic evaluation, and molecular analysis.While bone marrow aspirations and biopsies are usually obtained by the hematologist or oncologist, they are evaluated and interpreted by a hematopathologist with the assistance of the laboratory technologists who prepare and stain the smears. In many laboratory settings the technologists also perform the bone marrow differentials.

View Page
Clinical Laboratory's Role: Bone Marrow Aspirates and Biopsies

While the role of the hematopathologist in the interpretation of bone marrow samples is well defined, the role of the technologist can vary greatly depending on the laboratory and the clinical setting.In some cases, physicians deliver prepared bone marrow smears to the laboratory that they have been prepared at the patient's bedside . In other settings, the technologist assists in the bone marrow collection procedure by making bone marrow smears at the bedside. There are also situations where a physician will bring anticoagulated bone marrow in specimen tubes to the laboratory for the technologist to smear, stain, and distribute as the hematopathologist requires.Once the marrow smears are prepared and stained, the next steps will vary depending on the laboratory. In some institutions it may be the hematology or oncology fellows/attending physicians who are responsible for counting and evaluating the aspirate smears, while the biopsy samples go to pathology. In other settings it may be the technologists who perform the differentials while hematopathology completes the evaluation and interpretation.

View Page
Rules for Bone Marrow Differentials

Bone marrow differentials have significant differences from peripheral blood differentials that need to be considered as they are reviewed and counted.One of the most important facts to consider is the large variability in cellularity and cell distribution depending on the type of preparation that is used. Choosing where to count and when to use which of the smear types available to you, takes time and experience and can be directed by a pathologist's preference.Regardless of how many, or what types of smears you have available to choose from, you will always start with a simple visual inspection of your smears. Begin by recording the patient identification information as well as date of sample, and any other mandatory patient identifying information necessary for your laboratory. Record aspiration site information when provided. Many patients will have bilateral bone marrow aspirates performed as part of a diagnostic or staging workup. Standard aspiration sites are: posterior iliac crest (PIC), anterior iliac Crest (ANT), sternum (S), spinous process (SP) and sometimes in very young children, bone marrow is obtained from the tibia (T). Be aware, that while a bilateral bone marrow aspirate usually involves an aspirate of the same site from opposite sides of the body, e.g., L-PIC and R-PIC, in some situations, a bilateral staging aspirate will be from two different compartments on the same side, e.g. R-AIC, R-PIC. Observe the appearance of the bone marrow smears. Do any have feather edges? Are there fragments or spicules present on any of the smears available? If so, they should be your first choice to view, since they are more representative of what the biopsy will show if one was obtained. Once you select your smears, scan using 10X magnification on the microscope. Are some of the fragments/smears so thick that you cannot see good morphology? If so, reject these areas/slides. Are some of the fragments/smears so thin that everything is smashed? These areas/smears cannot be used either. Are there areas in the vicinity of any of the fragments that have good staining characteristics as well as readable morphology? This is where you should begin your differential.

View Page
Cellularity and Additional Information

Depending on the institution and laboratory protocol, comments on the degree of cellularity, presence of megakaryocytes, and presence of tumor cells may be added to the report by the technologist who performs the differential count. The terms used to describe these features will be determined by the hematopathologist.Cellularity is usually rated as normal, increased, or decreased. However, other terms may be used as well, such as "slightly decreased," "markedly decreased," or "markedly increased," etc. When spicules/fragments are not present, terms like "hemodilute" can be used to note very dilute bone marrows or, it may simple be marked as "not evaluable". For megakaryocytes the common terms of quantitation may be: None Seen Rare Decreased Present Normal Increased The presence of tumor cells should be noted as well as the slide or site in which they were observed. The top image on the right demonstrates a bone marrow that is markedly hypocellular. Only fragments of the bone marrow structure are present, with very few bone marrow precursor cells observed. Compare this to the bottom image that depicts a bone marrow that is normocellular.

View Page
Responsibility of the Technologist versus Hematopathologist

Depending on the laboratory protocols and the hematopathologist's preference, the technologist's responsibilities in bone marrow aspirate processing and reviewing can vary from simply staining slides to complex tasks such as smearing, staining, counting and distributing samples based on laboratory standard protocols. While laboratory professionals may perform bone marrow differentials, it is the hematopathologist's responsibility to review, interpret, and verify those counts after evaluating all of the samples that were provided. This includes both the bone marrow aspirate and biopsy smears, as well as the flow cytometry data, if required. When differentiating and counting samples with increased numbers of blasts, the technologist may make a determination of cell line for the blasts, according to observations on a Wright or Wright-Giemsa stained slide, but the hematopathologist may modify this placement based on flow cytometry data and additional special stains.The laboratory technologist can assess cellularity, presence of megakaryocytes, and possible presence of tumor cells on the bone marrow smears. Ultimately, the hematopatholgist is responsible for interpreting the bone marrow differential results after meticulous review of all smears stained, as well as any biopsy sections available. It is also the hematopatholgist's responsibility to identify tumor cells that may be present.In laboratories that use a standard order set with sample drop off directly from bedside, it is the technologist's responsibility to split and distribute the marrow based on laboratory protocol. It is hematopathologist's responsibility to verify that standard order testing was actually sent and to add on any additional testing deemed necessary, based on clinical history and lab findings. Once you become comfortable with bone marrow morphology and more familiar with your laboratory's protocols, performing marrow differentials will become less intimidating and more of a collaboration between technologist and hematopathologist.

View Page
Rules for Bone Marrow Differentials, continued

It is important to note that not all smears will have good areas to perform a differential in the vicinity of the bone marrow fragment. When this occurs, you must keep looking on additional smears. This is one of the reasons that several smears are stained and prepared for possible review. It can take time to recognize from 10x magnification what will be countable on 50x magnification. The best tip is to be patient and do not fail to keep on looking! In fact, sometimes it may be necessary to stain additional smears/slides, if available, to obtain enough readable material. While you are checking the smears on 10x magnification for readable areas, you should take the time to evaluate and record the following: The cellularity of the bone marrow sample Presence and number of megakaryocytes Presence of tumor cells Anything else out of the ordinary, which should be noted on the report (such as evidence of hemophagocytosis, storage disease etc.).Once you have decided where to count the marrow, you will perform the differential count. Usually a 200-cell bone marrow differential is the minimum acceptable count. However, more cells may be required depending on your laboratory/pathology protocol. Remember, unlike peripheral differentials, all nucleated cells are included in the total count, including all maturation stages of the erythroid cell series.Cell counts are performed on 40 - 50x magnification with oil depending on the optics of your scope, moving up to 100x magnification with oil as needed for fine detail. Once oil is added to the smear, move systematically through your chosen area until the morphology/cellularity/stain quality is no longer acceptable, then move back to 10x power to find another good area in the vicinity of the fragment to continue your count. You may need to progress from one slide to the next to accumulate enough cells for your differential. In fact, if there is variability in cell distribution from one smear or fragment/spicule to the next, then the count should be split between more than one smear/fragment to avoid a biased final count.If there are no spicules, then the differential should be performed in any portion of the slide that demonstrates readable morphology. In pull preps and coverslip preps, this will usually be in the thin area near the edge of the smear. If differential-type (wedge) smears are available, then the usual feathered-edge area should be used. On any of these smears, be sure that you are in deep enough from the thin edge so that the numbers of stripped cells are kept at a minimum to avoid skewing the count, as some cell types are more fragile than others.The pathologist is ultimately responsible for the final sign-out and will change/adjust/return smears for recount if there is any disagreement over numbers and cell types.

View Page
Rules for Bone Marrow Differentials, continued

Bone marrow smears can be very cellular and it can be difficult to keep track of where you are on the smear while keeping your correct hand position on the keyboard . Having a good strategy to use when counting cells and performing differentials can make this less difficult. On peripheral blood differentials, it is easy to observe and count each cell individually as the stage is moved to bring the next field into view. However, with bone marrows, the total number of keys that need to be used on the differential counter is greater than the number that need to be used with a peripheral blood smear and the number of cells per field is also increased dramatically, making it easy to lose track of the cells on the smear or one's hand/keyboard placement. It can be simpler and less stressful to work on the quadrant system. There are two different ways to do this: Divide the field into quadrants. Count the individual cells in each quadrant separately. This decreases the number of cells into more manageable bites. However, you still have the increased number of cell types to deal with and possible keyboard frame-shifts. Divide your keyboard into quadrants. Search your field for a limited number of cell types and tally all you see before moving on to the next grouping of cell types. Once you tally all your groups then move on to the next field (e.g., lymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, eosinophils, basophils, plasma cells, erythroids, segmented neutrophils, bands, etc). You can make these small groupings for any cells as long as you cover the entire list of cell types that your laboratory reports in its bone marrow differential protocol. Remember that blasts are identified by cell type and there will usually be a separate key for pronormoblasts, myeloblasts, lymphoblasts, and possibly monoblasts and plasmablasts. It is possible to combine both methods, using the keyboard quadrant technique with a restricted portion of the total microscope field. This is useful when you are getting close to your total tally and do not want to alter the balance by only counting one cell type for the last few cells.

View Page
Coverslip Smear Preparation Technique

Coverslip smears are made on 22 x 22 mm coverslips using a technique similar to the pull prep method. If done correctly, both coverslips will have quality smears that will appear similar to a thumb print. To create a coverslip smear preparation, a coverslip is picked up by the corner and the point is held between the thumb and forefinger in one hand. The other hand uses a capillary pipette to transfer a small drop of concentrated bone marrow on to the center of the coverslip. The capillary pipette is put down and a second coverslip is placed over the first to form a star shape. When the marrow has spread almost to the edges, the coverslips are slid apart using the protruding corners/points of the star. The motion is a parallel slide with no pushing or rotation of the wrist as the coverslips are slid apart.Making smears on coverslips requires manual dexterity. Not only does the laboratory professional need to be proficient in the use of capillary tubes to pipette bone marrow, he/she must also be able to manipulate fragile coverslips without breakage. Staining also requires modified/adapted methods.A 22x22 mm coverslip can be glued to a standard slide after staining to provide easy evaluation. Since only a minimal amount of bone marrow is needed, many smears can be made from a small bone marrow sample. Another advantage is the small amount of storage space required. Three dozen coverslips will easily fit in an envelope and would take considerably less storage space compared to the same number of regular slides.

View Page
Biopsy Touch Preparation Technique

While smears from the bone marrow aspirate are the most common preparations, touch preparations (touch preps) made from the bone marrow biopsy core may also be useful or necessary. When aspirates are difficult or a dry tap occurs, the only sample available to be evaluated in the hematology laboratory may be the bone marrow biopsy. To create a fresh biopsy touch preparation, the fresh bone marrow core is gently rolled between two slides, then gently rolled between five or six pairs of coverslips. There should be enough cellular elements present when using this method for the laboratory professional to evaluate. The imprints will be wet and cellular at first but as the surface dries it will eventually become less cellular. At this point the core is placed in fixative and sent to pathology for evaluation. The number of touch preps you can make is dependent on how wet/ bloody or fibrotic the core is to begin with, but even one set can be enough to aid in diagnosis.While it is not practical to practice making touch preps from a real biopsy core, it is possible to practice the technique by using a length of applicator stick soaked in either blood or stain to simulate a real biopsy core. To do this, simply break off a short, 0.5 inch piece of a standard plain or cotton tipped applicator stick and soak it in the fluid of your choice. As you roll it between slides or coverslips you will see the pattern it leaves behind. Think of the motion of a teeter-totter (seesaw) as you roll. There should be very little downward force on the core as you coax it to roll. If the core will not roll then you can just touch the slides or coverslips to the surface of the core few times on each slide.Note: If the biopsy is placed directly into fixative and sent to pathology, it must first be decalcified before it can be sectioned and stained. This process will take at least 24 hours depending on the lab and if additional stains are required, it may be at least 48 hours before a result is released.

View Page
Bone marrow Smear Preparation

Accurate interpretation of bone marrow aspirate specimens is highly dependent on two factors: The quality of the sample obtained by the clinician The quality of the prepared bone marrow smears While the technologists have no control over the quality of the aspirate obtained by the clinician, in most cases they are able to impact the quality of laboratory prepared smears.The method used for preparing slides may be dependent on sample volume, staining techniques, storage space, clinical setting, patient status, and hematopathologist's preference. Bone marrow sample preparations can be made on slides or coverslips from a direct marrow sample or a sample that is manipulated to enhance cellularity (selected for marrow fragments or spicules). In situations where the technologist goes to the bedside, touch-preparation (touch-prep) smears from the biopsy core can be prepared before it is placed in fixative.Regardless of which method is the preferred primary technique at your institution, it is useful to be familiar with other methods, since there may be a situation when the use of an alternate method is the only way to obtain an interpretable smear.When adequate samples are provided, it is desirable to make several slides or coverslips so that there will be enough preps available for all the possible tests/special stains that may be requested. The extra smears can be stored at room temperature and protected from light in an envelope or sleeve for further testing, if required.

View Page
Bone marrow Smear Preparation: Selecting Fragments

Most bone marrow slides are made simply by placing a drop of bone marrow on a slide and using a smear preparation technique. However, in order to obtain consistently high quality smears, it is necessary to select or concentrate the fragments on these smears. Selecting or concentrating fragments can be performed with different methodologies. At the patient bedside, some clinicians will use the touch-preparation or pull-preparation method, while tilting the slide to allow excess blood to roll off. This leaves more of the bone marrow spicules on the slide. This can be wasteful and rather messy but does not require a high level of skill.A less wasteful method is to pour a portion of the marrow aspirate into a small petri dish and swirl it about, then tilt the dish to reveal the marrow spicules. These can then be extracted using a capillary pipette with a micro-pipette bulb and transferred to the slide for use in making smears. This technique allows the laboratory professional to make numerous smears containing fragments rather than relying on the random luck of the drop. Any excess marrow can be saved and returned to the EDTA tube for further testing. This capillary pipette concentration technique can be coupled with any of the smear preparation techniques but does require practice to perfect and maintain proficiency. When coupled with the coverslip method, it is possible to make 2-3 dozen quality smears from as little as a 0.25 - 0.50 mL of marrow aspirate, making it ideal in small sample volume situations.

View Page
Automated Stainers

The procedure your laboratory utilizes for bone marrow stains is determined by the type of stainer available to you. The stainer available may also dictate the type of smear preparations that your laboratory makes. There are several types of automated hematology stainers on the market today. Some stainers are simple continuous-feed stainers with limited programmability. Some are batch stainers that can have multiple programs, customizable to the sample type or stain preference of the user. Other stainers are dip stainers that automatically move a slide rack from bucket to bucket, or an inline corkscrew that moves slides down a platen and dispenses stain/solutions at fixed positions. Finally, there are centrifuge stainers that apply stains to a spinning slide tray during programmed intervals.Hema-tek® stainers, with a fixed stain area, require shorter preparations on long slides, so slide pull preps or differential smears would be the laboratory standard. Since the stain time and volume is fixed, bone marrow slides may need to be stained twice and sometimes even three times for extremely cellular bone marrows. When using this type of stainer, always check the stain quality before coverslipping.Automated dipping stainers can be used with either long slides or coverslips,when utilizing a coverslip basket, so the choice of smear type is driven by laboratory and pathologist preference. As with manual staining times, the laboratory should have a separate program for bone marrow staining that reflects the need for longer contact times. Wescor® hematology stainers are quite flexible. They are centrifugal stainers that are pre-programmed for rapid, Wright-Giemsa and May-Grunwald stains, as well as having programmable custom settings. Each stain type can be adjusted for color balance and intensity. They can be used with slides or coverslips when coverslip adapters are utilized. Since it is a centrifugal staining system, stain precipitate is minimized and it is very easy to change programs as you shift from peripheral bloods to fluids cytospins to bone marrows.

View Page
Bone Marrow Delivery

In some institutions, the laboratory technologist does not assist the clinician at the bedside with the bone marrow aspiration procedure. Instead the clinician delivers the bone marrow sample to the laboratory, similarly to other laboratory specimens. When this is the case, the bone marrow sample may be delivered in one of two manners with the laboratory's responsibilities dependent on which method is used. A clinician may deliver to the laboratory a specified number of smears, made at bedside, along with the bone marrow sample. Samples may also be designated for flow cytometry, cytogenetics, or molecular diagnostics. A clinician may deliver a standard package of bone marrow aspirate to the laboratory in various evacuted blood collection tubes. In this situation the laboratory will usually have a standard order set that directs the distribution of the marrow samples based on diagnosis. The hematology laboratory will use these samples to prepare the bone marrow smears, while the other tubes would be distributed for flow cytometry, cytogenetics, molecular diagnostics, etc. based on the direction of the hematopathologist.

View Page
The role of the laboratory technologist in processing bone marrow aspirates can vary depending on laboratory and clinician protocols. Which of the following roles may be performed by a laboratory technologist?(Select all that apply) View Page

Cardiac Biomarkers
Introduction

Each year in the US alone, over one million individuals are diagnosed with an acute myocardial infarction (AMI) and approximately one half of these have had an AMI in the past. The incidence of congestive heart failure (CHF) is on the rise. It is the leading cause of hospitalization in those age 65 and older. Healthcare costs for cardiovascular disease (CVD), which includes coronary artery disease (CAD) and coronary heart disease (CHD) are more than $400 billion each year. Heart disease is currently the leading cause of death in the US. As many as 1% to 5% of patients with an AMI are misdiagnosed in the emergency department and are discharged. The laboratory's role is especially important in individuals with an AMI who present with AMI symptoms but have a nondiagnostic electrocardiogram (ECG).

View Page
While driving home after work, a 45-year-old male construction worker is involved in a collision with another car. Upon arrival in the emergency department, the patient complains of chest pain along with severe pain from accident injuries. X-rays and laboratory assays including cardiac biomarkers are ordered. BiomarkerReference ValuePatient Result at PresentationPatient Result at 6 HoursPatient Result at 12 Hours CK-MB< 5.0 ng/mL7.0 ng/mL6.0 ng/mL6.5 ng/mL cTnI<0.4 ng/mL0.03 ng/mL< 0.03 ng/mL< 0.03 ng/mLDo the cardiac marker results indicate that an AMI is causing his chest pain?View Page
Use of hs-CRP, Measurement, and Ranges

In 2002, the AHA and CDC recommended measurement of hs-CRP as an aid in the diagnosis and treatment of CVD. At low levels, it can detect those at risk for cardiac heart disease. At high levels in those with no history of heart disease, it indicates a high risk for AMI, stroke, or peripheral vascular disease. For patients with ACS or stable coronary disease, hs-CRP is used to predict future coronary events.Nephelometry and immunoturbidimetric measurement methods provide lower limits needed for hs-CRP assays. Due to variation in results among clinical laboratories, work is underway for standardization of measurements. Ranges of hs-CRP in prediction of risk for CVD are: <1.0 mg/L Low CVD risk 1.0-3.0 mg/L Average risk for CVD >3.0 mg/L High risk for future CVDIf results are >10.0 mg/L, the patient should be evaluated for an acute inflammatory condition.

View Page
Homocysteine

Homocysteine is a sulfur-containing amino acid in the blood plasma. Elevation of homocysteine has been linked to a higher risk of cardiovasular disease (CVD). This elevation is significant in those where family history places them at risk for CVD.Folic acid, Vitamin B6, and VitaminB12 help to prevent elevated homocysteine levels. Recent data shows that folate fortification of foods has reduced the average level of homocysteine in the United States. Laboratory testing for plasma homocysteine levels may improve the assessment of cardiac risk, particularly in patients with a personal or family history of CVD, but with no well-established risk factors present such as smoking high cholesterol, or high blood pressure.

View Page
Comparisons of Concentrations of CRP and hs-CRP

Laboratory Test Test Result Interpretation CRP 10.2 mg/L Acute inflammation hs-CRP 0.5 mg/L Low risk for cardiac disease hs-CRP 1.5 mg/L Average risk for cardiac disease hs-CRP 3.5 mg/L High risk for cardiac disease

View Page
References

Arneson W, Brickell J, eds.Clinical Chemistry: A Laboratory Perspective. Philadelphia: FA Davis; 2007.Burtis CA, Ashwoood ER, Burns DE, eds. Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry. 6th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier Saunders; 2008.Carreiro-Lewandowski E. Update on cardiac markers. Lab Med. 2006;37:597-605.D'Amore PJ. Evolution of C-reactive protein as a cardiac risk factor. Lab Med. 2005;36:234-238.Dotsenko O, Chackathayil J, Lip GY. Cardiac biomarkers:myths, facts and future horizons. Expert Review of Molecular Diagnostics. 2007;7:693-697.Foley, K. BNP: a novel biomarker. Advance for Medical Laboratory Professionals. August 25, 2008:9.Kaplan LA, Pesce AJ, Kazmierczak SC, eds. Clinical Chemistry Theory, Analysis, Correlation. St. Louis, MO: Mosby Elsevier Science; 2007. McDowell J. Reviewing the evidence for BNP, NT-proBNP testing. Clin Lab News. 2006;32:1, 3, 5.Rollins G. cTn and MI - what's the diagnosis? Clin Lab News. 2009;35:1, 3-4.Rollins, G. The BNP debate. Clin Lab News. 2009;35:1,3-4.Schreiber D, Miller SM. Use of cardiac markers in the emergency department. eMedicine. Updated July 2009. Available at: http://emedicine.medscape.com/article/811905-print.Accessed March 25, 2013. Thygesen K, Alpert JS, White HD. Universal definition of myocardial infarction. Circulation 2007;116:2634-2653.

View Page

Case Studies in Clinical Microbiology
Review 1

Smith KR, Fisher HC III, Hook, EW III: Prevalence of fluorescent monoclonal antibody-nonreactive Neisseria gonorrhoeae in five North American sexually transmitted disease clinics. J Clin Microbiol 34:1551-1552, 1996 We compared a direct fluorescent monoclonal antibody (DFA) test with alternative enzymatic and fermention tests for identifying presumptive gonococcal isolates in a systematic sample from patients attending five sexually transmitted disease clinics in five cities. Fourteen (2.5%) of 556 isolates from three clinics were nonreactive with the DFA confirmatory reagent and reactive by both the Quad-Ferm and Rapid NH tests. The prevalence of DFA-nonreactive Neisseria gonorrhoeae isolates varies geographically and is independent of local methods for the identification of possible gonococci. On the basis of our findings, we recommend that for use in medicolegal and other instances in which a diagnosis of gonorrhea has the potential to have far-reaching effects, it is appropriate to test DFA reagent-nonreactive, oxidase-positive, gram-negative diplococci by alternative methods of gonococcal confirmation. Although the prevalence of such isolates could change, the fluorescent monoclonal antibody confirmation reagents remain useful for many clinical situations. Their ease of use and ready applicability for screening large numbers of isolates make them useful for many laboratories.

View Page
Acute Onset Pneumonia

A 70-year-old transient with a productive cough, pleuritic chest pain radiating to the mid back, fever, and chills was seen in the emergency room. Expectorated sputum was sent to the laboratory for gram stain and culture. (Continue on next page)

View Page
The oxacillin screen test alone is not sufficient for determining the susceptibility to penicillin for S. pneumoniae isolates recovered from cerebrospinal fluid (CSF).View Page
Isolates of Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, K. oxytoca and clinically significant isolates of Proteus mirabilis may possess extended-spectrum beta-lactamase (ESBL) activity.View Page
Clinical History

A 72- year old woman had a history of recurrent urinary tract infections over the past several months, for which she had received different regimens of antibiotics including ampicillin, trimethoprim-sulfasoxazole, and ciprofloxacin.Relapses often occurred 10 days to two weeks after cessation of therapy.The current flare up, manifest by dysuria, lower abdominal pain and cloudy urine was accompanied by shaking chills and spiking fever.A sterile mid-stream urine specimen was sent to the laboratory for culture.

View Page
Enterococcus faecium Identification

As a high percentage of Enterococcus faecium strains carry the Van A gene and are highly resistant to vancomycin. Species identifications are performed in some laboratories where MIC susceptibility testing may not be available. Methods for the phenotypic separation of E. faecium from E. faecalis are limited. Illustrated in this image are positive reactions for acid production from arabinose and melibiose (yellow color), characteristic of E. faecium. E. faecalis are negative for these reactions. A few preformed substrates such as beta galactosidase (E. faecium positive, E. faecalis negative) also serve to separate these two species, accomplished by certain commercial systems that include these substrates. E. faecium is not motile, an additional characteristic helpful to separate vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus species from E. cassiloflavus and E. gallinarum, both of which are motile, and carry the low level resistant gene VAN-c.

View Page
Vancomycin Resistance

Vancomycin and ampicillin resistance among Enterococcus species, particularly E. faecium have been on a steady increase. The disk diffusion screening test is used in many laboratories to detect vancomycin resistant strains. Note in the upper image that no zone of inhibition is seen around either the vancomycin or the ampicillin disk, indicating resistance to both drugs. Vancomycin-resistant Enterococci (VRE) have been divided into three phenotypes--Van A, Van B, and Van C. Vancomycin-resistant strains of E. faecalis and E. faecium are commonly of the Van A phenotype, demonstrating high level resistance (MIC's higher than 64 ug/mL), as illustrated by total resistance of the test strain in the E test and the VA disk, as illustrated in the lower image. The strain shown in the lower image, however, is ampicillin susceptible at the level of 1 ug/mL (see lower set of yellow arrows), indicating that this drug may be effective in treating the urinary tract infection.

View Page
Review 2

Citron DM. Appelbaum PC.: How far should a clinical laboratory go in identifying anaerobic isolates, and who should pay? Clinical Infectious Diseases. 16 Suppl 4:S435-8, 1993 Identification of anaerobic bacteria in specimens from sites of infection due to mixed organisms can be time-consuming and expensive. Laboratories should limit anaerobic workups by testing only those specimens that have been properly collected and transported to the laboratory. Use of selective and differential media for initial processing can provide rapid and relevant information to the clinician. Anaerobes isolated from normally sterile sites and sites of serious infection should always be completely identified. Group-or genus-level identifications may suffice in other instances. The Bacteroides fragilis group of organisms should always be identified because of their virulence and resistance to many antimicrobial agents. Some of the other organisms that warrant identification include Clostridium septicum (associated with gastrointestinal malignancy); Clostridium ramosum, Clostridium innocuum, and Clostridium clostridioforme (which are resistant to antibiotics); Clostridium perfringens (a cause of myonecrosis and gas gangrene,potentially serious infection); anaerobic cocci (which may be resistant to metronidazole and clindamycin); and fusobacteria (which may be virulent and resistant to clindamycin and penicillin).

View Page
Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) Screen

Perhaps the most efficient means for detecting methicillin-resistant staphylococci in clinical laboratories is the use of the agar dilution screening test. Illustrated in the image is a Mueller-Hinton agar plate containing 6 ug/mL of oxicillin, previously inoculated with a strain of Staphylococcus aureus. Oxacillin is used as a marker for methicillin resistance because it is more stable in the agar medium. Growth on this screening medium is presumptive for methicillin resistance. Thus, in the presence of growth, as shown here, a follow-up minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) test must be performed to determine the exact level of resistance.

View Page
Most strains of S. anginosus (milleri) carry the F antigen (see image). Rare strains that carry the group A antigen can be differentiated from S. pyogenes by which of the following laboratory tests:View Page
Clinical History

The prototype history for this organism is either a still birth or a neonate with death ensuing within two or three days post-partum due to high fever, sepsis, and respiratory distress. The mother usually experienced a flu-like illness late in the third trimester of pregnancy, characterized by low-grade fever, myalgias, malaise, and backache. In this case, biopsy material of brain tissue obtained at autopsy was submitted to the pathology laboratory for tissue diagnosis and fluid from the pia-arachnoid was sent to the microbiology laboratory for culture.

View Page
Cellulitis Lesion

A 35-year-old man presented in the emergency room with an erythematous, vesiculo-pustular lesion of the arm near the elbow (see image). One week previously he had scratched his arm on the antenna of his car while washing the windshield. He noticed a red area about three days after the incident, which then spread to involve the adjacent tissue. The central pustule developed on the day he was seen. Material from the center of the pustule was sent to the microbiology laboratory for culture.

View Page

Cerebrospinal Fluid (retired 7/17/2012)
Specimen Labeling and Transport

The cerebrospinal fluid sample should be properly labeled with the tube number, patient's name and hospital number or other unique identifier. The samples should be transported to the laboratory immediately.

View Page
Safety Precautions

Important safety precautions must be observed when handling cerebrospinal fluid. The following guidelines apply:Semi-automatic micropipettes and disposable plastic chambers are the safest option for CSF testing. Many laboratories still use the hemacytometer with disposable pipets.If disposable materials are not used, soak contaminated reusable pipets, hemacytometer and coverslip in 70% alcohol or Wexide.All disposable items should be placed in a biohazard container for appropriate disposal.Wash hands thoroughly when the examination is completed.Spinal fluids which are to be discarded must be placed in biohazard containers for appropriate disposal.Careful attention to specimen processing and handling will help ensure that accurate results are obtained.

View Page
Normal Characteristics

Normal cerebrospinal fluid has the following characteristics:colorlessclearno clot presentspecific gravity of 1.006 - 1.008pH 7.3When the specimen is received in the laboratory, the macroscopic examination is performed immediately. The specific gravity examination may be optional in some laboratories.

View Page
WBC Correction for Traumatic Tap

A calculation is used to correct CSF WBC counts which are falsely increased due to a traumatic tap: WBCs added = WBC(blood) x RBC(CSF) / RBC(blood)The blood WBC count is multiplied by the ratio of the cerebrospinal fluid RBC count to blood RBC count.The result is the number of artificially introduced WBCs. The true CSF white cell count is then calculated by subtracting the artificially introduced WBCs from the actual CSF WBC count. If the patient's peripheral WBC and RBC counts are within normal limits, some laboratories use the following formula: Subtract one white cell from the CSF WBC count for each 750 RBC counted in the spinal fluid.

View Page
Cytospin Technique

The cytospin technique uses a high speed centrifuge to concentrate the cells on a slide in a uniform monolayer 6 mm in diameter. The monolayer distribution enhances the morphological appearance of the cells present.Allow the slides to dry in air for several minutes and then stain them with Wright-Giemsa stain. Cytospin slides may be placed in an automatic stainer or stained manually.Perform a 100 or 200 cell differential and record the number of neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, lymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, and blasts cells.Pathologists must review any slide which has tumor cells, unidentified cells, or immature stages of cells, such as blasts.Since criteria for review may vary from one laboratory to another, be sure to check the requirements in your laboratory before reporting the differential.

View Page

Chemical Screening of Urine by Reagent Strip
Urine Specimen Collection

It is important for a quality urine sample to be sent to the laboratory in order for an accurate set of results to be produced. There are various types of urine samples that may be acceptable for urinalysis in the laboratory. The most common urine collection types are:Random Specimen: This is the specimen type which is sent to the laboratory for analysis most commonly. This type of urine sample is easy to obtain and is also readily available. As the name implies, the random specimen can be collected at any time. Patients should be careful not to touch the inside of the cup or cup lid to avoid any contamination.First Morning Specimen: This type of urine specimen is collected when the patient first wakes up in the morning. This is also occasionally called an 8-hour urine specimen.Midstream Clean Catch Specimen: This type of urine specimen concentrates on the reduction of contaminants in the urine sample by requiring special cleansing protocols. The urine midstream is then collected into a clean container.Other, less common types of urine specimens include:Timed Collection SpecimenCatheter Collection SpecimenSuprapubic Aspiration SpecimenPediatric SpecimenThe general procedure for using a reagent strip is outlined in this exercise. Each test on the strip will be discussed in detail in the remaining exercises.

View Page
Reagent Strip Procedure

Using a fresh, well-mixed uncentrifuged urine, hold the reagent strip by the opposite end from the test areas and dip the stick into the specimen so that all test areas are immersed in the specimen. Remove the stick immediately. Prolonged immersion in the sample may wash out the test reagents.Hold strip in a horizontal position and run the edge of the strip against the rim of the urine container or touch the long edge of the strip to absorbent towel or gauze to remove excess urine (do not blot the strip). If you are using a dipstick reader, place the strip immediately onto the tray of the reader.Replace the cap on the container to prevent deterioration of remaining strips.If you are reading the tests manually, proceed with these instructions. Each laboratory may have a slightly different urinalysis procedure for manual chemical reagent strips. However, the procedure below is a general version that should apply to most laboratories.Maintain the strip in a horizontal position to prevent mixing of reagent chemicals and observe the reagent pads at the specified time periods as indicated on the chemical reagent strip container or procedure. Color changes that occur after the stated maximum read time are not valid.Hold the strip close to the chart and compare the colors to read the results. A good light source facilitates accurate reading.Carefully record results on pre-printed worksheets upon observation of each reagent pad result.The video on this page demonstrates correct technique when a dipstick reader is used.

View Page
Quality control procedures should be performed with each new lot of chemical reagent strips, and as often as required by the laboratory's procedure.View Page
Urine Specimen Processing and Transportation

In order to ensure proper stability of the specimen and accurate test results, there are guidelines in place to aid in the appropriate urine processing and transportation. These guidelines include: Ensuring that all urine collection and/or transport containers should be clean and free of debris or interfering substances.Ensuring that the collection and/or transport container has a secure lid and is leak resistant. Leak-resistant containers reduce specimen loss and healthcare worker exposure to the specimen while also protecting the specimen from contaminants.Utilizing urine containers that are made of break-resistant plastic instead of glass.Utilizing urine containers that do not leach interfering substances into the specimen.Utilizing collection containers and/or transport tubes which will not leak within the pneumatic tube system (if one is used within the laboratory facility). A leak-proof device in this situation is paramount.Proper labeling and correct identification should be applied to the collection container or tubes. This includes noting the time the specimen was collected. Remember that urinalysis specimens must be analyzed within 2 hours of collection.Ensuring that there is sufficient volume to fill the tubes and/or perform the test.

View Page
A urine specimen was collected at 6:00 a.m. and remained at room temperature until it was received in the laboratory at 3:30 p.m. How may the pH of the specimen be affected by the extended time at room temperature if bacteria are present in the specimen?View Page
Urine Glucose Analysis

The analysis for glucose on a chemical reagent strip is a double-sequential enzyme reaction, utilizing the glucose-oxidase/peroxidase method. In the first reaction, glucose oxidase catalyzes the oxidation of glucose to gluconic acid and hydrogen peroxide. Then, the peroxidase catalyzes the oxidation of a chromogen by the hydrogen peroxide to form a colored product. The chemical reagent strip glucose pad is then analyzed and recorded at the set interval stated by the manufacturer.This method does not react with lactose, fructose or galactose. Study the dipstick color chart in your laboratory to become familiar with the range of color changes. NOTE: The urine specimen should be analyzed while at room temperature for these enzyme reactions to occur properly.

View Page
False Positive and Negative Urine Glucose Results

False Positives:False positive results can be attributed to strong oxidizing agents such as hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) or bleach (hypochlorite). False Negatives:False negative results occur when elements present in the urine interfere with either the enzymatic reaction or prevent the oxidation of potassium iodide. Examples of some substances that may produce false negative results, depending on the reagent strip that is used, include: large quantities of ketonesaspirinascorbic acid > 50 mg/dL levadopa5-hydroxyindoleacetic acidhomogentisic acidsodium fluoride ( a preservative) A specific gravity higher than 1.020 may lower glucose reagent sensitivity, especially in the presence of a high urine pH. Exposing reagent strips to excess humidity may also reduce glucose reagent reactivity.NOTE: Check the package insert of the reagent strips used in your laboratory for interfering substances that may affect glucose results.

View Page
Semi-Automated Instruments

Several manufacturers offer semi-automated instruments (chemical reagent strip, a.k.a. dipstick readers) for reading reagent strips. Use of an instrument removes the subjectivity of visually interpreting color changes on reagent strips, and assures that tests will be read at the correct time. Transcription errors can also be avoided if the instrument is interfaced with the laboratory information system as well. The technology employed is based on the principle of reflectance, with the amount of light reflected being inversely related to the concentration of substances present. An example of reflectance is the light which is scattered after light strikes an unpolished surface. Since each component on the dipstick produces a different color reaction, the light source for each test must be at the appropriate wavelength. This is accomplished either by using filters or monochromatic light sources. The percent reflectance is determined by dividing the test reflectance by the calibration reflectance and multiplying by 100. Algorithms are used to change the results obtained into a linear relationship with concentration of analyte.

View Page
Semi-automated and automated urine chemical reagent strip readers:View Page

Chemical Screening of Urine by Reagent Strip (retired March 2012)
A voided urine specimen is delivered from the women's clinic to the laboratory six hours after collection. The following results are reported:Color: yellow Protein: negative Bilirubin: negativeClarity: cloudy Glucose: negative Urobilinogen: 0.2 mg/dLSp. Gravity: 1.020 Ketone: negative Nitrite: positivepH: 9.0 Blood: negative Leukocyte esterase: negativeWhat might these results indicate?View Page
Reagent Strip Precautions

The reagent strips must be handled and stored properly in order to ensure that results are accurate. The following precautions should be observed:Store strips according to the manufacturer's recommendation. DO NOT expose strips to moisture, volatile fumes, or direct sunlight (emphasized in the image on the right). Remove only enough strips for immediate use and immediately recap the bottle. Avoid contamination of test strips. Do not touch the test areas with fingers and do not lay the test strips directly on the workbench. DO NOT use discolored strips. Compare the color of the unused strip to the negative area on the color chart provided by the company. The color should be similar. Check the expiration date. Re-label the container with a revised expiration date, if the manufacturer states a shortened usage period once the container has been opened. Reagent strips must be tested periodically (frequency defined by the laboratory) for clinical reactivity with normal and abnormal urine controls. Urine controls are available commercially or may be prepared and preserved in-house.

View Page
Procedural Considerations

Although the procedure is simple to perform, accurate results depend on careful adherence to manufacturer's directions and adequate quality control. Normal and abnormal controls should be tested whenever a new lot of strips is opened, and at the frequency defined by the laboratory's procedure. If quality control results do not correspond to the published control values, the problem must be resolved before patient samples are tested. High levels of ascorbic acid (Vitamin C) in the urine may inhibit some reagent strip reactions, such as glucose, blood, bilirubin, nitrate and leukocyte esterase. The urine dipstick's package insert will provide information about potential interfering substances, including ascorbic acid. Intensely colored urine may make it difficult to correctly interpret color reactions on the dipstick, as demonstrated in the image on the right. The affected tests should not be reported from the dipstick. It would be necessary to use an alternative method of testing if available.

View Page
Quality control procedures should be performed with each new lot of reagent strips, and as often as required by the laboratory's procedure.View Page
A urine specimen was collected at 6:00 A.M. and remained at room temperature until it was received in the laboratory at 3:30 P.M. How may the pH of the specimen be affected by the extended time at room temperature if bacteria are present in the specimen?View Page
Confirmatory Testing for Protein

Semiquantitative tests are used in some laboratories to confirm the presence of protein in the specimen when the result is positive on the urine dipstick. Tests that are used for confirmation include: sulfosalicylic acid (SSA); heat and acetic acid; nitric acid ring test; and Roberts' Ring Test. Any one of these procedures may be used for confirmation of the presence of protein. A protein dipstick result that is greater than a trace may be an indication of proteinuria.

View Page
False Negative Results

False negative results occur when elements present in the urine interfere with either the enzymatic reaction or prevent the oxidation of potassium iodide. Examples of such substances include: large quantities of ketones aspirin ascorbic acid > 50 mg/dL with some reagent strips levadopa 5-hydroxyindoleacetic acid homogentisic acid sodium fluoride ( a preservative)A specific gravity higher than 1.020 may lower glucose reagent sensitivity, especially in the presence of a high urine pH. Exposing reagent strips to excess humidity may also reduce glucose reagent reactivity.Check the package insert of the reagent strips used in your laboratory for interfering substances that may affect glucose results.

View Page
Test for Reducing Substances Other than Glucose

Urine specimens from certain pediatric patients should be tested for other reducing substances, such as galactose, when the results for glucose are negative using the routine dipstick method. The laboratory's procedure should define when additional testing is needed.

View Page
Semi-Automated Instruments

Several manufacturers offer semi-automated instruments (dipstick readers) for reading reagent strips. Use of an instrument removes the subjectivity of visually interpreting color changes on reagent strips, and assures that tests will be read at the correct time. Transcription errors will also be avoided if the instrument is interfaced with the laboratory information system. The technology employed is based on the principle of reflectance, with the amount of light reflected being inversely related to the concentration of substances present. An example of reflectance is the light which is scattered after light strikes an unpolished surface. Since each component on the dipstick produces a different color reaction, the light source for each test must be at the appropriate wavelength. This is accomplished either by using filters or monochromatic light sources. The percent reflectance is determined by dividing the test reflectance by the calibration reflectance and multiplying by 100. Algorithms are used to change the results obtained into a linear relationship with concentration of analyte.

View Page

Confirmatory and Secondary Urinalysis Screening Tests
Screening and Secondary Tests for Protein

The reagent strip protein method is based on the principle of "protein-error-of-indicators." It produces a visible colorimetric reaction that is capable of detecting most instances of proteinuria. Falsely elevated results can occur if the urine sample is visibly bloody.At one time, sulfosalicylic acid (SSA) was used to confirm all positive protein reagent strip results. However, this no longer routinely done. SSA is a precipitation method that reacts with all forms of protein. False-positives can occur. Any substance that is precipitated by acid will produce false-positive SSA results, including radiographic dyes, cephalosporins, penicillins, and sulfonamides. SSA may be used as a secondary protein detection method if the urine is highly colored so that the colorimetric reaction is masked on the reagent strip.

View Page
A urine specimen is received in the laboratory late in the afternoon. The specimen was collected early in the morning and was accidentally left in bright sunlight and at room temperature on a counter in the outpatient clinic. The test order is for urine bilirubin screening. Which of the following could occur as a result of the storage conditions?View Page
Limitations of the Procedure

The product profile for Ictotest® points out that bilirubin is very light sensitive, so urine specimens should be protected from excessive light exposure and examined as soon as possible after specimen collection. On standing, bilirubin, which has a goldish color, is oxidized to biliverdin, which is a green color. Many of the procedures used to detect bilirubin will not react with biliverdin, so false-negative results may occur if urine is not fresh when tested.

View Page
Testing for Reducing Substances Other Than Glucose

Some laboratories perform testing for other reducing substances on urine specimens from children below a certain age (eg, age 2) whenever a urinalysis is ordered. The purpose is to detect serious inborn errors of metabolism. The reducing substance assay uses the classic Benedict’s copper reduction reaction to detect glucose and other carbohydrate metabolites. If the reducing substance test (ie, Clinitest®) is positive and the reagent dipstick assay for urinary glucose is negative, it is possible that other reducing substances are present. Further testing would be required to diagnose the exact inborn error of metabolism. With the current practice in most U.S. states of screening all newborns for metabolic disorders, the urine test for reducing substances may be performed only when the clinician orders it, rather than the test being part of a routine urinalysis procedure. Clinitest® is not the recommended monitoring test for diabetics; glucose reagent strip testing is a better choice.

View Page
The 2-Drop Clinitest® Procedure

Record the test result that is associated with the color block that most closely matches the color of the test in the tube. Remember that the final color may not be the test result if the "pass through" phenomenon occurred. Test results should be recorded according to your laboratory's procedure. Laboratories may choose to record results as 1%, 2%, 3%, etc; 1+, 2+, 3+, etc; or 100mg/dL, 200mg/dL, 300mg/dL, etc. The result of the test in the top image is negative, and the result of the test in the bottom image, reported as a percentage, is 2%. (Note: Colors in the photograph may vary slightly from actual test colors.)

View Page

Department of Transportation (DOT) Federally Regulated Urine Specimen Collection Training
Custody and Control Form

While the Federally Regulated CCF must be used exclusively for DOT drug screen collections, there are extenuating circumstances when another form of CCF may be used. For example, where a post-accident collection must be made and the collector does not have time to obtain a Federally Regulated CCF. In this situation, a Non-Federally Regulated CCF may be used. The collector should note in the "Remarks" section why the Non-Regulated CCF was used.The use of a Non-Regulated CCF for a Federally Regulated collection is not a reason for the laboratory to refuse to test the specimens nor the Medical Review Officer (MRO) to release the results. The use of a Non-Regulated CCF for a Federally Regulated drug screen is a "correctable flaw," which may include the collector detailing the reason for using a Non-Federally Regulated CCF in a "Memorandum for Record."

View Page
Donor completes certification statement

The collector now directs the donor to read, sign, and date the certification statement located on the MEDICAL REVIEW OFFICER COPY (page 2 or "pink" copy) of the custody and control form. The donor must provide printed name, signature, date of birth, and day and evening contact telephone numbers. If the donor refuses to complete this section, the collector is to note the fact under the remarks section on page 1 (TEST FACILITY COPY).

View Page
Observed collection scenarios

Scenario 4: The donor returns from the restroom with a sufficient specimen. It is very warm to the touch. The collector is unable to obtain a reading from the temperature strip. Collector's response: The collector completes the collection and prepares the specimen for shipment. The collector explains the situation with a supervisor. If the supervisor concurs that an observed collection is in order, the collector next tells the donor that a new collection will be conducted under direct observation. The collector explains that because the temperature of the specimen was not within the acceptable range (90-100° F/32-38° C) there is suspicion of substitution or adulteration. A new CCF is initiated. The collector marks on the CCF that the collection is observed and notes under Remarks why it is observed. The collector also notes the control number of the suspect collection. The observed specimen along with the suspect specimen are both shipped to the laboratory in separate plastic tamper-resistant bags.

View Page
Broken Security Seal

If a security seal is broken while being removed from the CCF or during the application of the first seal on the primary specimen vial, the collector should transfer the information to a new CCF and use the seals from the second CCF.If one seal is already in place on a specimen vial and second seal is broken while being removed from the CCF or is broken during application on the second specimen vial or while the employee is initialing either seal, the collector should initiate a new CCF and note in the "Remarks" section how the seals were broken. The seals from the second CCF should be placed perpendicular to the original seals to avoid obscuring information on the original seals. The donor must initial the second set of seals also. The initials on all the seals must match. The collector should then draw a line through the specimen ID number (and bar code if present) on the original seals to ensure that the laboratory does not use that number for reporting the results. The collector must not pour the specimen into new vials.

View Page
Observed collection scenarios

Scenario 5: The collector notices that the urine the donor just handed to her has a very strong smell like that of a cleaning product such as bleach. Collector's response: The collector completes the collection in the usual manner and prepares the specimen for shipment. The collector explains the situation to a supervisor. If the supervisor concurs that an observed specimen should be collected, the collector explains to the donor that because of the strong, unusual smell, the first specimen is suspect for adulteration and that a directly observed collection will be done. A new CCF is initiated. The collector marks on the CCF that the collection is observed and notes under Remarks why it is observed. The collector also notes the control number of the suspect collection. The observed specimen along with the suspect specimen are both shipped to the laboratory in separate plastic tamper-resistant bags. In addition to an unusual smell, other indications of adulteration might be an unusual color that cannot be explained by medication, particles or debris in the urine, and a heavy or thick foam that is inconsistent with urine.

View Page
Fatal Flaws and Correctable Flaws

Fatal FlawsIt is important to remember that the following are fatal flaws and can cause the specimen not to be tested: Number on Custody and Control Form and security strips do not match. Security strip on the specimen vial is broken or shows evidence of tampering. Quantity of urine needed is not sufficient. There is no printed collector's name or signature.Correctable FlawsThe following are flaws that may be corrected by either sending a signed statement or a Memorandum for Record to the laboratory: The collector printed his or her name, but forgot to sign the CCF. The collector checked the temperature of the specimen, but forgot to note this fact on the CCF.

View Page

Dermal Puncture and Capillary Blood Collection
Finger Puncture

Procedural Step Comment Caution Greet and positively identify patient Always use at least two patient identifiers to ensure positive patient identification. Never rely on name placards that are placed on or near the patient's bed or crib to identify the patient. If there is a discrepancy in identification, do not proceed until the discrepancy is resolved. Explain the procedure If the patient is a small child, be at eye level when explaining the procedure. Also explain the procedure to the parent(s). If the patient is aware of what will be happening there is less chance of the patient suddenly jerking away his/her hand when the puncture occurs. Position patient appropriately An outpatient who is a small child should sit on the parent's lap. If necessary, seek assistance for finger puncture if the patient is a small child. Cleanse hands and put on gloves Use soap and water or alcohol-based gel to cleanse hands. Cleanse hands before donning gloves and after removing gloves. Warm puncture site if needed Use the method that is approved by the laboratory for prewarming the puncture site. Never use a moist cloth that has been heated in a microwave as this may cause injury to the patient. Gather appropriate equipment Only have needed equipment at hand. Keep track of ALL equipment to prevent patient injury. Cleanse the puncture site Use 70% isopropanol unless the patient is sensitive to alcohol. Allow the site to air dry. Performing the puncture before the alcohol has dried may hemolyze the blood specimen. Securely grasp and puncture finger Puncture the side edge of the fleshy pad of fingertip. Avoid extreme side and tip of finger. Discard puncture device into appropriate container Puncture device should be discarded into a sharps container that is puncture-proof, has rigid sides, and has a lid Do not discard puncture devices into regular trash or biohazard bags. Injury to personnel who handle these bags may occur. Wipe away the first drop of blood Use slight pressure to facilitate blood flow. The first drop of blood contains tissure fluid that may contaminate or dilute the blood specimen and affect test results. Collect blood into container Allow blood to flow freely into the collection device. Tap the container gently on a hard surface to move blood further down into the tube if necessary. Do not "milk" the finger or scrape the collection device across the finger to obtain specimen; both actions may cause the specimen to hemolyze. Mix specimen immediately upon completion of the collection. Apply pressure to the puncture site to stop the bleeding. Use gauze to apply pressure to the puncture site. It is not advisable to apply an adhesive bandage over the skin puncture site if the child is less than two years old as the child may place the bandage in his/her mouth. Label specimen Specimen must be labeled in the presence of the patient. Unlabeled specimens will be rejected by the laboratory.

View Page
Properly Filling and Mixing a Microcollection Container

When blood is collected into a microcollection container that has an anticoagulant, it is important that the container is filled to the appropriate level. The device should then be capped and the blood mixed well immediately following collection of the specimen. The manufacturer of the containers that are used specifies what is considered adequate mixing and the laboratory's collection procedure should be based on these recommendations. Mixing involves a gentle tapping on a hard surface to move the blood further down into the tube during collection and then capping the tube upon completion of the collection so that the tube can be mixed end-over-end for the specified number of times as shown in the image on the right. The correct fill is also important. A container that is overfilled will not be properly anticoagulated and clots may form that will affect the laboratory test results. A container that is underfilled may not contain sufficient specimen to perform the test(s) or the excess anticoagulant may interfere with the test. For example, excess anticoagulant could cause morphologic changes in blood cells.

View Page
References

Bersch C. ed. The ABCs of pre-, neo-, and post-natal testing. MLO. September 2009;41.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Procedures and Devices for the Collection of Diagnostic Capillary Blood Specimens; Approved Standard. Fifth ed. CLSI document H4-A5. NCCLS. Wayne, PA: 2004.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Procedures for the Handling and Processing of Blood Specimens; Approved Guideline. Third ed. CLSI document H18-A3. NCCLS.Wayne, PA: 2004.Ernst DJ. Applied Phlebotomy. Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: 2005.Garza D. Becan-McBride K. Phlebotomy Handbook. 7th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall: 2005.Stevens B, Yamada J, Ohlsson A. Sucrose for analgesia in newborn infants undergoing painful procedures. Available at http://www.nichd.nih.gov/cochrane/Stevens/Stevens.HTM accessed January 12, 2010.

View Page
Venous, Arterial, and Capillary Blood Specimens

Venous BloodVenous blood is deoxygenated blood that flows from tiny capillary blood vessels within the tissues into progressively larger veins to the right side of the heart. Venous blood is the specimen of choice for most routine laboratory tests. The blood is obtained by direct puncture to a vein, most often located in the antecubital area of the arm or the back (top) of the hand. At times, venous blood may be obtained using a vascular access device (VAD) such as a central venous pressure line or Hickmann Catheter or an IV start. Most laboratory reference ranges for blood analytes are based on venous blood.Arterial BloodDeoxygenated blood is pumped from the right side of the heart to the lungs where it takes up oxygen. The now oxygenated blood is pumped through the left side of the heart via arteries.The most common reason for collection of arterial blood is the evaluation of arterial blood gases. Arterial blood may be obtained directly from the artery (most commonly, the radial artery) by personnel who are trained to perform this procedure and are knowledgeable about the complications that could occur as a result of this procedure. Arterial blood may also be obtained from a vascular access device (VAD) inserted in an artery such as a femoral arterial line or Swan-Gantz catheter. Capillary BloodCapillary blood is obtained from capillary beds that consist of the smallest veins (venules) and arteries (arterioles) of the circulatory system. The venules and arterioles join together in capillary beds forming a mixture of venous and arterial blood. The specimen from a dermal puncture will therefore be a mixture of arterial and venous blood along with interstitial and intracellular fluids.Capillary blood is often the specimen of choice for infants, very young children, elderly patients with fragile veins, and severely burned patients. Point-of-care testing is often performed using a capillary blood specimen. Specimen Type Method of Collection Common Use Venous Direct puncture of vein by venipuncture; vascular access device Routine laboratory tests Arterial Direct puncture of artery; vascular access device Arterial blood gases Capillary Dermal puncture of fingertip or heel Infants and young children Elderly patients with fragile veins Severly burned patients Point-of-care testing

View Page
Dermal Puncture vs Venipuncture

In some situations, the phlebotomist will make the decision if a blood specimen will be obtained by dermal puncture or venipuncture. The patient's condition, the age of the patient, the amount of blood needed for testing, and the risks associated with the procedure will help the phlebotomist determine the best method for collection.A dermal puncture requires less precision, therefore it is less critical for the patient to be still or immobilized. However, if the puncture is not performed correctly, or an approved site is not used, the puncture may cause more discomfort, or even injury to the patient.The risk of accidental needlestick injury to the patient and phlebotomist is minimal since the puncture device is designed to retract the needle once the puncture is made. The puncture is quick and standardized for puncture depth. However, the procedure takes longer to complete. This delay in collection of the blood specimen could result in hemolysis or clotting of the blood or tissue fluid contamination of the specimen and specimen rejection by the laboratory.The dermal puncture minimizes the amount of blood taken from the patient. This will be important to consider, especially with infants in an intensive care nursery. However, some laboratory tests require larger amounts of blood for testing; in these cases, capillary collection is not an option.If a patient is dehydrated or has poor peripheral circulation, an adequate blood collection from a dermal puncture may not be possible.

View Page
Miscellaneous Equipment

In addition to the puncture device, additional equipment may be required when performing a successful dermal puncture.Plastic microcollection devices: Plastic microcollection devices are small plastic tubes designed to collect capillary blood from a dermal puncture wound. Each small collection tube is color-coded in the same manner as blood collection tubes used for venipuncture. The color of the cap of each container tube corresponds to the type of additive inside the tube, most often an anticoagulant. The additive coats the inside of the tube. Examples of microcollection devices are shown below. Heel warmer: It is best practice to warm the heel of an infant with a warming device known as a heel warmer. The heel warmer, when activated, is designed to warm its contents to a standardized temperature. This temperature will be hot enough to effectively warm the heel and facilitate blood flow to the area without causing heat injury to the patient. It is unacceptable to warm a cloth using a microwave. There may be "hot spots" on the cloth that could potentially burn the patient. Keep in mind, what may feel warm to you, the phlebotomist, may feel hot to your patient!Plastic or Mylar-wrapped capillary tube: In some facilities blood from a capillary puncture is collected directly into a capillary tube. These tubes are very delicate and must be used with great caution. As soon as the tube is two thirds to three-fourths filled, one end is sealed to prevent blood from leaking out.Glass microscope slides: In some facilities, the person collecting the capillary specimen may also be required to prepare a blood smear for laboratory examination. A drop of blood is placed directly on a glass slide and spread to create an area for cell examination. If you are required to prepare blood smears, remember that the slide is considered infectious until fixed or stained. It is also important to remember that glass is a sharps hazard. If not used correctly, the glass may cause injury to both the patient and the phlebotomist. Be as cautious with a glass slide containing blood as you are with a contaminated needle. Dispose of glass slides that will not be used for testing in approved sharps containers.Alcohol and gauze pads: Alcohol is the disinfectant of choice for dermal puncture. The alcohol must be allowed to air dry, which will prevent hemolysis of the specimen and discomfort for the patient. A piece of clean or sterile gauze is used to wipe away the first drop of blood. Gauze is also used to apply pressure to the wound after the specimen collection is complete to stop the wound from bleeding.Iodine or other approved cleaning agents may be used as an alternative to alcohol.Bandage: It may be necessary to apply a bandage to the puncture wound on a finger or heel if the site continues to bleed. However, it is NOT recommended to bandage the finger of a child who is 2-years-old or younger since the bandage may become a choking hazard if the child puts that finger in his/her mouth.Personal protective equipment (PPE): All healthcare professionals that may come in contact with blood and/or body fluids while performing a laboratory procedure are required to wear intact gloves. It is against safety guidelines to alter gloves in any way that may compromise the integrity of the gloves. Eye protection, such as safety goggles, is recommended if there is the possibility of a splash of blood while collecting a capillary blood specimen. In many facilities, special gowns are required in some patient areas such as special-care nurseries. Always follow the policies of your facility in regard to PPE.

View Page
Oh No...The Blood Has Stopped Flowing

On occasion, blood may stop flowing from the punctured site before the required amount of blood is obtained. When this happens, it is not recommended to squeeze harder. This only serves to cut off the supply of blood to the capillary bed. Additionally, squeezing with too much force, especially on the heel of an infant, may cause injury to the patient. The phlebotomist should never scrape the skin with the collection device in an attempt to scoop up the blood that is laying on the surface of the finger or heel. This could cause the blood specimen to hemolyze, making the specimen unacceptable for some laboratory tests. Always allow the drop to flow freely into the collection tube.If a clot has formed, an attempt could be made to dislodge it and re-establish blood flow by wiping the puncture site again with a new alcohol pad, massaging the finger or heel gently, and attempting to recollect the specimen once the alcohol has dried. If blood is not flowing freely from the initial puncture, it may be necessary to perform a second puncture to obtain enough blood for the testing required. If a second puncture must be performed, do not repuncture the same site.

View Page
Infants and Geriatric Patients: Monitor the Amount of Blood Obtained

The collection of a capillary blood specimen is often used on newborns and geriatric patients. These two groups are most susceptible to blood depletion. Therefore, a dermal puncture is preferred over venipuncture where too much blood may be inadvertently collected.In some facilities, the amount of blood obtained from a patient will be charted or recorded after every procedure. This may become part of the patient's medical record and is usually entered by the nursing staff. In these cases, the nurse will interact with the laboratory staff to advise them of the safe amount of blood that can be obtained.

View Page
Capillary Blood Gases

In some instances, the healthcare provider may request an analysis of the capillary blood for blood gases. This is most often requested on infants. Collection of this specimen requires a skilled phlebotomist and specialized equipment. The patient must be positively identified. All appropriate PPE must be used. The procedure for site selection, preparation and puncture is identical to other infant dermal punctures, however, capillary blood gases are always drawn first if other capillary blood specimens will be collected.Blood specimens for capillary gases are always collected in long, large-bore heparinized glass tubes. Blood should be drawn into the tube using capillary action. The phlebotomist should start filling the tube using a large well-formed drop of blood, drawing continuously as the blood flows. Each tube must be filled completely end to end as shown in the image on the right. Every effort must be made to avoid drawing air bubbles or air gaps into the tubes as these could adversely affect the results of the test. Before sealing both ends of the tube, the phlebotomist will insert a tiny metal "flea" into the blood-filled tube and slide a magnet lengthwise back and forth on the outside of the tube. The magnet will cause the flea to move back and forth inside the tube mixing the specimen with the anticoagulant coated on the inside of the tube. This technique should also prevent the blood from clotting, which could result in specimen rejection by the laboratory.The properly filled glass tubes must be delivered to the analyzing laboratory in a timely manner. Delay in specimen delivery may adversely affect the quality of the patient results.

View Page

Descriptive Statistics
Why Statistics?

Many people involved in the clinical laboratory sciences need to be familiar with basic statistics for a variety of reasons. These reasons include:Evaluating quantitative quality control results Evaluating new test methodsUnderstanding how acceptable laboratory procedures and methods are established Determining reference values for laboratory tests Understanding clinical trials and new methods presented in journals and articles Performing research projects

View Page

Detecting and Evaluating Coagulation Inhibitors and Factor Deficiencies
Preanalytical Variables That Can Cause Falsely Elevated PT or aPTT Results

Improper collection of the blood specimen that is used for testing can cause false prolongation of PT or aPTT results. The following table covers several preanalytical variables that may affect PT or aPTT test results Preanalytical Variable Cause of False Elevation of PT and or aPTT Test Result Corrective Action Blood collection tube is inadequately filled. Improper ratio of blood to anticoagulant. Excess anticoagulant causes prolonged PT or aPTT result. Recollect specimen ensuring proper fill to achieve a blood to anticoagulant ratio of 9:1. Patient has a hematocrit level above 55% Improper ratio of blood to anticoagulant. Excess anticoagulant causes prolonged PT or aPTT result. Prepare a specimen collection tube that contains less anticoagulant. Refer to your laboratory's procedure for the proper amount of anticoagulant. Specimen is clotted. Coagulation factors have been activated; insufficient levels left in the plasma. PT and aPTT results will be affected. Recollect the specimen. Specimen collected from an arm with a heparin lock or from a heparinized vascular access device (VAD). Heparin contamination will prolong the aPTT. Collect the blood from a vein rather than a VAD. If blood must be drawn from the VAD, flush it first with 5 mL of saline, and discard the first 5 mL of blood before collecting the specimen. Patient is receiving heparin therapy. Heparin will prolong the aPTT If the patient is being evaluated for possible factor deficiencies or coagulation inhibitors, use a heparin digesting enzyme as a pretreatment before testing the PT or aPTT. .

View Page
Performance of a Mixing Study

Step OneThe first step in performing a mixing study is the creation of a 1:1 mix of patient plasma and pooled normal plasma. It is important to ensure that the pooled normal plasma that the laboratory uses has normal coagulation factor levels before beginning the mixing study; often manufacturers will supply this information. The creation of the mix can be achieved by aliquoting equal parts of patient plasma to pooled normal plasma. The sample must be mixed by gentle inversion, or by using a pipette to slowly pipette the mixture up and down. This ensures proper incorporation of the factors in the sample.Click here to see an important note regarding pooled normal plasma

View Page
Performance of a Mixing Study

Step TwoThe next step is an immediate re-run of the PT and/or aPTT test with the newly created sample mixture. The results should be documented on a worksheet to compare to the original PT and/or aPTT tests.Step ThreeThe sample that has been made for the mixing study consisting of the pooled normal plasma and the patient plasma should also be incubated to rule-out any slow reacting inhibitors. To do this the "mixed" specimen is incubated at 37°C for 1 - 2 hours or as long as required by your laboratory's procedure. A set of control tubes should also be incubated at the same time as the mixed sample tube. A pure patient plasma sample and a pure pooled normal plasma sample will serve as the controls in this procedure. You may incubate all 3 tubes together in a water bath or heat block. Refer to the image to the right. The incubation of these controls will account for the heat-labile state of some coagulation factors which will be discussed again.After the incubation phase, the PT and/or aPTT tests should then be repeated once more. If any coagulation inhibitors were present in the patient sample, the incubation phase would have given the ideal temperature and time for the antibody-coagulation factor reaction to take place. This is especially helpful in the case of anti-factor VIII inhibitors since they are often slow acting or weak inhibitors.

View Page
Analyzing the Mixing Study Results (cont.)

Various tools have been developed that identify whether a sample is "corrected" or "not corrected" by the addition of pooled normal plasma. One tool is the Rosner Index.The Rosner Index subtracts the clotting time of the pooled normal plasma (PNP) from the clotting time of the 1:1 mix. This result is then divided by the clotting time of the patient sample. The equation is as follows:Rosner Index = (1:1 mix clotting time result - PNP clotting time result) / initial prolonged clotting time of patient sampleWith this method, a high index value represents the possibility of an inhibitor. A low index value would represent a possible factor deficiency. For example, an index of 10 or lower indicates correction, 15 and above indicates no correction. If after the calculation is performed and a value of 10-15 is obtained, it is recommended that your test be repeated.Each laboratory must determine its own reference interval for the Rosner Index.

View Page
Mixing Study Methodology Differences

Most clinical laboratories will use a 1:1 mix when performing mixing studies; however, some will use various dilutions of patient plasma and pooled normal plasma for their protocols.In addition, the analysis of the mixing study involves interpreting the pre- and post-mix results. This can be performed using various methods including: the Rosner Index, the <70% correction formula, or a laboratories own calculation and cut-off value. Finally, it is suggested that each laboratory test the sensitivity of their PT and aPTT reagents before running mixing studies. The sensitivity of the reagent system can be tested by running dilutions of the pooled normal plasma controls with specific factor deficient plasma. This ensures that the system will detect a normal result, even if the factor level is as low as 40%.

View Page
References

1. Aniara Learning Center. Coagulation Corner. Mixing Studies: To correct or not correct-that is the question. June 2009. http://www.aniara.com/learning-center/Coagulation-Corner/articles/2009/01/mixing-studiesto-correct-or-not-correct.aspx.2. Bethel, M and Adcock, D: Laboratory evaluation of a prolonged APTT and PT. Lab Med, 285, May 2004.3. Devreese KM. Interpretation of normal plasma mixing studies in the laboratory diagnosis of lupus anticoagulants. Thromb Res 2007;119:369-76.4. Harmening, D. Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis. 5th edition. F.A. Davis, 2009.5. Katrien M.J. Devreese, Interpretation of normal plasma mixing studiesin the laboratory diagnosis of lupus anticoagulants, ThrombosisResearch, Volume 119, Issue 3, 2007, Pages 369-376, ISSN 0049-3848,DOI: 10.1016/j.thromres.2006.03.012.(http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/B6T1C-4JYKP68-1/2/12550b597f6b88b11e09b26e74963d4f)Keywords: Lupus anticoagulants; Mixing tests; Percent correction formula; Rosner index6. McKenzie, S. Clinical Laboratory Hematology. 2nd edition. Pearson, 2010.7. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Determination of Factor Coagulant Activities, H48A. NCCLS, 1997.8. Santora SA, Eby CS, Chapter 106: Laboratory evaluation of hemostatic disorders. Pages 1841-1844. In: Hoffman R, Benz, EJ, Jr et. al Hematology. Basic Prinicples and Practice. 3rd edition. Churchill Livingstone. 2000.9. Vancott, E and Laposata, M: Coagulation, Fibrinolysis and Hypercoagulation. 2001.

View Page
Interpreting the Mixing Study Results: A Case Study

Case StudyA young patient is admitted from the emergency room with petechial bruising. The attending physician orders a battery of tests including a PT and aPTT. The laboratory performs the requested testing and the result of the aPTT is normal; however the PT is prolonged:PT: 38 seconds (normal range 11-13 seconds)aPTT: 32 seconds (normal range 21-34 seconds)The physician then decides to order a mixing study for further analysis since the patient is not taking any oral anticoagulants, nor does she meet the known patient histories associated with prolonged PT results.

View Page
Interpreting the Mixing Study Results: Case Study 2

Case Study 2The laboratory receives an order for a mixing study after a patient who has experienced a fetal loss has an abnormally prolonged aPTT test. The results are as follows: Initial aPTT Immed. aPTT mixing study Incubated aPTT mixing study 86 sec. (normal range 21-34 seconds) 87 sec. 88 sec.

View Page

Diabetes and the Current American Diabetes Association Guidelines
Case A

A 50-year-old male with a family history of diabetes visits his physician for routine physical. He reports that he feels his health is excellent. He exercises regularly, but often his diet is high in calories and fat.Physical Examination: Slightly overweight; blood pressure and pulse normal.A basic metabolic panel and PSA are ordered. All results are within reference range except the plasma glucose. The patient's physician orders a hemoglobin A1C (HbA1C) the following week.Laboratory results:Fasting plasma glucose (FPG)= 110 mg/dL (Reference interval 75 - 100 mg/dL)One Week Later:Hb A1C= 6.0% (Reference interval 4 - 6%)

View Page
Case B

A 14-year-old male sees his pediatrician because of fatigue, weight loss, increased appetite, thirst, and frequent urination. There is a family history of diabetes. The physican orders the following laboratory assays:Laboratory Results:Fasting plasma glucose (FPG)= 250 mg/dL (Reference interval 75 - 100 mg/dL)Serum Ketones= Positive, 1+ (Reference Negative)FPG repeated one week later= 170 mg/dL (Reference interval 75 - 100 mg/dL)

View Page
Case Studies

The following describes three patients with a history relating to diabetes and pertinent laboratory results. As this study proceeds, you will be asked if they meet the criteria for diagnosis of diabetes, are at risk for diagnosis of diabetes, and/or whether they are a type 1 or type 2 diabetic.

View Page
ADA Recommended Criteria for Diagnosis of Diabetes

Assay Description Criteria for Diabetes HbA1C Performed in laboratory by method NGSP certified and standardized to DCCT assay > 6.5 % Fasting plasma glucose At least 8 hour fast > 126 mg/dL Casual plasma glucose Symptoms of diabetes; Blood glucose measured at any time of day > 200 mg/dL Two-hour plasma glucose Following a glucose load of 75g anhydrous glucose dissolved in water > 200 mg/dL

View Page
Case A (continued)A 50-year-old male with a family history of diabetes visits his physician for routine physical. He reports that he feels his health is excellent. He exercises regularly, but often his diet is high in calories and fat.Physical Examination: Slightly overweight; blood pressure and pulse normal.A basic metabolic panel and PSA are ordered. All results are within reference range except the plasma glucose. The patient's physician orders a HbA1C the following week.Laboratory results:Fasting plasma glucose (FPG)= 110 mg/dL (Reference interval 75 - 100 mg/dL)One Week Later:HbA1C= 6.0% (Reference interval 4 - 6%)Which of the following statements is most accurate regarding the patient in Case A?View Page
Blood Glucose

Serum, plasma, and whole blood glucose levels are among the most common laboratory assays. Due to self-monitoring of blood glucose (SMBG), blood glucose is also the most common assay performed by patients themselves or their caretakers. Fasting, timed, and casual serum or plasma specimens are run in hospital laboratories for screening, diagnosis, and monitoring of patients.

View Page
Whole Blood Glucose Testing

In the past twenty years there have been significant improvements in the accuracy of handheld glucose meters. Patient use has resulted in substantial improvements in diabetic control and insulin therapy. Capillary whole blood is easily obtained and glucose concentration is derived on simple to use, portable meters. Since whole blood glucose is lower than plasma glucose, the meters are programmed to correct the value before presenting the result; therefore, the whole blood glucose meter result correlates to serum or plasma results.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) has set standards for correlation between glucose meter and laboratory measured glucose levels. If the laboratory measured glucose is > 75 mg/dL, the glucose meter result should be within 20%. For laboratory measured values < 75 mg/dL, the glucose meter result should be within 15 mg/dL.

View Page
A clinical laboratory scientist is reviewing the results of comparison studies between laboratory plasma glucose results and patients' self-monitoring (whole-blood) blood glucose (SMBG) results. Which SMBG results are acceptable?View Page
The Laboratory's Role in Diagnosis and Monitoring of Diabetes

Even though most diabetics, physician offices, clinics, nursing homes, and nursing units use glucose meters for monitoring glucose levels, the laboratory's role in diagnosis is vital. The function of the laboratory is crucial in diagnosis, monitoring, and management of diabetes. Diabetic patients can go into severe metabolic imbalances that are life threatening. These metabolic conditions include: diabetic ketoacidosis, hyperosmolar nonketotic coma, and hypoglycemia. Laboratory testing is essential in diagnosing and monitoring these conditions.Laboratory blood glucose and HbA1C levels are used to demonstrate the level of hyperglycemia required for diagnosis. If an OGTT is needed for classification or characterization of hyperglycemia, a patient is sent to a hospital or clinical laboratory for the test. Detection of elevated microalbumin levels that can signal early stages of renal impairment is accomplished through laboratory testing. There are many other disease states and complications associated with diabetes. Clinical laboratories detect these diseases and monitor the complications that result. Important among these assays are urea, creatinine, and serum lipids. If a diabetic does have a pancreatic transplant, serum C-peptide and insulins levels monitor transplant success and viability of transplanted organ.

View Page

Electrophoresis
Introduction

Electrophoresis is the migration or separation of charged particles or solutes of a liquid solution in an electrical field. Conventional electrophoresis is tedious and time consuming. Electrophoresis automation and newer electrophoresis techniques have revitalized the utilization of electrophoresis in today's clinical laboratories. Molecular diagnostic analysis using electrophoresis and research in proteomics have also contributed to this revitalization.

View Page
Types of Electrophoresis

There are numerous applications of electrophoresis. Routine protein electrophoresis performed in clinical laboratories is the oldest method and therefore the most frequently used method. With the advent of molecular diagnostics, several other electrophoresis methods have become very important, highly automated, and have several important applications.Types of electrophoresis that will be discussed are:Routine electrophoresisHigh resolution electrophoresisPolyacrylamide gel electrophoresisCapillary electrophoresisIsoelectric focusingImmunochemical electrophoresisTwo-dimensional electrophoresisPulsed field electrophoresis

View Page
References

Clinical Chemistry Concepts and Applications. Shauna C. Anderson and Susan Cockayne. Long Grove, Illinois: Waveland Press, Inc, 2003.Clinical Laboratory Instrumentation and Automation Principles, Applications, and Selection. Kory M. Ward, Craig A. Lehmann, Alan M. Leiken. Philadelphia: WB Saunders Company, 1994.Laboratory Instrumentation, 4th Edition. Mary C. Haven, Gregory A. Tetrault, Jerald R. Schenken, eds. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1995.Molecular Diagnostics Fundamentals, Methods, and Clinical Applications. Lela Buckingham and Maribeth L. Flaws. Philadelphia: FA Davis Company, 2007.Principles of Gel Electrophoresis. Available at http://www.vivo.colostate.edu/hbooks/genetics/biotech/gels/principles.html accessed 9/29/08.Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry and Molecular Diagnostics, 4th Edition. Carl A. Burtis, Edward R. Ashwood, David E. Burns, eds. Philadelphia: Elsevier Saunders, 2005.

View Page
Automation

Automated systems for protein electrophoresis are available for large volumes of samples for electrophoresis. An automated system is capable of separating 10-100 samples simultaneously. There are several different automated systems and the number of process steps that are automated varies. Automated steps may include reagent addition, sample application, electrophoresis separation, staining, and detection.

View Page
Immunofixation Electrophoresis

An agarose gel electrophoresis first separates the proteins in a serum sample. Antiserum against the protein of interest is spread directly on the gel. The protein of interest precipitates in the gel matrix. After a wash step to remove other proteins, the precipitated protein is stained. This method is qualitative and is used to identify proteins found in multiple myeloma.Below is the immunofixation electrophoresis gel from a serum sample analyzed on SPIFE 3000, Helena Laboratories. After electrophoresis, the precipitated proteins are stained with Acid Violet, a stain developed and used by Helena Laboratories. The SP lane represents a routine serum protein electrophoresis of this specimen. On the next three protein separations, antiserum against IgG, IgA, and IgM were applied to the G, A, M lanes respectively. Antiserum to kappa light chain was added to the next protein separation and antiserum to lambda light chain to the last protein separation.

View Page
Densitometry

After electrophoresis, a stained gel is passed through the optical system of a densitometer to create an electrophoregram, a visual diagram or graph of the separated bands. A densitometer is a special spectrophotometer that measures light transmitted through a solid sample such as a cleared or transparent but stained gel. Using the optical density measurements, the densitometer represents the bands as peaks. These peaks compose the graph or electrophoregram and are printed on a recorder chart or computer display. Absorbance and/or fluorescence can be measured with densitometry.An integrator or microprocessor evaluates the area under each peak and reports each as a percent of the total sample. If the electrophoresis is for separation of serum proteins, the concentration of each band is derived from this percent and the total protein concentration. If the electrophoresis is for separation of enzymes, the enzyme activity of each band is derived from this percent and the total enzyme activity. The densitometer scan below depicts the separated bands from a serum sample electrophoresis. The SPIFE 3000, Helena Laboratories, electrophoresis splits the beta zone into two fractions for easier detection of small beta-migrating monoclonal gammopathies. The densitometer scan from this electrophoresis shows five bands with two peaks in the beta band. Recall the order of protein fractions from left to right is: Albumin, alpha 1, alpha 2, beta, and gamma.

View Page

Emerging Cardiovascular Risk Markers
Risk Markers

We have listed the 'classic' cardiovascular risk markers as LDL-C, HDL-C and triglycerides. But there are many more cardiovascular risk markers as well as cardiovascular risk factors. A cardiovascular risk factor is a condition (not a laboratory analyte) that is associated with an increased risk of developing cardiovascular disease. Examples include: Age Gender (males are at increased risk) Heredity Hypertension Cigarette Smoking Obesity Diabetes StressThere are also negative risk factors, factors which decrease a person's risk of cardiovascular disease. Examples include: Optimal HDL-C concentration Exercise Estrogen Moderate alcohol intakeThis course will not focus on cardiovascular risk factors. Instead we will focus on newer, emerging cardiovascular risk markers. There are well over twenty well-studied cardiovascular risk markers; in this course we will focus on some of the more established markers and the ones which are becoming more commonly measured in the clinical laboratory. These include apolipoprotein A1/apolipoprotein B100, Lp(a), oxidized LDL, LpPLA2, hsCRP and lipoprotein particle size and concentration.It is important to remember that the association between a cardiovascular risk marker and actually having or developing cardiovascular disease is a statistical one. The fact that a patient has a particular risk marker which is abnormal simply increases the probability of developing cardiovascular disease, it does not mean that he or she is certain to develop cardiovascular disease. Conversely, if an individual does not have a particular cardiovascular risk marker present it does not guarantee protection against cardiovascular disease. We must always remember that some percentage of individuals who have heart attacks or strokes will not have abnormal risk markers present.

View Page
Lp(a) Testing

One of the problems with Lp(a) measurement is that the Apo(a) protein has a variable mass. It can have a molecular weight ranging from 275,000 to 800,000 daltons. This is due to variable amounts of repeating regions of the protein. Immunoassay antibodies which recognize these regions will thus give more signal for larger Apo(a) molecules compared to smaller Apo(a) molecules. This is not ideal since again, we would prefer to quantify the number of particles and Lp(a) containing large Apo(a) molecules will produce more signal, skewing the count. One assay system that tries to correct for this is the Lp(a) Cholesterol Electrophoresis Assay sold by Helena Laboratories. This assay uses electrophoresis followed by cholesterol staining and densitometry to calculate the concentration of cholesterol in Lp(a). Although this method still does not enumerate particles, it does appear to have less heterogeneity.Lp(a) is an acute phase reactant. This means that Lp(a) levels will rise in the context of general inflammation. Thus, Lp(a) should not be measured when there is extensive inflammation, such as immediately following a cardiovascular event. Concentrations of Lp(a) above 30 mg/dL are associated with increased cardiovascular risk. The risk of having a cardiovascular event increases 2 to 3 fold if Lp(a) cholesterol is > 30 mg/dL. Fifteen to 20% of the Caucasian population have Lp(a) levels >30 mg/dL. Africans, or people of Aftican descent, generally have levels higher than Caucasians and Asians, however, results must be evaluated in conjunction with clinical history.

View Page
Summary

In this course we have described some emerging cardiovascular risk markers. It is important to note that there are many more markers, some of which appear robust and which may have clinical value. Examples of other risk markers that are emerging but were not discussed are listed in the table to the right.An important question that should always be asked is "how many risk markers do we need?" With so many risk markers available, the laboratory needs to research which markers are truly the strongest and most valuable for the patient demographic the facility deals with most and which markers physicians will order and utilize.

View Page
Adult Treatment Panel

How do physicians interpret risk marker results? Assuming the laboratory offers, and physicians order, cardiovascular risk marker tests, how are these results used? The National Cholesterol Education Program periodically assembles scientists and physicians to create lipid treatment guidelines for patients. These panels are referred to as the Adult Treatment Panel (ATP). The third assembly of the ATP did not give specific guidelines regarding risk marker use in patients but they did acknowledge their potential utility. The general consensus is that novel cardiovascular risk markers should be used in selected patients, such as those who already have significant risk factors (hypertension, smoking, obesity, etc.) or in patients who have family histories of cardiovascular disease. The value in using risk markers is that they will not only uncover cardiovascular risk but they can also be used to motivate patients to alter lifestyle and diet. It is expected that as these emerging cardiovascular risk markers continue to be validated in clinical studies, they will become very useful and perhaps even be part of a new standard of care for patients.If risk marker levels can be correlated to treatment strategies, physicians will find them especially useful in tracking patient success.

View Page
References

Atherosclerosis. U.S. Department of Health & Human Services National Institutes of Health. Available at http://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/health/dci/Diseases/Atherosclerosis/Atherosclerosis_WhatIs.html Accessed March 25, 2013.Daniels LB, Barrett-Connor E, Sarno M, Laughlin GA,Bettencourt R, Wolfert RL. Lipoprotein-associated phospholipase A2 (Lp-PLA2) independently predicts incident coronary heart disease (CHD) in an apparently healthy older population: The Rancho Bernardo study. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2008;51:913-919.Executive Summary of the third report of the National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) Expert Panel on Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Cholesterol in Adults (Adult Treatment Panel III). JAMA. 2001; 285:2486-2497. Frostegard, J, Wu R, Lemne C, Thulin T, Witztum JL and de Faire U. Circulating oxidized low-density lipoprotein is increased in hypertension, Clin Sci 2003; 105, 615.Garza CA, Montoir VM, McConnell JP, et al. Association between lipoprotein-associated phospholipase A2 and cardiovascular disease: a systematic review. Mayo Clin Proc. 2007;82(2):159-165.Interpretive Handbook, (MC0440rev0407) Mayo Clinic, RochesterMN;2007. Maksimowicz-McKinnon K, Bhatt DL, Calabrese LH: Recent advances in vascular inflammation: C-reactive protein and other inflammatory biomarkers. Curr Opin Rheumatol. 2004;16:18-24.Mora S, Szklo M, Otvos JD, et al. LDL particle subclasses, LDL particle size, and carotid atherosclerosis in the multi-ethnic study of atherosclerosis. Atherosclerosis. 2007;192:211-217.NACB Laboratory Medicine Practice Guidelines. Emerging biomarkers of cardiovascular disease and stroke. NationalAcademy of Clinical Biochemistry Laboratory Medicine Practice Guidelines. 2006.PLACtest animation, diaDexus. http://www.plactest.com/laboratorians/action.php Accessed March 25, 2013.Rifai N, Warnick GR. Lipids, lipoproteins, apolipoproteins, and other cardiovascular risk factors. In: BurtisCA, Ashwood ER. BrunsDE. Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry and Molecular Diagnostics. 4th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier Saunders: 2006; chap. 26.Ridker PM, Rifai N, Rose L, et al. Comparison of C-reactive protein and low-density lipoprotein cholesterol levels in the prediction of first cardiovascular events. N Engl J Med. 2002;347:1557-1565.Sniderman AD. Differential response of cholesterol and particle measures of atherogenic lipoproteins to LDL-lowering therapy: Implications for clinical practice. J Clin Lipidol 2008;2:36-42.Tsimikas, S, Brilakis ES, Miller ER, et al. Oxidized phospholipids, Lp(a) lipoprotein, and coronary artery disease, N Engl J Med: 2005;353:46.Tsimikas S, Bergmark C, Beyer RW, et al. Temporal increases in plasma markers of oxidized low-density lipoprotein strongly reflect the presence of acute coronary syndromes. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2003; 41: 360.Tsimikas, S, Lau HK, Han KR, et al. Percutaneous coronary intervention results in acute increases in oxidized phospholipids and lipoprotein(a): Short-term and long-term immunologic responses to oxidized low-density lipoprotein. Circulation. 2004;109, 3164.Tsimikas S, Witztum JL, Miller ER, Sasiela WJ, et al. High-dose atorvastatin reduces total plasma levels of oxidized phospholipids and immune complexes present on apolipoprotein B-100 in patients with acute coronary syndromes in the MIRACL trial, Circulation: 2004;110, 1406. Walldius G, Jungner I, Holme I, et al. High apolipoprotein B, low apolipoprotein A-I, and improvement in the prediction of fatal myocardial infarction (AMORIS study): a prospective study. Lancet. 2001;358:2026-2033.Yusuf S, Hawken S, Ounpuu S, et al. Effect of potentially modifiable risk factors associated with myocardial infarction in 52 countries (the INTERHEART study): case-control study. Lancet. 2004;364:937-952.

View Page
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance

The nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy technique that was developed by LipoScience (LipoScience, Inc., Raleigh, NC), exploits specific magnetic properties of lipoproteins. This technology does not require separation of lipoproteins; serum or plasma can be run through the NMR sensor probe and all lipoproteins can be measured directly and homogeneously. The NMR platform works by subjecting the patient sample to a pulse of radio energy within a strong magnetic field. The energy that is given off by the lipids in the sample results is a signal that can be analyzed by the instrument to determine the number and size of lipoproteins present. Lipids associated with larger lipoproteins produce a signal that is distinct from those of smaller lipoproteins. A computer algorithm developed by LipoScience deconvolutes the signals into lipoprotein subclasses and then quantifies the number of particles in each class.NMR provides a useful and novel way to quantitate lipoprotein particles. However it is currently a proprietary technology and NMR analyzers are not yet readily-available for purchase and use in smaller clinical laboratories.

View Page
Measuring particle number instead of cholesterol content has which of the following features or limitations?View Page

First Aid
Purpose of this Course

This program has provided some basic information about emergency situations that can occur in a laboratory.However, it is not a substitute for a hands-on first aid course, such as those that may be given at a local community center.The more you know about first aid, the more prepared you will be to act calmly and effectively in emergency situations, possibly saving lives.

View Page

Fundamentals of Hemostasis
Which of the following laboratory tests of hemostatic function is a screening test used to assess the functionality of both the intrinsic and common pathways?View Page
What laboratory test result is commonly used to monitor oral anticoagulant therapy?View Page
Laboratory Testing of Hemostatic Function

Coagulation tests provide critical information that is used in diagnosing coagulation disorders, evaluating hemostatic function prior to surgery, and monitoring the effectiveness of anticoagulant therapy.

View Page
Specimen Rejection Criteria

Specimen rejection criteria established by your laboratory should be followed at all times, as improperly collected or processed coagulation specimens could adversely affect patient results. Blue-top tubes that are not filled adequately must not be used for coagulation testing as test results may be inaccurate.Hemolyzed specimens should not be used in coagulation testing because of possible clotting factor activation, which may also produce inaccurate results.Grossly lipemic specimens may cause erroneous results or a clot may not be detected if a photo-optical coagulation system is used. An alternative method that is not affected by lipemia, such as an electromechanical method, may be required One way to avoid a grossly lipemic specimen is to ask the patient to fast prior to specimen collection.

View Page
Prothrombin Time (PT)/INR

PT is a screening test that helps to assess the functionality of both the extrinsic and common pathways. The effectiveness and presence of factors I, II, V, VII, and X are assayed in this diagnostic test, as they are all found in the aforementioned pathways. The results of the PT test are used in conjunction with other diagnostic tests, as well as the clinical picture of the patient, to determine any hemostatic abnormalities that may be present.In addition to being an integral part of the coagulation disorder assessment process, the PT is also used to determine therapeutic effectiveness of the oral anticoagulant, warfarin. PT test results are reported as the number of seconds needed for a clot to form in the patient specimen using the laboratory's instrument/reagent system, and as the International Normalized Ratio (INR).

View Page
PT/INR, continued

The INR component of the laboratory PT/INR result is a calculated value that is used by the clinician to monitor warfarin therapy and adjust dosage as dictated by clinical status. An INR of 2.0 - 3.0 is often desired as the therapeutic range. The following formula is used by the clinical laboratory to derive an INR value. The INR must be adjusted for every new lot of PT reagent (thromboplastin).INR= (PT of patient/PT of geometric mean of the normal population)ISIThe International Sensitivity Index (ISI) value, is provided by the reagent manufacturer as the relative sensitivity of the reagent itself. When opening a new lot of PT reagent (thromboplastin), it is essential to verify that the ISI value provided by the reagent manufacturer is being used with that reagent lot to prevent the reporting of erroneous INR results, which may have serious consequences for the patient.The INR is used to standardize PT results, and in turn, anticoagulant therapy, across laboratory instrumentation, methodologies, and locale.

View Page
Activated Partial Thromboplastin Time (aPTT)

APTT is a screening test that helps to assess the functionality of both the intrinsic and common pathways. The presence and effectiveness of all the coagulation factors are assayed by this diagnostic test, with the exception of factors VII and XIII. In other words, factors XII, XI, X, IX, VIII, V, II, and I are all involved in this assay.The results of the aPTT are used in conjunction with other diagnostic tests, as well as the clinical picture of the patient, to determine hemostatic abnormalities that may be present. In addition to being an integral part of the coagulation disorder assessment process, the aPTT is used to determine therapeutic effectiveness of heparin administration. APTT results are reported in seconds, which represent the actual time elapsed until a clot was detected using the laboratory's instrument/reagent system.

View Page

Fundamentals of Molecular Diagnostics (retired 2/12/2013)
Overview

Molecular diagnostics have begun to play an integral part in clinical laboratory diagnostic testing. Traditionally, molecular diagnostics have been utilized in three major clinical areas: Infectious diseases Genetics Tumor markers These molecular based diagnostic tests, while historically reserved for specialty/reference labs, have recently seen expansion of their utility within the scope of routine clinical laboratories. Molecular based diagnostics can be utilized by small labs as well as large ones, and can be found in virtually every department of the clinical laboratory.

View Page
Resources

It is imperative to follow the individual package insert procedures when collecting and handling specimens. Reference laboratories provide specimen requirements as well as collection, handling, and transport guidelines.The Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) has published procedures for collection, including those specific to molecular diagnostics.

View Page
Transport

Many clinical laboratories utilize reference laboratories for molecular methodology testing. Transport and shipping of biological specimens must follow laws and regulations governing these types of specimens. Consult your laboratory's accrediting agency and reference laboratory for specific polices and procedures.

View Page
Selection

Selection of the specific methodology will be dependent on each individual laboratory's needs assessment of various factors including:Turn around timeCostPatient populationPersonnel competencyLaboratory equipment requirementsLaboratory space requirementsTest complexityResult reporting

View Page
Infectious Diseases

Molecular methodologies can be useful in the detection of a variety of diseases that are important public health issues such as:Chlamydia trachomatis (CT) Neisseria gonorrhoeae (GC)Human papillomavirus (HPV)Human immunodeficiency virus(HIV)Herpes simplex virus(HSV)Cytomegalovirus(CMV)In many clinical laboratories, traditional methods have been replaced by molecular methodologies because testing can occur for several pathogens in a single specimen. This is termed multiplex testing.

View Page
Disadvantages of Molecular Testing

Molecular methodologies, while highly advantageous, do contain limitations and certain disadvantages. These can include:Cost: Molecular methodologies are usually more expensive than standard traditional methodologies. Equipment and reagent costs could be prohibitive to some laboratories. As molecular methods become more standard, the costs could potentially decrease. Currently, laboratories that consider the cost prohibitive prefer to transport molecular specimens to a reference laboratory.Personnel requirements: Depending on laboratory accreditation requirements and testing methodologies some personnel may not be qualified to competently perform molecular testing. Laboratory space requirements: Molecular amplification methods require dedicated space that may not be available in some clinical laboratories.

View Page
Which of the following are considered advantages of molecular testing? (Choose all that apply.)View Page
References

Burtis CA, Ashwood ER, Bruns DE, eds. Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry and Molecular Diagnostics. 4th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier Inc; 2006.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Collection, Transport, Preparation, and Storage of Specimens for Molecular Methods; Approved Guideline.CLSI document MM13-A. NCCLS.Wayne, PA: 2006.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Molecular Diagnostic Methods for Infectious Diseases; Approved Guideline. Second ed. CLSI document MM3-A2. NCCLS. Wayne, PA: 2006.

View Page

General Laboratory Question Bank - Review Mode (no CE)
Which one of the following does not directly regulate clinical laboratories:View Page
Which of the following infectious agents represent the greatest risk to the laboratory worker:View Page
A laboratory fire that is the direct result of the electrical malfunction of a laboratory instrument or piece of equipment would be classified as:View Page
If a laboratory 's control range (using a 99.7 confidence interval) for a given assay is 20.0 to 50.0, what would its means and one standard deviation be:View Page
Many laboratory procedures are conducted at 37o C. This corresponds to what temperature on the Fahrenheit scale:View Page
What minimum level of specific resistance (megohms@25o C) is required for a Type I water system:View Page
What percentage solution of sodium hypochlorite (bleach) is recommended as a routine laboratory disinfectant:View Page
Which of the following microscopic techniques is capable of producing a 3-dimensional image :View Page
CPT 4 codes:View Page
Which of the following is not directly responsible for setting and monitoring competency requirements for laboratory personnel?View Page
Which of the following is the main function of the ASCP Board of Registry:View Page

Hematology / Hemostasis Question Bank - Review Mode (no CE)
When three tubes of cerebrospinal fluid are received in the laboratory they should be distributed to the various laboratory sections as follows:View Page

Hemoglobinopathies: Hemoglobin S Disorders
Comparison of Laboratory Results Among Hemoglobin S Disorders

View Page
Laboratory Diagnosis

When hemoglobin S (HbS) has been detected using a primary screening method, it is then crucial to determine if the HbS is homozygous, heterozygous, or is another variant. Additional procedures that may be needed include isoelectric focusing (IEF) or high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC).Observation of RBC morphology and use of sickle cell screening may provide initial information for this diagnosis, but may be negative in some sickle cell disorders.Polymerized chain reaction (PCR) methods are being used in prenatal diagnosis of sickle cell disorders.

View Page
References

Afenyi-Annan, A., Kail, M., Combs, M.R., Orringer, E.P., Ashley-Kock, A., & Telen, M.J. Lack of Duffy antigen expression is associated with organ damage in patients with sickle cell disease. Transfusion. 2008;48:917-924. Ataka, K. I. et. al.Efficacy and safety of the Gardos channel blocker, senicapoc (ICA-17043), in patients with sickle cell anemia. Blood: 2008; 11(8) 3991-3997.Ballas, S.K., Sickle Cell Anaemia: Progress in Pathogenesis and Treatment. Drugs 2002: 62(8); 1143-1172.Bianchi, N., Zuccato, C., Lampronti, I., Borgatti, N., and Gambari, R. Fetal Hemoglobin Inducers from the Natural World: a novel approach for the identification of drugs for the treatment of B-thalassemia and Sickle-cell anemia. eCAM: 2009; 6(2)141-151.Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Sickle cell disease: Symptoms and treatments. Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/ncbddd/sicklecell/symptoms.html. Accessed January 21, 2010.Harmening, Denise M., Clinical Hematology and Fundementals of Hemostatis 4th., F.A. Davis, 2001.Inati, A., Koussa, S. Taher, A., & Perrine, S. Sickle cell disease: New insights into pathophysiology and treatment. Pediatr Ann. May 2008.Kaushansky, K., Lichtman, M.A., Beulter, E., Kipps, T.J., and Prchal, J.T. Williams Hematology 8th Ed. McGraw Hill 2010.Lotspeich-Steininger, Stiene-Martin and Koepke, Clinical Hematology Principles, Procedures, Correlations, Lippincott 1992. McKenzie, Shirlyn B., Textbook of Hematology 2nd ed., Williams and Wilkins 1996. Miale, John B, Laboratory Medicine Hematology 6th ed., Mosby 1982. Niscola, P., Sorrentino, F., Scaramucci, L., de Faritiis, P., & Cianciulli, P. Pain syndromes in Sickle Cell Disease: An update. American Academy of Pain Medicine. 2009:470-480.Rodak, Bernadette, Diagnostic Hematology, W.B.Saunders Co., 1995.Yoon, S.L. & black, S. Comprehensive, integrative management of pain for patients with Sickle-Cell Disease. Journal of Alternative and Complementary Medicine. 2006: 12; 995-1001.

View Page

Hemolytic Disease of the Fetus and Newborn
Advance Organizer

Before beginning the course take some time to review and think about what you already know about HDFN. For example, jot down brief notes to answer the following questions: Which antibody causes the most severe HDFN? Antibodies in which blood group system are the most common cause of positive direct antiglobulin tests (DATs) in newborns but rarely cause clinically significant hemolysis? Should DATs be performed on all newborns regardless of maternal ABO and Rh blood groups? What is Rh immune globulin (RhIg), its source, constituents, purpose, and mechanism of action? Which tests are used to determine postnatal RhIg dosage? Which type of D variant can produce anti-D? What follow-up tests are typically indicated if a pregnant female has a positive antibody screen when initially tested? Which laboratory findings would suggest that an infant may have ABO HDFN? How can the clinical status of fetuses at risk for HDFN be monitored? What are the characteristics of red cells suitable for intravenous transfusion to fetuses suffering from severe HDFN due to anti-D?

View Page
Foreword

This course is a refresher on current concepts and practices in hemolytic disease of the fetus and newborn (HDFN). As such it is a survey course that provides a broad overview of the field and presents an opportunity to review significant aspects of HDFN and its laboratory investigation and prevention. Because it is a survey course with many topics, not all will be covered in depth. However, Rh immune globulin (RhIg) will be reviewed extensively since it prevents the most severe form of HDFN and is one of the biggest success stories of modern medicine. The course assumes that participants have a basic background knowledge of immunohematology theory and practice. Reading the resources in Further Reading for more information on any topic is encouraged. In brief, the course will: Recap relevant background information on HDFN and its treatment Review the characteristics and uses of Rh immune globulin (RhIg) Discuss typical laboratory findings and their interpretations Examine current best practices in perinatal testing programsThe course is a companion to "Rh negative female with anti-D at delivery: A case study on dealing with the issues" and complements its content.

View Page
Introduction

Although HDFN can be life threatening, in the case of anti-D it is a disease that can be prevented. Regardless of causative antibody, HDFN's serious consequences can be lessened by early laboratory diagnosis and treatment. This course begins with an in-depth review of HDFN and later discusses its prevention in detail. In reviewing HDFN, key questions to be answered include: What are the typical signs and symptoms of severe HDFN? Which serologic tests does the transfusion service laboratory use to diagnose HDFN? How is severe HDFN treated? Which development dramatically changed the incidence of HDFN due to anti-D? Other than the causative antibodies, what are some of the main differences between ABO HDFN and HDFN due to anti-D and other antibodies?

View Page
Symptoms and Laboratory Findings in Severe HDFN Due to Anti-D

Anti-D causes the most severe HDFN. Symptoms and laboratory findings in HDFN due to anti-D typically include:1. Anemia: Cord Hb can be less than 10 g/dL (100 g/L) and as low as 3–5 g/dL (30–50 g/L).2. Jaundice (icterus gravis): Jaundice occurs after delivery, as fetal bilirubin is cleared by the mother during pregnancy. Extravascular fetal red cell destruction by maternal antibody produces high bilirubin levels. The newborn, who is unable to produce adequate amounts of the liver enzyme glucuronyl transferase, is unable to conjugate the bilirubin into its water-soluble, excretable form.3. Kernicterus: If indirect bilirubin levels reach approximately 20 mg/dL (340 mmol/L) the fat soluble unconjugated bilirubin deposits in the fat-rich brain cells causing brain cell damage. Cerebral palsy, deafness, mental retardation, and other serious disorders can result.4. Hydrops fetalis: Gross edema occurs in severely affected infants, and often results in stillbirth or death soon after birth. Liver failure and hypoproteinemia also play a role in this syndrome.5. Enlarged organs, e.g., liver, spleen and heart6. Laboratory findings include a positive direct antiglobulin test (DAT), low hemoglobin (as above), increased reticulocyte count, and increased nucleated red cells.

View Page
ABO HDFN - Diagnostic Tests

Before ABO HDFN is considered as a possible cause of jaundice and anemia in the newborn, other causes should be considered, for example, erythrocyte membrane defects or red cell enzyme deficiencies. The diagnosis of ABO HDFN in the laboratory differs from diagnosing Rh and other types of HDFN in which clinically significant antibodies must be identified. Diagnosis may be difficult, because the DAT on the newborn's red cells is unreliable. Indeed, many labs do not routinely do a DAT on infants born to Rh positive females, since many will be positive in the absence of clinically significant hemolysis. Cord blood is often retained (e.g., for 7 days) should the infant develop signs of HDFN and required testing.If ABO HDFN is possible, based on incompatible ABO blood groups and a positive DAT, and the mother's antibody screen is negative, many laboratories do not investigate the positive DAT as would be done for unexpected antibodies like anti-D or anti-K (the laboratory does not perform an elution on the newborn's red cells). Instead, the infant's plasma is tested against group A1 (or B cells) and group O screen cells using the indirect antiglobulin test (IAT). A positive reaction with A1 or B cells, but not group O cells, would suffice to report a case of possible ABO HDFN.

View Page
Use in Pregnancy

As applied to pregnancy, RhIg's purpose is to prevent immunization to the D antigen in the perinatal period and thus prevent HDFN due to anti-D. If the mother has already produced anti-D, RhIg is of no use in moderating the immune response.Accordingly, RhIg is routinely administered to Rh negative women not previously sensitized to the D antigen under the following circumstances:1, Antenatal. Antepartum prophylaxis of 300 µg (1500 IU) at about 28 weeks gestation in the USA and Canada, which could be weeks later, depending on how appointments are scheduled. To illustrate variation in antenatal international practice, in the UK, smaller doses of RhIg (e.g., 500 IU) may be given at 28 weeks and 34 weeks, although many UK facilities issue a 1500 IU dose at 28–30 weeks. With antenatal administration, the Rh of the fetus is usually unknown. Some transfusion services recommend a further antenatal dose if the infant is undelivered after 40 weeks.2. Postnatal. Prophylaxis of 300 µg (1500 IU) at delivery of an Rh positive or weak D infant within 72 hours of delivery whenever possible. If RhIg administration is delayed beyond 72 hours, laboratory policies differ as to when it would no longer be administered. The longer the delay, the more likely RhIg may fail to suppress production of anti-D, but it is still worth trying. Note: Because RhIg contains IgG anti-D, when given antenatally, it can cross the placenta and sensitize fetal D-positive red cells. Occasionally the fetus may be born with a weakly positive DAT, but significant hemolysis does not occur. For this reason some guidelines recommend that labs do NOT routinely perform DATs on infants whose mothers have received antenatal RhIg.

View Page
RhIg 'Failures'

Numerous studies have shown that, if administered correctly, RhIg is effective at preventing D immunization. To work, RhIg must be given in sufficient dose, and it must be given before Rh immunization has begun.Unfortunately, despite RhIg's proven efficacy, some women continue to make anti-D in the perinatal period. Such 'failures' are mainly (but not totally) due to human error. Examples of how women may still produce anti-D some 40+ years after the implementation of RhIg prophylaxis: Immunization to D occurred before the administration of RhIg, e.g., before 28 weeks gestation*; Immunization to D occurred after the administration of RhIg at 28 weeks and before delivery because an antenatal fetomaternal hemorrhage (FMH) occurred that was too large for residual passive anti-D to give protection; Female was already immunized from a prior pregnancy but anti-D was too weak to be detected in antibody screen tests prior to RhIg administration; RhIg dosage was insufficient to clear a larger fetal bleed at delivery (e.g., FMH screen was not done or a false negative occurred); Incorrect calculation of RhIg dosage; RhIg administered too late , e.g., well after 72 hours of delivery; Antenatal RhIg not given, e.g., mother had no, or limited, access to prenatal care, or did not seek it, and a FMH occurred during pregnancy; Failure of physician to carry out prenatal blood testing; RhIg not given due to laboratory clerical or technical error in Rh typing the mother or child; RhIg not given in cases such as abortions, ectopic pregnancies, and trauma (e.g., car accidents).* Because anti-D production before 28 weeks is rare (the order of 0.24% to 0.31%), RhIg's use earlier in pregnancy is not recommended. It is not cost effective and would expose most women to an unneeded blood product.

View Page
Main Learning Goals

This course reviewed some of the key learning goals relevant to HDFN and its investigation, prevention, and treatment. More specifically, the course reviewed the following topics: Historical aspects of HDFN due to anti-D and its prevention; HDFN due to antibodies in the ABO, Rh, and other blood group systems; Clinical symptoms and associated laboratory test results in HDFN; Best practices related to perinatal testing programs to prevent and diagnose HDFN; Characteristics and uses of RhIg; Interpretation of typical serologic test results when investigating HDFN.Before taking the final quiz, for each of the above topics, list as many of the key learning points that you can recall, then review topics that need more study. As well, re-read the learning objectives at the start of the course as these determine assessment questions.It's also worthwhile to read the literature and online resources in Further Reading as these reinforce key points, add to the depth of learning, and enrich the course materials.

View Page
Literature and Online Resources

The following published literature and online resources, while useful, should not be used as a substitute for technical and clinical judgment. Medical and technical information becomes obsolete quickly and current sources relevant to the user's location should always be consulted.References indicated by * provide a broad overview of HDFN and are highly recommended.LITERATUREAvent ND, Reid ME. The Rh blood group system: a review. Blood 2000 Jan 15;95 (2):375-87.Bowman J. Thirty-five years of Rh prophylaxis. Transfusion 2003 Dec;43(12):1661-6.* Eder AF. Update on HDFN: new information on long-standing controversies. Immunohematology 2006;22(4):188–195. (scroll to article)Eder, AF, Manno, C.S. Alloimmune hemolytic disease of the fetus and newborn. In Wintrobe's Clinical Hematology, 11th ed. (Greer JP, Foerster J, Lukens JN, Rodgers GM, Paraskevas F, Glader BE, (eds). Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2004.Flegel WA. Molecular genetics of RH and its clinical application. Transfus Clin Biol. 2006 Mar-Apr;13(1-2):4-12. Kennedy MS, McNanie J, Waheed A. Detection of anti-D following antepartum injections of Rh immune globulin. Immunohematology 1998;14(4):138-40.Koelewijn JM, de Haas M, Vrijkotte TG, van der Schoot CE, Bonsel GJ. Risk factors for RhD immunisation despite antenatal and postnatal anti-D prophylaxis. BJOG. 2009 Sep;116 (10): 1307-14. Epub 2009 Jun 17.* Kumar S, Regan F. Management of pregnancies with RhD alloimmunisation. BMJ. 2005 May 28;330(7502):1255-8. (UK perspective but much valuable information relevant to all)* Murray NA, Roberts IAG. Haemolytic disease of the newborn. Arch Dis Child Fetal Neonatal Ed 2007 Mar; 92(2): F83–F88. Oepkes D, Seaward PG, Vandenbussche FP, Windrim R, Kingdom J, Beyene J, Kanhai HH, Ohlsson A, Ryan G; DIAMOND Study Group. Doppler ultrasonography versus amniocentesis to predict fetal anemia. N Engl J Med. 2006 Jul 13;355(2):156-64.Ramsey G. Inaccurate doses of Rh immune globulin after Rh-incompatible fetomaternal hemorrhage: survey of laboratory practice. Arch Pathol Lab Med 2009 Mar; 133(3):465-9. Reid ME. The Rh antigen D: a review for clinicians. Blood Bulletin 2008 Apr; 10(1).Sandler SG. Effectiveness of the RhIg dose calculator. Arch Pathol Lab Med 2010 Jul;134(7): 967-8.Shulman IA, Calderon C, Nelson JM, Nakayama R. The routine use of Rh-negative reagent red cells for the identification of anti-D and the detection of non-D red cell antibodies. Transfusion 1994 Aug;34(8):666-70.Tamul KR. Determining fetal-maternal hemorrhage with flow cytometry. Advance 2000. Posted online June 5, 2000.Westhoff CM, Sloan SR. Molecular genotyping in transfusion medicine. Clin Chem 2008;54(12): 1948-50.ONLINE RESOURCESPaxton A. Bringing new rigor to RhIg calculations. CAP TODAY. May 2008. Accessed January 18, 2011.*Wagle S, Deshpande PG. Hemolytic disease of the newborn. eMedicine / WebMD. Updated Apr. 9, 2010. Accessed January 18, 2011.

View Page

Hereditary Hemochromatosis
Introduction

Hereditary hemochromatosis (HH) is a disorder of iron regulation that results in excessive dietary iron absorption through the gastrointestinal tract. Over time, the resultant iron overload and its deposition in tissue may lead to widespread organ damage, a variety of chronic disorders, and even death. Although it is a genetic disorder, clinical symptoms most typically become apparent in middle aged adults. Iron overload occurs in a variety of hereditary and acquired forms, known as iron storage diseases. HH is the most common cause of inherited iron overload. (1) Due to lack of awareness, HH often goes undetected or unrecognized by health care providers. Early detection to prevent the serious complications associated with iron overload has important consequences for reducing morbidity and mortality. Laboratory tests that assess iron levels and molecular assays for genetic mutatations are essential for both its detection and diagnosis.

View Page
General Overview of Testing

Tests for evaluating iron metabolism are generally used as initial or screening tests for hereditary hemochromatosis (HH) as they will detect the phenotypic expression of HH. These tests include serum iron (SI), transferrin (Tf) or total iron binding capacity (TIBC), transferrin saturation, serum ferritin (SF), and unsaturated iron binding capacity (UIBC). The serum ferritin assay is also used to assess the effectiveness of HH treatment.Molecular (DNA) analyses for HFE mutations are considered to be confirmatory tests for HH which may be ordered reflexively in patients with elevated iron results. Laboratories should establish their own reference intervals for assays of iron metabolism. In general, reference intervals vary by sex and by method used for the assays discussed in the following section. Typical reference intervals are included in the following sections for instructive purposes only and should not be used for evaluating actual patient data.The results of laboratory tests assessing iron metabolism should be interpreted with caution because a number of pre-analytical and physiologic factors can affect the results. Repeating elevated test results on fasting specimens is often advisable.

View Page
Which laboratory assay is considered to be a confirmatory test for hereditary hemochromatosis (HH)?View Page
Specific HFE Mutations

Several mutations of the HFE gene have been described. The most common mutation in patients with hereditary hemochromatosis is the C282Y mutation. In the C282Y mutation, a base substitution leads to a change in the amino acid in position 282 from cysteine (C) to tyrosine (Y). The loss of the sulfhydryl-containing amino acid disrupts the tertiary structure of HFE so that it no longer binds to beta-2 microglobulin. Beta-2 microglobulin appears to act along with other proteins to chaperone the newly synthesized HFE out of the Golgi apparatus and to the cell surface where it can then bind to TfR. In the C282Y mutation, HFE remains in the Golgi, never making it to the cell surface. The result is that transferrin binding to TfR is enhanced and excessive amounts of iron enter the cells of the small intestine, liver, and other tissues. A second mutation, H63D, causes a histidine (H) residue in position 63 to be replaced by aspartic acid (D). The mechanism by which this mutation leads to increased iron uptake is less well understood when compared to the C282Y mutation. Unlike the C282Y mutation, the H63D mutation does not seem to affect the binding of beta-2 microglobulin and intracellular movement, since detectable concentrations of the mutated protein are found on cell membranes. Some researchers speculate that the H63D mutation affects the binding of proteins involved in iron regulation and uptake at the cell surface.A third mutation, S65C, leads to a serine-to-cysteine substitution in its associated protein. This mutation has been been found in some compound heterozygotes for C282Y or H63D, but is rarely associated with iron overload in HH.Additional mutations of HFE have been identified, but their clinical significance is unclear. Most laboratories performing molecular assays test for only the C282Y, H63D, and S65C mutations.

View Page
General Clinical Considerations

Hereditary hemochromatosis (HH) is frequently discovered only during management of associated illness or routine health evaluations. It has been estimated that only a small percentage of all affected persons are actually diagnosed. Individuals with HH may be symptomatic for several years prior to diagnosis and may have consulted multiple health care providers.Under-diagnosis of HH is thought to occur due to:• Lack of specificity of early signs and symptoms• Asymptomatic status of some patients until damage to organs and tissues has occurred• Confusion with liver disease due to other causes• Insufficient awareness and knowledge of HHEarly identification of persons with HH is essential to prevent serious and irreversible complications associated with severe iron overload. A classic triad of skin hyperpigmentation (bronzing), type 2 diabetes, and hepatic cirrhosis has long been recognized as evidence of advanced iron overload. However, persons with HH may present with a much wider variety of signs and symptoms, particularly if they are seen before significant iron accumulation has occurred. Age of presentation and disease severity are highly variable. A diagnosis of HH is based on laboratory evidence of iron overload, genetic mutations associated with HH, and presence of clinical signs and symptoms consistent with HH.(10)

View Page
Secondary Disorders of Iron Overload

In addition to hereditary hemochromatosis (HH), there are other conditions of iron overload that must be considered in a differential diagnosis. Disorders such as sickle cell disease, thalassemia, sideroblastic anemia, congenital dyserythropoietic anemia, and liver disease may also cause iron overload. Transfusion-dependant patients and persons who abuse iron-containing vitamin supplements are also at risk. These conditions are usually described as secondary iron overload, in contrast to the primary iron overload of HH.Patient history, clinical signs and symptoms, biochemical and hematologic laboratory analyses, and possibly results of a liver biopsy may be needed to establish a diagnosis of a condition causing secondary iron overload. DNA tests for common HFE mutations are very likely the most important diagnostic tool for identifying HH as the cause of iron overload. In some patients, both secondary causes and HH may be contributing to iron overload. Differentiating the secondary causes of iron overload from HH is heavily dependent on the results of laboratory assays, but a complete discussion is beyond the scope of this course.

View Page
Diagnosing HH

The diagnosis of hereditary hemochromatosis (HH) is made through a combination of laboratory tests and medical evaluation of a patient's signs and symptoms. Iron overload is identified by tests that evaluate iron metabolism, while molecular assays are needed to document mutations in the HFE gene or others such as hepcidin, hemojuvelin, or transferrin receptor. Individuals with documented iron overload who exhibit signs and symptoms consistent with HH and who possess HFE or other mutations are considered to have HH. Other causes of secondary iron overload may need to be ruled out.An example of a testing algorithm is shown.

View Page
Which of the following is (are) needed for a diagnosis of hereditary hemochromatosis (HH)?View Page
What laboratory test reflects circulating iron that is bound to transferrin?View Page
Transferrin Saturation

Transferrin saturation (TS) is usually reported along with the serum iron (SI) and total iron binding capacity (TIBC). TS indicates the percent of iron binding sites on transferrin that are carrying iron. TS is derived from a calculation using the formula:TS =(SI/TIBC) x 100TS results are reported as percentages. Typical reference intervals for TS are 20% to 55% for males and 15% to 50% for females. TS is currently considered to be a good test for screening persons for hereditary hemochromatosis (HH) due to its sensitivity and specificity for iron overload. It may be elevated prior to significant deposition of tissue iron. TS levels increase as additional iron is accumulated.A drawback to using the TS is that it is dependent on performing both the SI and TIBC. The unsaturated iron-binding capacity UIBC may be a lower cost alternative.The optimal TS criterion for detecting HH is controversial. Using a TS of >60% for males and >50% for females has been found highly accurate in detecting abnormal iron metabolism in persons with HH. Others studies suggest using lower TS levels, e.g. 45%, as a criterion indicating further testing is warranted. Current guidelines from the American College of Physicians include a TS cutoff level of >55% for identifying iron overload. (11)Patients with initially increased TS should be followed by performing a second TS from a fasting morning specimen. The patient should also be advised not to take vitamins supplemented with iron or oral contraceptives for several days prior to the repeated test. TS levels may be affected by diurnal variation, dietary factors, and co-existing disease states such as inflammation and hepatitis. Patients with HH may have falsely normal TS if chronic blood loss or inflammatory disease is present.

View Page
Why is serum ferritin (SF) a less than optimal screening test for hereditary hemochromatosis (HH)?View Page
Screening Controversies

The subject of screening for hereditary hemochromatosis (HH) is controversial and is currently being debated in the medical literature. Using laboratory tests to screen the asymptomatic general population is currently not recommended due to issues of testing costs, low genetic penetrance, and the possible risk of discrimination. Targeted case finding in select high risk populations such as men of Northern European ancestry may be a better approach to screening. (12)Molecular-based (DNA) assays required for confirmation of HH are costly when used for general population screening. Because recent studies have shown that a high percentage of persons with C282Y mutations do not develop iron overload or HH-related clinical conditions, screening for these mutations may falsely label an individual with a disease diagnosis. At the present time, it is impossible to determine which homozygotes or heterozygotes for HFE mutations will eventually develop iron overload. Furthermore, there is potential risk of discrimination in obtaining health insurance for persons identified as having genetic disorders.In contrast, some experts do advocate for screening the general population. Mutations associated with HH are very common in Caucasians in the US. Individuals who know they carry mutations associated with HH may benefit from periodic testing for iron overload. Finally, laboratory tests that assess iron status are relatively inexpensive, widely available, and offer one approach to screening for phenotypic expression of HH. Screening first-degree family members of a person with documented HH is generally considered to be worthwhile. Early detection of HH in relatives with common mutations may permit treatment before the development of substantial iron overload and related disease due to organ damage.

View Page
What is one established reason supporting general population screening for hereditary hemochromatosis (HH)?View Page
UIBC

Unsaturated iron binding capacity (UIBC) may also be used as a marker for altered iron metabolism. UIBC represents the portion of iron binding sites on transferrin that are not occupied by iron. Therefore, a low UIBC indicates that transferrin is highly saturated with iron, a finding consistent with hereditary hemochromatosis (HH). HH may be suspected when the UIBC is less than 143 micrograms/dL, a criterion suggested by the results of one study.(5)UIBC may be a lower cost alternative to the more complex transferrin saturation (TS). UIBC and SI are both fully automated procedures that are available on widely used laboratory instruments. The TIBC can be calculated by adding UIBC and SI, resulting in a value for TIBC that can be used for determining TS: TS = SI/(SI + UIBC) X 100

View Page
Molecular Tests

DNA tests for HFE mutations associated with hereditary hemochromatosis (HH) are available in some clinical laboratories and reference laboratories. Testing for the presence of the C282Y is essential, although most labs also test for H63D and S65C mutations. Molecular testing is most appropriate for confirmatory testing of symptomatic individuals with altered iron studies (increased TS and SF), in pre-symptomatic individuals (increased TS, normal SF and liver function tests), and in family members of individuals diagnosed with HH. The use of genetic tests alone for routine screening of asymptomatic persons is not recommended for several reasons. A positive test indicating the presence of HFE mutations does not guarantee that an individual will develop clinically significant iron overload or predict severity of symptoms. A negative result (no HFE mutations present) does not rule out a diagnosis of iron overload because of genetic heterogeneity. Compared to biochemical analyses for iron, molecular assays are expensive. Finally, molecular testing may result in the diagnosis of a genetic disease, thus opening up the possibility for discrimination in health insurance coverage. Using molecular methods, DNA is extracted from leukocytes in whole blood samples or from buccal cells and analyzed for specific HFE mutations using polymerase chain reaction (PCR) with melt curve analysis. Currently there are no FDA-cleared products for HFE testing, and testing laboratories are using "home brew" reagents. This situation is expected to change as manufacturers submit products for FDA approval.

View Page

HIPAA Privacy and Security Rules
Case Study: Administrative Safeguards You are the technologist in charge of the hematology section in a hospital laboratory and you are reviewing blood count results for 100 patients as part of an internal quality assurance project. You review the clinical findings in the electronic medical record to correlate with the laboratory results. The following week, you get a call from your hospital security officer. She says that a routine computer system audit has revealed that you accessed the records of 100 patients and she would like to know why.You tell her:View Page
Minimum Necessary Use and Disclosure

"Minimum necessary" means that the laboratory will use and disclose only the minimum PHI necessary to accomplish its intended purpose, such as resulting the requested test. The regulation recognizes that there are situations when all of the PHI on a patient can be released. These include:When releasing PHI to another covered entity for treatment.When releasing PHI to the individual who is the subject of the information.When an individual has signed an authorization to release the PHI.When required to do so by law.

View Page
Authorization

The privacy regulations give covered entities permission to use and disclose PHI for treatment, payment, and health care operations (TPO), without obtaining specific authorization.A covered entity may disclose PHI to other covered entities such as reference laboratories, and home care services, which are providing services to the primary covered entity.The service that the other covered entity is providing must fall within treatment, payment, or health care operations (TPO).If the service being provided does not fall within TPO, an authorization is generally required.An authorization form must state the specific disclosures of PHI to be made, what the information will be used for, and must be signed and dated by the patient.

View Page
Case Study: Authorization You are working in a physicians office. The doctor orders laboratory and other diagnostic tests on a patient with suspected Alzheimer's disease. The doctor then asks you to give the patient's name and contact information to the local Alzheimer's support group, without getting permission from the patient or the patient's legal guardian. Does the doctor need authorization from the patient or the patient's legal guardian to do this?View Page
Case Study: De-identified Health Information. You work in a laboratory microbiology department that provides a local nursing home with information about the effectiveness of various antibiotics it uses to treat infections. You print the requested information, including patient first and last names, birthdates, and medical record numbers, bacterial organisms identified, and the organisms' sensitivities to various antibiotics. What information should you provide to the nursing home?View Page
Case Study: Limiting Use & Disclosure of PHI You are the customer service representative in a clinical laboratory. You get a call from a nurse at one of your outreach clinic offices requesting that you fax test results on a patient. The physician is currently seeing the patient and needs the test results immediately. True or false: Under the HIPAA Privacy Regulations, you can comply with this request, without getting written authorization from the patient.View Page
Case Study: Incidental disclosures and safeguards. As a manager, you guided a group of high school students through your clinical laboratory during a field trip. You did not explain the laboratory's privacy policy to the teacher and students, because you thought they would have little access to PHI. However, during the tour, the students overheard names of patients and associated blood tests, saw laboratory reports laying on desks, and viewed test results on computer screens. True or false: This is acceptable under the HIPAA Privacy Regulation since these were incidental disclosures that could not reasonably be prevented.View Page
Case Study: Minimum Necessary Use and Disclosure You are a ward clerk responsible for inserting laboratory reports into patients' medical records (charts). You open the chart directly to the laboratory tab and insert the report.True or false: Paging through and reading other sections of the medical record that are not applicable to your job responsibilities would be a violation of the HIPAA Privacy Rule. View Page
Importance of Privacy - An Example

You will have many opportunities to avoid disclosing protected health information. Here is one simple example: Your best friend asks you to look up her mother's laboratory results. Knowing the HIPAA privacy regulation and your own departmental policies and procedures, you do not disclose the protected health information which she is requesting. You politely tell your friend that you are not allowed to give her the laboratory results.

View Page
Who Does HIPAA Apply To?

HIPAA applies to: Health plans (such as health insurance companies)Health care clearinghouses (such as billing companies)Health care providers (including doctors, hospitals, laboratories, and pharmacies)HIPAA refers to these 3 groups as covered entities.

View Page

Histology Special Stains: Carbohydrates
Monosaccharides - The Basic Carbohydrate Structure

The simplest form of a carbohydrate is a Monosaccharide, which is the building block of larger and more complex carbohydrates, namely polysaccharides and and glycoconjugates like mucopolysaccharides. Monosaccharidesare not easily demonstrated using histology techniques due to the high number of hydroxyl (OH) groups which render the molecule extremely water soluble. Most monosaccharides that are present within tissue specimens will be lost during the fixation and standard tissue processing. Glucose, is the most commonly demonstrated monosaccharide in the histopathology laboratory.

View Page
PAS: Diagnostic Applications

The PAS staining procedure is most commonly used in the clinical histology laboratory to demonstrate glycogen deposits in the liver. Glycogen granules may also be visible in tumors of the bladder, kidney, ovary, pancreas, and lung. Basement membranes, which are present in various tissues in the body, may also be visualized through the PAS staining procedure. Several disorders can be identified through the demonstration of abnormal basement membranes. The PAS staining procedure can also demonstrate fungi in tissue samples due to the high carbohydrate content of the organisms cellular walls. Neutral mucins in the gastrointestinal tract and some epithelial mucins will also give a PAS-positive staining reaction.

View Page
Alcian Blue: Diagnostic Applications

Alcian Blue is used in the clinical histology laboratory to demonstrate acid mucins which can be secreted by various connective and epithelial tissue tumors. It is most commonly used on tissue samples obtained from the gastrointestinal tract. The detection of mucins in certain tissue samples may also be indicative of collagen diseases and atherosclerosis. Alcian Blue may also be used in combination with the PAS staining procedure so that both acid and neutral mucins can be demonstrated in the same tissue sample. Alcian Blue will stain acidic mucins blue and PAS will stain neutral mucins rose red. This technique is particularly useful in diagnosing diseases of the gastrointestinal (GI) tract.

View Page
Tissue Staining in the Clinical Histology Laboratory

Due to their transparent nature, the cellular and intracellular structure of tissue samples can not be microscopically examined until they are colored by dyes. Dyes used to stain tissue samples for microscopic analysis in the clinical histology laboratory are called biological dyes or biological stains. Biological dyes can be grouped into the following two categories:Natural: Dyes that are derived from natural resources. The most important natural dye in the histopathology laboratory is Hematoxylin. Artificial: Dyes that are derived through chemical reactions. Artificial dyes greatly outnumber natural dyes.

View Page
Microwaves in the Histopathology Laboratory

Microwave ovens are commonly used in the histopathology laboratory to help expedite special staining procedures and improve diagnostic turnaround times. Staining solutions (with or without slides) are often heated in the microwave to increase the rate at which the dye or other reagent is diffused throughout the tissue sample.

View Page
Safety Precautions for Microwave Usage

While microwave use in the laboratory is considered to be relatively safe, the following safety precautions should be taken to prevent high doses of exposure to microwaves and personal injury: Periodically inspect and clean door seals and hinges. Use a microwave leakage detector to check for microwave leakage from the door seals on a regular basis. Always handle containers with potholders or thermal mitts. Never operate the microwave without a minimum volume of microwave-absorbing material inside the container. Never heat food in a microwave oven used for laboratory procedures.

View Page

Histology Special Stains: Connective Tissue
Tissue Staining in the Clinical Histology Laboratory

Due to their transparent nature, the cellular and intracellular structure of tissue samples cannot be microscopically examined until they are colored by dyes. Dyes used to stain tissue samples for microscopic analysis in the clinical histology laboratory are called biological dyes or biological stains. Biological dyes can be grouped into the following two categories:Natural: Dyes that are derived from natural resources. The most important natural dye in the histopathology laboratory is hematoxylin.Artificial: Dyes that are derived through chemical reactions. Artificial dyes greatly outnumber natural dyes.

View Page
Safety Precautions for Microwave Usage

While microwave use in the laboratory is considered to be relatively safe, the following safety precautions should be taken to prevent high doses of exposure to microwaves and personal injury:Periodically inspect and clean door seals and hinges.Use a microwave leakage detector to check for microwave leakage from the door seals on a regular basis.Always handle containers with potholders or thermal mitts.Never operate the microwave without a minimum volume of microwave-absorbing material inside the container.Never heat food in a microwave oven used for laboratory procedures.

View Page
Microwaves in the Histopathology Laboratory

Microwave ovens are commonly used in the histopathology laboratory to help expedite special staining procedures and improve diagnostic turnaround times. Staining solutions (with or without slides) are often heated in the microwave to increase the rate at which the dye or other reagent is diffused throughout the tissue sample.

View Page

HIV Safety for Florida
A person commits a misdemeanor of the first degree by:View Page
Reporting results

Each laboratory that performs a test indicative of HIV or AIDS shall report to the county health department in less than 2 weeks.To assure the confidentiality of the patient, reporting of HIV infection and AIDS must be conducted using a system developed by CDC or equivalent system. The CDC explains that "to safeguard the confidentiality and security of the data, CDC published guidelines in 2006 to ensure that data in the HIV surveillance system are held under the highest of security standards and with the most stringent protections. The guidelines were based on consultations with state HIV surveillance coordinators, CDC's Divisions of STD Prevention and TB Elimination, and security and computer staff in other CDC centers and offices and were reviewed by staff in the state and local surveillance programs." These guidelines explain the mandatory confidentiality rules and protocols that each local, state, or government agency's reporting/surveillance system must have in place to ensure the utmost confidentiality of HIV/AIDS related data. These guidelines can be found in the "resources" page of this course. Those who violate any of the confidentiality rules listed in HIV/AIDS reporting/surveillance guidelines may be fined $500 per person, per offense.

View Page
Overview

Prevention of HIV exposure is the best line of defense to prevent occupational transmission of HIV as there is no vaccine available to develop specific immunity and the postexposure prophylaxis is toxic. Following appropriate workplace practices in the laboratory focus on preventing needlesticks or other sharps injuries and exposure of mucous membranes and abraded skin to HIV-infected blood or body fluids.

View Page
The following workplace practices minimize risk of HIV exposure to mucous membranes or abraded skin:View Page

Human Papillomavirus (HPV) and Molecular Diagnostic Testing
HPV Structure

Papillomaviruses are small DNA viruses that measure approximately 55 nm in diameter and belong to the family Papovaviridae. HPV is a non-enveloped virus and is composed of an icosahedral-shaped protein capsid enfolding a circular, double-stranded DNA genome of approximately 7,900 base pairs.Until recently, diagnostic laboratory testing for HPV was impossible since the virus does not grow in tissue cultures or in laboratory animals. Currently, with the recent technologic advancements in molecular biology techniques for HPV testing, scientists have isolated more than 100 different HPV types.

View Page
Molecular Methods for HR-HPV Testing

The molecular methods currently used for HR-HPV testing include: Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) PCR is the molecular biology technique used to type HPV. There are also PCR tests to detect HR-HPV DNA. In situ hybridization (ISH) and Fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH) These methods use chromagens or fluorescence labeled probes to detect HR-HPV DNA in tissues or cells on planar surfaces. Digene High-Risk HPV Hybrid Capture (HC) 2 DNA Cervista HPV HR Screen and Cervista HPV 16/18This study will discuss the last two methods. High-Risk HPV HC2 DNA and the Cervista HPV assays are FDA-approved for laboratory testing and are designed as molecular assays for the clinical laboratory. These two methods are most often assayed using the liquid cervical specimens collected during the Pap smear procedure.

View Page
References

Cervical Cancer: Prevention and Early Detection. American Cancer Society. Available at http://www.cancer.org/docroot/CRI/content/CRI_2_6x_cervical_cancer_prevention_and_early_detection_8.asp. Accessed December 1, 2011. Cervista HPV, Cervista HPV – Invader Technology. HOLOGIC. Available at http://www.cervistahpv.com/laboratory/invadertechnology.html. Accessed December 1, 2011.Chin-Hong PV, Klausner JD. Diagnostic tests for HPV infection. Medical Laboratory Observer. October 2004:10-16.Cobo F, Concha A, Ortiz M. Human papillomavirus (HPV) type distribution in females with abnormal cervical cytology. A correlation with histological study. Virology Journal. 2009;3:60-66.Cox JT, Moriarty AT, CastlePE. Commentary on statement on HPV DNA test utilization. American Journal Clinical Pathology. 2009;131:770-773.HPV Vaccine Information for Clinicians. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Available at http://cdc.gov/std/hpv/stdfact-hpv-vaccine-hcp.htm. Accessed December 1, 2011.Human Papillomavirus (HPV) Natural History. American Society for Colposcopy and Cytological Pathology. Available at http://www.asccp.org/hpv_history.shtml. Accessed December 1, 2011.Human Papillomavirus (HPV) Vaccines. National Cancer Institute. Available at http://www.cancer.gov/cancertopics/factsheet/prevention/HPV-vaccine. Accessed December 1, 2011.Human papillomaviruses and Cancer: Questions and Answers. National Cancer Institute Fact Sheet. Available at http://www.cancer.gov/cancertopics/factsheet/risk/hpv. Accessed December 1, 2011.Hybrid Capture 2 Technology. QIAGEN - Sample & Assay Technologies. Available at http://www1.qiagen.com/hpv/hc2technology.aspx. Accessed December 1, 2011.Markowitz LE, Sternberg M, Dunne EF, et al. Seroprevalence of human papillomavirus types 6, 11, 16, and 18 in the United States: national health and nutrition examination survey 2003-2004. Infectious Disease. 2009;200:1059-1067.Molecular Diagnostics Fundamentals, Methods, and Clinical Applications. Leal Buckingham and Maribeth L. Flaws. Philadelphia:FA Davis Company, 2007.Schutzbank TE, Jarvis C, Kahmann N, et al. Detection of high-risk papillomavirus DNA with commercial invader-technology-based analyte-specific reagents following automated extraction of DNA from cervical brushings in Thinprep media. Journal of Clinical Microbiology. 2007;45:4067-4069.Solomon D, Papillo JL, Davey DD. Statement on HPV DNA test utilization. American Journal of Clinical Pathology. 2009;131:768-769.Vernick JP, Steigman, CK. The HPV DNA virus hybrid capture assay: what is it—and where do we go from here? Medical Laboratory Observer. Mar 2003:8-13.Voss JS, Kipp BR, Campion MB et al. Comparison of fluorescence in situ hybridization, hybrid capture 2 and polymerase chain reaction for the detection of high-risk human papillomavirus in cervical cytology specimens. Analytical and Quantitative Cytology and Histology. 2009;31:208-216.

View Page

Introduction to Bioterrorism
The Laboratory Response Network (LRN) is a multilevel system designed to link frontline clinical laboratories to advanced capacity testing laboratories. The frontline microbiology laboratories are classified by the LRN as:View Page
Members of the chemical component of the LRN define their network participation with a designation of level 1, 2, or 3. The level primarily responsible for working with hospitals and private laboratories is:View Page
Why Biological Agents Would be Chosen as WMDs

They are easily available.Biological pathogens can be obtained from nature, hospital laboratories, university research facilities, etc.They can be hard to detect.Small quantities can have potentially deadly or incapacitating effects on a susceptible population.They can be used covertly.They can be spread throughout large areas by natural convection, air or water currents.They can be easily spread.Ventilation systems in buildings is one way biological agents may be spread. In addition, transportation facilities could become part of the dissemination system by carrying biological agents far from their initial source.

View Page
Laboratory Response

The broad base of clinical laboratories in this country is an essential component of our nation’s public health and healthcare system and is an essential link in addressing biological and chemical terrorism. In 1999 the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) initiated the concept of a Laboratory Response Network (LRN).  The LRN is a network of local, state, federal, and military laboratories across the United States and internationally which work together in an integrated and coordinated way for a rapid response to public health emergencies. The LRN concept of operations is based on a system of safety and proficiency.

View Page
The LRN Pyramid

The LRN is a multilevel system designed to link frontline clinical microbiology laboratories and hospitals and other institutions to state and local public health laboratories in supporting advanced capacity public health, military, veterinary, agricultural, water and food testing laboratories at the federal level. Laboratories within the LRN are divided into 3 levels: Sentinel Labs, Reference Labs, and National Labs.

View Page
Reference Labs

Next up on the pyramid are the reference laboratories. These laboratories are sometimes referred to as “confirmatory reference” laboratories. They can perform tests to detect and confirm (rule-in) the presence of a threat agent. These labs ensure a timely local response in the event of a terrorist incident. Rather than having to rely on confirmation from laboratories at CDC, reference laboratories are capable of producing conclusive results. This allows local authorities to respond quickly to emergencies.

View Page
National Labs

At the highest level are the "national" laboratories. Examples would include those operated by CDC, the United States Army Medical Research Institute for Infectious Diseases, and the Naval Medical Research Center. These laboratories have very unique resources to handle highly infectious agents and the ability to identify specific agent strains.

View Page
Laboratory Response - Chemical

Currently there are over 60 territorial and metropolitan public health laboratories that are members of the chemical component of the LRN. A designation of Level 1, 2, or 3 defines their network participation.

View Page
Laboratory Response - Chemical, Level 3

Level 3 laboratories are responsible for: Working with hospitals and private laboratories in their jurisdiction Knowing how to properly collect and ship clinical specimens Ensuring that specimens, which can be used as evidence in a criminal investigation, are properly handled and that chain-of-custody procedures are followed Being familiar with chemical agents and how they can affect health and well-being Training on anticipated clinical sample flow and shipping regulations Working to develop a coordinated response plan for their respective state and jurisdiction

View Page
Laboratory Response - Chemical, Level 2

In addition to the responsibilities listed for Level 3, over 40 laboratories also participate in Level 2 activities. At this level, laboratory personnel are trained to detect exposure to a limited number of toxic chemical agents in human blood or urine, the analysis of cyanide and toxic metals in human samples, for example.

View Page
Laboratory Response - Chemical, Level 1

At present, 5 laboratories participate in Level 1 activities. At this level, technical personnel are trained to detect exposure to an expanded number of chemicals in human blood and urine. This includes all Level 3 and 2 laboratory analyses, plus analyses for mustard agents, nerve agents, and other toxic chemicals.

View Page
In the LRN hierarchy, large organizations like the CDC, the United States Army Medical Research Institute for Infectious Diseases, and the Naval Medical Research Center are classified as View Page
In the Chemical Component of the LRN, there are 60 laboratories divided into 3 levels. At the top, with unique facilities unavailable to the level 1 - 3 labs, is/are theView Page
Sentinel Labs

The frontline clinical microbiology laboratories are known as “sentinel laboratories”. The sentinel laboratories play a key role in the nation’s preparedness efforts. These laboratories perform the initial screening of clinical specimens for potential pathogens (rule-out) and refer specimens or isolates to a state or local public health laboratory at the reference level of the LRN. There are two kinds of sentinel laboratories: advanced and basic. Classification depends on their biological safety level and analytical capability.

View Page
Your Response – At Work

Recent events, including the terrorist attacks on September 11, 2001 and the subsequent bioterrorist releases of anthrax, have been a harsh awakening that the nation’s workplaces could be terrorist targets.Traditionally laboratory safety guidelines have emphasized use of optimal work practices, appropriate containment equipment, well-designed facilities, and administrative controls to minimize risks of unintentional infection or injury for laboratory workers. Today, in addition to the above, laboratories must make a risk and threat assessment, secure data and electronic technology systems, plus develop policies regarding specimen accountability, facility security, and emergency response.The next few pages will cover a number of things that you can do to assist in making your laboratory more risk free to a terrorist attack and some things you can do in case that security is breached. You too have a role in the security of your workplace!

View Page

Introduction to Bone Marrow
Preparation of Concentrated Smears

In some laboratories the anticoagulated sample is used to prepare concentrated smears. Placing the fluid in a Wintrobe tube and centrifuging it separates the sample into four layers:fat and perivascular cellsplasmabuffy layer - myeloid and nucleated erythroid cellserythrocytesThe volume of each layer is measured using the scale on the Wintrobe tube and then the percentage of each layer is calculated. Next the plasma is removed and a smear is made from the buffy coat and top of the red cell layer. Either the manual push method or cytospin technique may be used to make the smears. They may be stained with a variety of cytochemical stains. Concentrated smears are used to examine cell morphology and demonstrate the presence of abnormal cells when the marrow is hypocellular. The smears cannot be used for differential counts or evaluation of cellularity.

View Page

Introduction to Flow Cytometry: Blood Cell Identification
Flow Cytometry Course Introduction

Flow cytometry is a laboratory method that allows the simultaneous measurement of multiple physical characteristics of individual cells. A flow cytometer is used to isolate and fluorescently label blood cells based on molecules of interest associated with each cell. Next, the instrument analyzes and stores information about the cells based on the amount of light scatter and the fluorescent light that is emitted.Flow cytometry has many applications including: Immunophenotyping HIV disease assessment Transplant cellular distribution determination and CD3 suppression Leukemia/lymphoma diagnosis, staging, and minimal residual disease testing CD34 quantitation/Stem cell quantitation Fetal hemoglobin detection on red blood cells (RBCs) DNA ploidy determination Research, bacterial identification, population filtering, etc. This course will focus on leukemia/lymphoma assessment and analysis.

View Page
Case Two

A 60-year-old man presented to the emergency department with complaints of fatigue and weakness which began during the previous week. He also stated that he had been experiencing shortness of breath without chest pain, cough, or dizziness. Upon physical examination, he had normal vital signs. However, his spleen was mildly enlarged. Laboratory tests were ordered. The white blood count (WBC) and absolute lymphocyte counts were both elevated:WBC= 28.5 x 109/L (normal 4 - 10) Lymphocyte count= 20.0 x 109/L (normal 1.2 - 4.0)A manual differential confirmed the elevated lymphocyte count. Smudge cells were also noted, as shown in the image.To evaluate the patient's lymphocytosis, a blood sample was submitted for flow cytometry analysis.

View Page

Introduction to Quality Control
Which of the following types of controls can be used to measure accuracy of a laboratory's methods?View Page
Accuracy and Precision

Quality control comprises both accuracy and precision.Accuracy: refers to the closeness of the measured quantitative value to the reference value.Systematic errors will affect a system's accuracy.Bias is an estimate of systematic error.Precision refers to the agreement of results upon replicate testing of a material or similar material under specified conditions.Random errors will affect a test system's precisionStandard deviation and coefficient of variation are measures of imprecision.

View Page
Quality Control Tools

The quality control (QC) program should make use of whatever tools are available to monitor the method system and ensure reliable test results.The Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services (CMS) dictates quality control (QC) requirements for laboratories operating in the United States through the Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments (CLIA). CLIA requires both intralaboratory (or internal) QC and external quality assessment (QA) measures. Intralaboratory QC is the QC that is performed by the laboratory itself. The external QA required by CLIA is a proficiency testing program.Interlaboratory (between laboratories) QC may also be an option for some method systems. Laboratories using the same instrumentation and same QC lot numbers periodically compare QC results (peer comparisons) to determine target values, QC limits, and data consistency.

View Page
Intralaboratory (Internal) Quality Control

QC testing is performed within a laboratory to monitor and ensure the reliability of test results produced by the laboratory. Control materials (usually liquid controls) are used to monitor the test system and verify that quality patient test results have been attained. A control is a stabilized sample with a predetermined range of result values that simulates a patient sample.Control samples are tested in the same way as patient samples. If the results from testing a control sample are not within the acceptable ranges, we assume there has been a problem in the test procedure, equipment, or the samples themselves. There are many criteria for rejecting a test based on the control samples measurements; these criteria will be detailed further in a later section. Patient results are not reported until the cause of the problem has been found, the problem resolved, and the controls retested to verify that everything is working normally.

View Page
Assayed and Unassayed Controls

Commercially prepared controls come in either assayed or unassayed forms. Assayed controls are tested by multiple methods before sale, and come with measuring system-specific values that are meant to be used as target values for the laboratory using the controls. Assayed controls:Are more expensive than unassayed controlsAre used to evaluate accuracy and precisionMay only be suitable for specific method systems Unassayed controls have no assigned analyte values provided by the manufacturer. The control values for these materials must be determined by the individual laboratory. Unassayed controls:Are less expensive than assayed controlsAre used to evaluate accuracy and precisionAre not linked to specific method systems Note: although commercially available control materials are screened for hepatitis antigens and HIV antibodies, control materials should still be handled with precautions, since they contain biological materials and could contain infectious agents.

View Page
Additional Variables

Depending on the type of testing that is being performed, many other factors may need to be monitored to ensure reliable test results. These include:Water quality Analytic balance calibration Glassware calibration Centrifuge calibration Thermometer calibrationIncubator temperatures Refrigerator temperatures Freezer temperatures Expiration of reagents, standards, and controls Instrument maintenance Procedure manuals, including written step-by-step procedures of all tests performed by laboratory Method selection, based on local population and clinician needs Normal range verification based on the local population Technical competencies of laboratory staff members

View Page
Instrument Maintenance

Instruments require regular maintenance by laboratory personnel, and sometimes by qualified repair technicians. The instrument manufacturer will provide recommendations for how often to perform maintenance; those recommendations should be followed. Generally, a log book will document the details of the maintenance:Date Time Name of employee or service engineer Description of maintenance done, including listing any parts replaced Description of problems encountered Description of steps taken to resolve the problem and verify the instrument is functioning, after the changes were madeInstrument logs should be regularly reviewed by supervisors to monitor instrument performance. By reviewing the logs, the supervisor can make changes to the maintenance schedule, based on the frequency of breakdowns.

View Page
External Quality Assessment

External quality assessment or proficiency testing (PT) is performed to ensure the reliability of test results by comparing results to other laboratories that use the same method system and/or to an assigned value.The CLIA standards for handling proficiency testing specimens are as follows:PT samples must be tested with the laboratory's regular patient load. PT samples must be tested the same number of times that patients' samples are tested routinely. Laboratories participating in PT programs must not engage in interlaboratory comparison of PT sample results. Laboratories may not send PT samples to another laboratory for analysis. Laboratories must document all steps of processing for PT samples. PT is required for only the primary method used for testing of analytes in patients' samples during the period covered by the PT event.In return for their participation, the laboratory will receive the following information:Results for each analyte sample Mean result for each analyte Standard deviation of results by the comparative method Number of laboratories using the same method Standard deviation index (SDI) Lower and upper limits of acceptability of resultsPT results that are between the lower and upper limits of acceptability are considered satisfactory.External quality control serves several purposes, including: Evaluates the internal quality control programDetects errors in a lab's methods, including technical errorsProvides a comparison of testing methods, which is useful in selecting new methods

View Page
Which of the following statements about external quality control are true?View Page

Introduction to the ABO Blood Group System
In what way are the ABO serum antibodies unique among blood group systems?View Page

Laboratory Ergonomics
Creating an Ergonomically Safe Work Environment

Both the employer and the employee should share the responsibility for assessing and improving ergonomics in the laboratory. A three-step ergonomic program includes: Finding the hazard Determining what improvements / changes should be made Taking action to improve the workplaceEmployers should: Provide ergonomics education Provide ergonomically designed tools and equipment Allow frequent stretch breaks If possible, adjust work schedules to prevent employees from performing repetitious tasks for prolonged periods of time. As an employee, you should evaluate the ergonomic practices in your work area.Employees should: Understand the risk of injury Apply ergonomic principles to the performance of tasks Look for ergonomic hazards and improve the workplace whenever possible Recognize and report early signs of musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs)

View Page
Scenario #3Jim spends most of his workday sitting on a stool at the technical workbench. The image on this page illustrates how he routinely sits. Lately, he has been experiencing lower back and leg discomfort that continues to bother him when he leaves work. He has been having trouble sleeping because of the pain in his legs. Eventually, the pain progresses to the point where he cannot work an entire day. What may have caused the problem and what could have been done to prevent the MSD from developing? Consider what could be the problem based on your observation of Jim's normal sitting position. Then click on the blue text below to see the ergonomic evaluation and possible solutions.View Page
Examine the image on the right. What problems can you see that may result in MSDs for this laboratory worker if her job involves frequent use of the computer for prolonged periods of time?View Page
Learn to Use Your "Ergonomic Eye"

Ergonomics is an important part of the overall laboratory safety program that ensures the well-being of all employees. The potential for MSDs while performing routine tasks exist in all areas of the laboratory. Laboratory workers should apply ergonomic principles to the performance of their job tasks and should report workplace design concerns. Each physical activity should be observed for opportunities to decrease physical stress and increase comfort.

View Page
References

Cornell University. CUErgo. Available at: http://ergo.human.cornell.edu/ Accessed August 4, 2011.National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. Ergonomics and musculoskeletal disorders. Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/ergonomics/ Accessed August 4, 2011.UCLA Ergonomics. Musculoskeletal disorders: Anatomy of an injury. Available at: http://ergonomics.ucla.edu/MSD_Anatomy.html. Accessed August 4, 2011.US Department of Labor. Healthcare wide hazards module: Ergonomics. Available at: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/hospital/hazards/ergo/ergo.html Accessed August 4, 2011.

View Page
Repetitive Motion Injuries

Repetitive motions can cause a variety of disorders that affect nerves, tendons, and muscles. Symptoms can include tingling or numbness in the fingers or hands, decreased range of motion, decreased grip strength, sleep interrupted by numbness or discomfort in the hands, pain in fingers, hands, or wrist, or pain shooting up into the forearms or arms.Some common afflictions that could affect laboratory workers due to the nature of their jobs are listed in the table below. Condition Symptoms Cause Carpal tunnel syndrome Pain that radiates up the arm, numbness or tingling in the thumb, index, or middle finger and weakness in the wrist and hand Compression of the median nerve that runs from the forearm into the hand Thoracic outlet syndrome Numbness and tingling in the hand, intensified with overhead activities Compression of the nerves and blood vessels between the neck and shoulder Radial tunnel syndrome Elbow pain, pain near the base of thumb, or pain anywhere in between. A common symptom is wrist weakness. Compression or entrapment of the radial nerve; may be caused by repetitive wrist and finger extension or repetitive forearm turning. Tendinitis Stiffness, tightness, and burning sensation; may experience a deep nonspecific pain. Grip impairment. Occurs most often in the tendons of the fingers, thumb, forearm, elbow, and shoulder. Repetitive motions or maintaining an awkward position that stresses tendons beyond their strength. Friction from overuse can cause inflammation. Tenosynovitis Pain, swelling, difficulty moving the joint in the affected area Inflammation of the tendon sheath

View Page
Causes of Work-related Musculoskeletal Disorders

The primary goal of ergonomics is the prevention of musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs). There are many potential causes of MSDs. Injury can occur from a single event (strain, sprain, slip, or fall) or result from build-up of tissue damage from many small injuries. An MSD can develop over time if a motion is repeated consistently so that the constant trauma causes damage to a muscle, tendon, bone, or bursa of a joint. Force, vibration, or maintenance of an awkward position for a prolonged period of time can cause MSDs.Some specific causes of MSDs that are related to laboratory tasks are: Prolonged use of a keyboard or mouse Prolonged sitting at a microscope Pipetting Screwing and unscrewing vial caps Standing at a laboratory instrument for a prolonged period of time Lack of rest - intensive hours at the workstation with few breaks Sustained awkward position

View Page

Laws and Rules of the Florida Board of Clinical Laboratory Personnel (retired 9/1/2010)
Your Role

As a clinical laboratory worker, your role is vital in the health care process. You provide information to doctors, nurses, and healthcare organizations that is vital to proper patient care. Because your role is so important, you must be properly qualified, trained, and licensed for your position. You must also keep up with the latest laboratory techniques and developments by fulfilling continuing education requirements; and you are bound by a code of ethics, which ensures that patient results are accurate, reliable, and free from error and bias.

View Page
Public health laboratory scientists

Public health laboratory scientists are also regulated by the Board. The table below outlines the various requirements for applicants to receive licensure for a public health laboratory. Public Health Laboratory RequirementsDirectorFulfill the same requirements as a clinical laboratory directorSupervisorBe certified by National Registry in Clinical Chemistry or American Society for MicrobiologyBe licensed as a technologistHave five year's relevant experiencePass the state examTechnician (microbiology)Have a Bachelor's degree in one of the biological sciencesObtain American Society for Microbiology or the National Registry in Microbiology Certification in Public Health Microbiology Technician (chemistry)Have a Bachelor's degree in one of the chemical, biological, or physical sciencesObtain National Registry of Clinical Chemistry Certification in Public Health ChemistryTechnician (conditional)Have a Bachelor's degree in one of the chemical or biological sciencesPerform tests only under the direct supervision of a licensed pathologist, director, supervisor, or technologist.Receives a conditional two-year license, which may be renewed only once A license from the Board of Clinical Laboratory Personnel allows you to work in a public health laboratory at the same level and specialty.

View Page
Clinical laboratory personnel license

To practice as a clinical laboratory scientist in the state of Florida, you must have an appropriate Florida license. Without a license, you cannot conduct clinical laboratory examinations or report test results. You do not need a Florida license to work in: Laboratories run by the federal government. Labs that perform only waived testing. Labs run exclusively for research and teaching purposes that do not report patient results.These laboratories may have other licensing and training requirements.

View Page
Technologist Qualifications

Meets one of the following:Bachelor's degree in clinical laboratory, chemical or biological science plus:Completion of a medical technologist training program ORThree years of laboratory experience, at least one of which must be in the applied-for specialtyAssociate's degree plus:Florida technician's license and completion of a technician level medical laboratory training program ORFive years of laboratory experience, at least one of which must be in the applied-for specialtyPasses an examination in one or more specialtiesCompletes one hour of HIV / AIDS continuing educationCompletes two hours of medical errors continuing education

View Page
Director Qualifications

Effective date March 17, 2008All applicants for a Director license must meet the qualifications for a high complexity laboratory director that are defined in 42 CFR 493.1443 as published on October 1, 2007.A licensed physician may direct a clinical laboratory without a separate laboratory director's license if he / she is certified in clinical pathology by the American Board of Pathology (ABP) or the American Osteopathic Board of Pathology (AOBP); is board-certified in the pertinent laboratory speciality; and/or has four years of pertinent clinical laboratory experience (post-graduate) with two years experience in the speciality that will he/she will direct.A non-physician may obtain a director's license for a specialty area if he / she: Holds an earned doctoral degree in a chemical, biological, or clinical laboratory science Is certified in the pertinent laboratory specialty by an approved national board A director can oversee up to five laboratories.

View Page
Director Responsibilities

A clinical laboratory director is responsible for the overall operation and administration of the clinical laboratory. The director can delegate responsibilities to licensed supervisors, but is ultimately responsible for the following: Ensuring the employment of personnel who have the necessary education and experience and who are competent to perform the procedures and tasks that are assigned to them. Overseeing performance and reporting of accurate test results Verifying the laboratory's compliance with federal and state laws, rules, and regulations Delegating certain administrative duties to supervisors Being available for on-site, telephone, or e-mail consultation Ensuring that test methods and procedures, quality control, and verification methods provide reliable and accurate results Ensuring compliance with quality control and quality assurance programs Ensuring enrollment and active participation of the laboratory in a proficiency testing program, monitoring proficiency testing results, and implementing corrective action when necessary Assessing laboratory staffing needs and advising management when insufficient clinical laboratory personnel are employed Selecting which tests the laboratory offers and which employees may perform them Establishing and maintaining a patient identification system for the laboratory Establishing and maintaining accurate billing practices

View Page
Supervisor Responsibilities

A supervisor is the laboratory director's designee for monitoring compliance with all applicable regulations of the board and the department. Other duties include: Performing the duties of a technologist, if needed, in the specialty area(s) where licensure is held Assigning direct supervision responsibilities to licensed technologists if needed, while ensuring that direct supervision of technicians is properly performed. Evaluating technologists' and technicians' competency in running tests and reporting results Being available to all personnel to answer questions and resolve problems Providing day-to-day supervision of test performance, including on-site direct supervision of testing that is performed by technicians Ensuring that quality control is performed and corrective action taken if necessary Ensuring that no patient testing is reported until corrective action has been taken and the test system is properly functioning Providing orientation to all testing personnel Implementing a quality maintenance program

View Page
Technologist Responsibilities

Technologists fulfill assigned supervisory responsibilities as needed and as authorized. Other duties include: Performing only those tests authorized by the director and for which the technologist is licensed by specialty. Following the laboratory's procedure for specimen handling, running tests, reporting results, and maintaining records Participating in proficiency testing and demonstrating that proficiency samples are tested in the same manner as patient samples Following quality control and instrument calibration policies Documenting corrective action taken when results exceed the laboratory's acceptable performance values Using professional judgment to ensure test validity, including recollecting and retesting samples that may be flawed or contaminated

View Page
Technician Responsibilities

Technicians perform laboratory testing under direct and general supervision, as required by the test and the conditions of the technician's license. Other duties include:Performing tests only as authorized by the director and the technician's licensed specialty.Following the laboratory's procedure for specimen handling and running testsParticipating in proficiency testing and demonstrating that proficiency samples are tested in the same manner as patient samplesFollowing quality control and instrument calibration policiesDocumenting corrective action taken when results exceed the laboratory's acceptable performance valuesIdentifying potential problems with tests or report resultsNotifying a technologist or supervisor if results are outside the laboratory's acceptable performance levels

View Page
Competency and Licensing Violations

Clinical laboratory personnel must be licensed and competent to perform their duties. This means holding the appropriate type of license for the task being performed (director, supervisor, technologist, or technician) and being certified in the appropriate specialty for any testing being performed. For example, an individual licensed as a technician in hematology may not perform the duties of a technologist in hematology, nor may that individual perform testing in the microbiology specialty. Showing a lack of competence to perform even licensed duties is a violation of Board rules. Consistent errors can tarnish a laboratory's reputation, and even a single error can harm patient care. Licensed personnel must be certain that they can perform their duties accurately and competently. All of the following are violations of Board rules:Performing clinical duties for which one does not hold a license.Performing services one knows one is not competent to perform.Showing lack of competence or making consistent errors in testing or reporting.Having a license revoked or suspended in another state.

View Page
Kickback and Inducement Violations

Offering or taking a bribe, kickback, bonus, commission, or inducement is against the rules of the Board and against the law. Many companies give away small promotional items, such as pens or note pads, to promote their products. This is legal, but be cautious about accepting more valuable items. This could be seen as a bribe. All of the following are serious violations of Board, state, and federal rules:Participating in any commissions, bonuses, kickbacks, inducements, or split-fee arrangements from physicians, health care providers, suppliers, hospitals, nursing homes, other clinical laboratories, pharmacies, and other facilities.Exploiting or influencing a patient for financial gain, including promoting, selling, or withholding services, drugs, or referrals.

View Page
Which of the following is NOT a responsibility of a clinical laboratory director?View Page
Which of the following is NOT a responsibility of a clinical laboratory supervisor?View Page
Which of the following are violations of Board rules?View Page
A director may only oversee one laboratory.View Page

Linear Regression Analysis

Medical Error Prevention (retired)
What does the JCAHO Speak UP campaign encourage?View Page
Which statement(s) are true?View Page
Which statement(s) describe potential causes of medical errors involving the blood bank?View Page
Which actions are sources of laboratory-related error?View Page
Which strategies help laboratory professionals prevent medical errors?View Page
The Joint Commission Sentinel Event Alert Since 1998, the Joint Commission has issued 25 Sentinel Event Alerts to the healthcare community. These publications include more than 50 evidence or expert-based recommendations for preventing adverse events. Sentinel Event Alerts address various error reduction topics: Transfusion reactions Inpatient suicide Infant abductions Wrong site surgery or other procedures Patient fallsLaboratory professionals can be involved in all of these types of Sentinel Events. The Joint Commission's first Sentinel Event Alert addressed the common practice of storing concentrated potassium chloride solutions in hospital nursing units. View Page
Direct Error Detection Even perfect systems designs cannot avert human limitations. Medical errors occur and they have to be detected before they can be resolved. Sometimes people directly observe and immediately report these mistakes.View Page
Awareness

Laboratory professionals can learn about medical errors and prevention by maintaining their awareness of laboratory-related news and events. They can read print and online news sources, magazines, and professional journals to stay informed. They can also learn what is happening through televised and other media reports. Staying up to date about current trends and progress in error prevention enables professional to learn from mistakes and prevent new ones.

View Page
Study

The Internet provides extensive, current resources for studying ways to prevent errors. Performing word searches for Medical Errors or Patient Safety or Laboratory Errors identifies a wealth of Internet resources. A Patient Safety search lists more than 93 million items.

View Page
Discussion

Laboratory discussion meetings help to prevent medical errors. The staff can meet periodically to discuss recent averted adverse events and ones that might have been averted.Discussion should not be about blame. Privacy must be protected, so real names should not be identified. Management can provide guidelines for discussion and analysis.A suggested format for discussion:1. Briefly describe each adverse event.2. Identify its possible causes.3. Discuss relevant guidelines.4. Suggest possible preventive actions.Discussion can include actions that do and do not work to prevent medical errors.

View Page
These statements describe ways laboratory professionals can prevent medical errors.View Page
Joint Commission Patient Safety Goals Joint Commission adopted national patient safety goals for healthcare organizations, including specific goals for laboratories. 2009 Laboratory Services National Patient Safety Goals These goals are directly quoted.View Page
American Society for Clinical Laboratory ScienceThe American Society for Clinical Laboratory Science, ASCLS, joins the leadership effort to prevent medical errors and increase patient safety.View Page
Types of Medical Errors Medical errors usually belong to one or more of these categories:View Page
Where Errors Occur

Insurance industry analysis of data from 1985 through 2003 shows that about two thirds of medical errors occur in hospitals and about one third occur in physician offices. About half of hospital errors occur in operating rooms and one sixth occur in patient rooms. Wherever medical errors occur, laboratory professionals can be involved.

View Page
Preanalytic Medical Errors

Medical errors are possible at any phase of patient care. Preanalytic medical errors begin with the patient and the places he or she receives medical care--the bedside, chair-side, hospital, clinic-- wherever the patient is located. The possibility for these errors continues through the ordering processes for medical tests or procedures. Preanalytic medical errors also happen with the systems, processes, and procedures involved in the collection of test samples from patients. These medical errors occur during the time before the laboratory is directly involved in assaying and analyzing test samples. Examples of preanalytic medical errors: Wrong patient Wrong test Wrong timing Wrong collection procedure Wrong tube, container, additive

View Page
Analytic Medical Errors

Medical errors also occur in the analytic processes and systems of patient care. Analytic errors begin with problems in the transportation of medical samples for testing. These occur between the patient's location and the testing facility. They happen during the time between specimen collection and arrival in the testing facility. The possibility for analytic medical error continues through the analytic processes and procedures of medical testing. Analytic medical error also includes systems, processes, and procedures involved in the transmission and reporting of test results. These medical errors occur during the time the laboratory is directly involved in receiving, analyzing, and reporting test samples. Examples: Wrong transport storage or temperature Delay in transport Sample mixup during transport Acceptance of unacceptable samples that are insufficient, hemolyzed, or clotted Centrifugation, mixing, and other test sample preparation errors Wrong test procedures Test control errors Sample mixup during testing Outdated reagents Wrong reagents Test result mixup Transcription errors Data reporting process errors Result report delays

View Page
Postanalytic Medical Errors

Errors also occur after analyses are completed and reported. Postanalytic errors begin with the medical professionals who receive test results, and they include interpretation of the results. These errors can occur at--the bedside, chair-side, hospital, clinic-- wherever the patient and the medical professional are located. The possibility for postanalytic medical error continues through diagnosis and treatment procedures and processes. These medical errors occur during the time after the laboratory reports test results. Examples: Wrong test value associated with patient Wrong test interpretation Wrong diagnosis Wrong treatmentLaboratory professionals might believe they are not associated with postanalytic medical errors, but they can be. One deadly example is fatal hemolytic transfusion reaction involving laboratory error.

View Page
Bleeding After a Venipuncture Can Be an Adverse Event

Excessive bleeding after a venipuncture can occur as a preventable or an unpreventable adverse event. Laboratory professionals might or might not have control over this situation because of the factors involved. For example: Bleeding due to failure to apply immediately pressure on the venipuncture site is a preventable adverse event. Bleeding due to later injury to the venipuncture site is an unpreventable event. Circumstances that cause the bleeding determine whether it is a preventable or unpreventable adverse event.

View Page
Sources of Laboratory-Related ErrorsView Page
Human Nature and Error Prevention

The 2000 Institute of Medicine (IOM) report states, "It may be part of human nature to err, but it is also part of human nature to create solutions, find better alternatives, and meet the challenges ahead." Everyone should use these positive aspects of human nature to prevent medical errors. Laboratory professionals can do their part by understanding the nature and causes of medical errors and ways to prevent them. They can also benefit by guidance from many clinical, regulatory, and Internet resources that aim to prevent medical errors.

View Page

Medicare Compliance for Clinical Laboratories
Laboratory Administration's Responsibilities

Laboratory administration has these responsibilities: Communicate compliance policies, procedures, standards of conduct to all employees and the consequences of non-compliance. Act on reported problems and suspect activities. Resolve problems and ensure they don't recur. Take appropriate and fair disciplinary actions against all involved. Report to the appropriate government agency when necessary. Promptly return money received from the government to which the laboratory is not entitled. Audit the laboratory's policies and procedures to ensure they are being followed and that they work.

View Page
Employee's Responsibility

Compliance is EVERY employee's responsibility regardless of status or position in the company. All employees are subject to disciplinary action if they violate compliance policies or laws. Employees must understand their responsibility to report any problems or suspect activity they encounter in the laboratory. Employees will not be disciplined for reporting problems. Employees should use the Hotline or other established anonymous reporting system if they are afraid of retribution.

View Page
What is a voluntary compliance program?

All health care providers, including laboratories, could potentially submit erroneous claims for Medicare reimbursement. These billing errors can trigger an investigation. The creation of a voluntary compliance program, using the guidelines provided by the Office of Inspector General (OIG), can assist health care institutions and laboratories to audit themselves, thereby preventing submission of erroneous claims and a possible fraud and abuse investigation.

View Page
Element 7

The laboratory has a duty to respond to problems it detects either through its auditing or monitoring system or as reported by employees. It is required to take corrective action and review policies and procedures to ensure the problem does not occur again. It is required to discipline or retrain employees if necessary. The laboratory will report problems to appropriate government agencies and return any money to which it is not entitled.

View Page
Element 1

The laboratory has written and distributed to all affected employees, standards, policies, and procedures that instruct employees in the proper legal and ethical conduct expected in all areas of business the laboratory conducts. These policies must be adhered to by all employees regardless of status or position in the company.

View Page
Element 2

The laboratory has appointed a Compliance Officer (CO) and a Compliance Committee to serve as the focal point for all compliance activities and decision making. The CO and any member of the compliance committee is accessible to all employees in the laboratory.

View Page
Element 3

The laboratory has established a comprehensive training and education program about the laws and regulations that govern the laboratory and the standards, policies and procedures of the compliance program. Mandatory for all employees regardless of status or position in the company. There is additional training for those employees who work in higher compliance risk areas of the laboratory such as billing, marketing, and sales. This interactive software is a component of that training program.

View Page
Element 4

The laboratory has established a system of communication so that employees can, and are encouraged to, report problems and suspect activities they might observe or discover, without fear of retribution, including an anonymous option. The anonymous system instructions are posted throughout the laboratory.

View Page
Element 6

The laboratory monitors and regularly audits compliance activities, policies, and procedures to ensure they are being followed. If a problem is detected through the audit or monitoring process, it should be reported to the appropriate supervisor, manager, or the CO.

View Page
Test Requisitions

Requisitions must be designed to ensure that ordering physicians can choose tests that are medically necessary for their patients. Requisitions should contain reminders about Medicare rules of medical necessity and list the contents of panels and profiles. Requisitions must provide a place for the physician to include diagnosis (ICD9-CM) codes. Physicians should be encouraged to use only the requisitions supplied by the laboratory to order tests.

View Page
Issues Related to Test Ordering, Performance, and Resulting

The laboratory can only perform tests that are ordered by individuals authorized to order tests. If an employee knows that a test has been ordered by someone other then an authorized individual, the employee should report it to their supervisor or the compliance officer (CO). The laboratory must have a system in place to detect tests that are not performed due to a laboratory error and stop or credit the billing for these tests. The laboratory cannot bill for tests that are not performed. An employee who is aware that a test has been canceled or has not been performed for some reason must follow the policies and procedures associated with correcting the billing. Release of test results Laboratory employees should release test results only to a person who is authorized to receive the test results. The Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments (CLIA) define an authorized person as: "an individual authorized under State law to order tests or receive test results, or both." Patients may be considered "authorized persons," if State law defines them as such. Refer to your own State laws regarding release of laboratory results directly to patients.

View Page
Ambiguous or Unclear Test Orders

When the orders for a test are not absolutely clear, the laboratory must contact the ordering physician to clarify the orders before performing and billing for the test. Do not attempt to guess what the order is. The laboratory cannot perform and bill for tests that are not specifically ordered. The laboratory cannot change a physician order without contacting the physician. In any case where specimen integrity or patient care will be compromised by a delay in testing, follow the policies the laboratory has established for such cases.

View Page
Panels and Profiles

Panels and Profiles: It is not against the law for a laboratory to allow the use of panels, profiles, and custom panels. However, all applicable CPT codes must be included. The laboratory must ensure that the ordering doctor knows what tests are included in a panel or profile and what CPT codes will be billed to the Medicare program. The laboratory notifies doctors about panels and profiles through a written notice and the requisition. Employees should not permit the order of any panel or profile not authorized by the laboratory.

View Page
Physician Notices and Acknowledgements

Notices must be sent annually by the laboratory to its customers (physicians). Notices remind physicians about Medicare rules and regulations. Notices include summaries of laboratory test ordering policies, requisition use, CPT coding and ICD coding. Physician acknowledgements must be signed by any physician who wants to create a custom panel, profile or reflex test. This is the only way a special panel or profile may be performed by the laboratory. The physician must order tests individually when there is no physician acknowledgement signed. The laboratory must renew physician acknowledgements at least annually.

View Page
Excused Charges and Other Inducements

The laboratory should not offer or provide free testing to any individual in a position to make or control referral for laboratory services: The laboratory may write off charges only when laboratory errors in billing or testing occur. Sales and marketing personnel cannot offer free testing in any form unless approved by the compliance officer. Free testing for indigent patients must be approved by the Compliance Officer. Sales and marketing personnel cannot offer or give anything of value to a customer or potential customer beyond the usual promotional items. If a client solicits special consideration, it should be reported to the sales manager or compliance officer.

View Page
Test Pricing and Antitrust

It is not against the law for a laboratory to have different fee schedules for different billing situations.Most laboratories have one fee schedule for customers that must be billed individually (patients, insurance, Medicare) and one for customers billed monthly on an invoice type of statement (client or doctor billing).The difference in price between the two schedules should be a reflection of the financial benefits of direct client billing.Test prices should be determined by means of a financial analysis that include such factors as cost, market value and reasonable profit.Contractually arranged pricing that results from negotiations with insurance and managed care companies should at least cover costs of testing.Laboratories may not work together to fix or set prices in the market place.

View Page
Client Contracts

A laboratory that receives referrals from a nursing home or skilled nursing facility (SNF) should have a written agreement with that facility: The agreement should define billing and documentation responsibilities. The facility should be responsible for determining the payment status of its patients and is liable for submitting incorrect payment information to the laboratory. Fees should be consistent with other similar customers. A laboratory that provides services to a home health agency treating Medicare/Medicaid beneficiaries should have a written agreement with that agency: The agreement should define billing and documentation responsibilities. The agreement should place the responsibility on the home health agency to establish that all patients receiving laboratory services are "homebound" as defined by Medicare. Fees should be consistent with other similar customers.

View Page
Case Study 9

The setting is a nursing home where a phlebotomist from the laboratory goes to draw blood samples each day. The phlebotomist picks up the requisitions for blood tests at the nursing station and then goes to the various rooms to draw blood from the patients. She notices that every requisition has an Advanced Beneficiary Notice (ABN) attached to it that is signed by the patient, even when the tests that were ordered don't need them. She asks the nurse at the station but she informs the phlebotomist that she doesn't know anything about it because it is done on the night shift.She lets the phlebotomist know that she will inform the nursing supervisor about it when she arrives at 9:00 AM. The phlebotomist completes her blood draws and returns to the laboratory. What should the phlebotomist do, if anything, in addition to her letting the nurse know about the problem?Correct Answer: The phlebotomist should report the incident to her supervisor upon returning to the laboratory.Discussion: Since the laboratory is submitting the claims for any Medicare patients that the phlebotomist might draw, the problem is the lab's problem. However, it is not going to change the fact that the ABNs were already signed by the patients if the phlebotomist refuses to draw them or if the nursing personnel are required to remove them. By contacting the supervisor, an appropriate representative from the laboratory can follow up with the nursing supervisor to ensure they understand the laws and regulations that govern ABNs.

View Page
Case Study 7

The setting is the cafeteria in a hospital or the lounge in an independent laboratory. Two employees, a billing clerk and a medical technologist, from different departments are having lunch together. The billing clerk mentions that she saw a bill go through the system for one of her coworkers for a biopsy. She asks the medical technologist if she has the necessary security level access to see pathology test results because she is concerned about the welfare of the coworker. The medical technologist does have the necessary security clearance to see the results. She should:Correct Answer: Refuse to look up the results for the clerk and remind the clerk that it is a violation of compliance policies to do so, or to ask another to do so. Discussion: The medical technologist has a responsibility to report violations of compliance policies and the friend has put her in a difficult position. For that reason, it is not enough to just refuse the clerk's request. If the medical technologist does not take the responsibility to inform the employee of the policy then there is a possibility that the employee would ask some other employee to do it for her.

View Page
Case Study 8

The setting is a billing office in a laboratory where clerks work in close proximity to each other, so that each can easily see what the other is doing. A billing clerk notices that one of his fellow employees is changing or adding codes to requisitions he is processing. This employee is a friend of his and he knows that he really needs the job at the laboratory because he is a single parent raising two kids. He also knows that what the employee is doing is against the company's compliance policies.He asks the employee about it and is given the explanation that because the computer requires something to be entered in the ICD-9 code field and he only does this with non-Medicare patients, it doesn't matter. The employee explains that it gives him more time to call for codes for the Medicare patients. What should this clerk do about this situation?Correct Answer: He should talk to the supervisor about the problem even if he talks to his fellow employee about it and the employee says he will stop doing it.Discussion: Every employee who becomes aware of a violation of the law or a compliance policy has a responsibility to take action, which includes reporting the problem to a supervisor or the compliance officer. It doesn't matter that these patients are not Medicare patients, the important thing is that the employee is violating a compliance policy. If this employee does not report the problem he is himself violating a compliance policy. If it is subsequently discovered that he knew and didn't report it, he could be terminated. The employee's addition of the codes could create a big problem for the lab iif an audit or inspection occurred.

View Page
Case Study 5

The Client Services department is a crowded room divided into cubicles which contain desks separated only by thin moveable dividers. Lots of activity is present including phones ringing, multiple conversations going on at once, etc. A client service representative receives a call from a large client office that she speaks with every day for a variety of reasons. Today the client is requesting the laboratory to write off the charges for a test that the office person ordered by mistake, even though the laboratory has already done the test and reported the results back to the office. Since this service representative works with this office frequently, she believes that this is a rare request. Actions that the client service representative may take are:Correct Answers: Refuse to write off the charges for the test and inform the client that it could be considered an inducement if the laboratory does that, which would make both the laboratory and the office liable should it ever come to light. Offer whatever billing options are available according to lab policies. or Refuse to write off the charges and explain to the client that approval must be obtained from the department manager or the laboratory compliance officer before any action can be taken because writing the test off could be considered an inducement.Discussion: Tests should never be written off by the laboratory automatically. There should always be an approval process involved or a policy that strictly forbids any write off except in the case of an error on the part of the laboratory where documentation exists to support it.

View Page
Case Study 6

The setting is a large outreach or independent laboratory that processes a high volume of tests with tight resources and a lot of customer service turn around time deadlines to meet that are dependent on the specimen processing department to complete their work on time. The manager of the specimen processing department receives a memorandum from the compliance officer (CO) that several of his employees have not attended their compliance training sessions.Since this is the initial training for the laboratory, the CO reminds the manager of the requirement that all employees attend. The employees listed in the memo are key employees who are top performers in the department. The manager knows that they have been instructed to attend, and that attendance is mandatory, but the manager had left it up to the employees to choose the session they would attend. When questioned about their non-attendance, all of the individuals said they were too busy to attend and it was a matter of going to the classes or getting the work done. What action should the manager take in this situation?Correct Answer: In consideration of the fact that these are the initial training sessions, sit down with each of the affected employees and very specifically tell them that the classes are mandatory and that they must attend under penalty of disciplinary action.Discussion: The manager knows that the compliance policy is mandatory attendance for these training sessions and informed these employees of that fact. The manager may take into account the fact that these employees have not received the training and therefore may not understand the implications of not attending, but some appropriate discipline should be taken. The manager should also give some consideration to the mentality that caused these employees to skip the training in the first place even after being instructed to attend. This same reasoning that "the work must get done", is a common cause of compliance problems.

View Page
Case Study 2

A courier is making a routine stop in a client's office and is approached by the office manager with whom he is very friendly because he has been going to this office for years. The office manager asks the courier if Dr. John Smith is a regular stop on his route and the courier answers yes. She then asks the courier if he would do her a little favor since he stops at Dr Smiths office regularly anyway and drop off an x-ray for her so she won't have to call a courier service. The courier knows that this is a big account for the laboratory and customer service is a high priority for the laboratory. This courier should:Correct Answer: Refuse to do it for the customer and explain to the customer that the laboratory has a policy that says he must only provide courier services related to laboratory.Discussion: Even though this is a single incident, by doing this favor the courier is giving the office manager license to ask these kinds of favors in the future. Since the provision of this free courier service is a form of inducement or kickback to the client, both the client and the laboratory would be involved if the such a practice were to go on regularly and be discovered by the government or by the laboratory. Hiding the incident and asking the office manager to conspire with him to do this will only make it worse for the employee and would lead to serious disciplinary action up to termination.

View Page
Case Study 3

It is 11:00 PM and the specimen processing department is finishing up the night's accessioning and test order entry. A specimen processor is working on a requisition that has an order for a Hepatic Profile but there are two tubes of blood with the order, one of which is a lavender top tube. This is the fourth requisition from this same doctor's office and all of them have had a lavender top tube and serum tube with an order for a chemistry test and a CBC. No CBC is marked on the requisition or written on the tube. The specimen processor figures the office just forgot to mark the test and knows that the results will be delayed and the sample might not be any good if he doesn't order the CBC now. He is also under pressure from the technical departments to finish processing on time so they can get their work done on time for result printing in the morning. What should the processor do?Correct Answer: Look up the laboratory's policy for handling such a situation and follow the policy.Discussion: The laboratory is not permitted to change a doctor's order in any way. By ordering the CBC the processor is ordering a test that the doctor did not specifically order and therefore makes the laboratory subject to a violation of the False Claims Act. By reviewing and following the laboratory policy the processor assures that the laboratory, the physician and the patient's best interests are met.

View Page
Case Study 4

A busy laboratory is located in a 350 bed urban hospital that provides laboratory testing for the hospital and for the hospital's outreach testing program. A medical technologist in the microbiology department receives a call from a friend who works in a laboratory in a physician office. The physician is not a regular client of the laboratory currently but uses another laboratory for most of their work. The microbiologist knows that the sales department would like to get this account. The friend explains to her that she is doing a quality control check on her in-office microbiology testing and her regular laboratory will do it but is going to charge her for it. She asks the microbiologist if she will do it for free since it is quality control, not Medicare, and is not going to be billed to anyone.She tells the microbiologist that she would like to use the hospital lab for everything but her doctor insists on using the competitor. She indicates that the favor might help get the doctor to try the hospital laboratory for other tests. How should the microbiologist respond to this request?Correct Answer: Explain to her friend that if the hospital does the tests for no charge on the promise of other referrals, both the physician office and the hospital could be liable for violations of the antikickback statute.Discussion: The antikickback statute is implicated in this scenario because the free testing is solicited on the condition that other referrals may occur as a result of providing the favor. In fact, the solicitation itself is a violation of the law. The fact that Medicare patients are not specifically mentioned in the scenario is not sufficient to remove the risk. The technologist should also report the incident to the Compliance Officer and seek advise about what documentation, if any, should be kept concerning the incident.

View Page
Case Study 1

A billing clerk is entering billing demographics on requisitions as a part of the normal days work. The department is under pressure to reduce accounts receivable, which means that the more clean claims that are filed, the better. This particular requisition is for a Medicare patient and has an LMRP test but does not have a diagnosis on it. She remembers that just a few requisitions before this one she had a requisition from the same doctor that had this same test on it that did have a diagnosis that allowed the test to be billed. She thumbs back in the pile and finds the previous requisition, notes the code that was used and adds it to the current requisition. This will help her meet the department goal of getting claims paid and reducing accounts receivable. Can she do this?Correct Answer: She should not do this because it is against the law to change diagnosis information on a requisition.Discussion: A laboratory employee should never change, add or use previously received diagnosis information for the purpose of making a test billable for the Medicare program or for any other insurance or payer. This is a form of fraud and for each claim submitted as a result of this activity, the laboratory is liable for a false claim and would have to pay the government back up to three times the reimbursement for the test and up to $10,000 for each claim submitted. If the employee is caught doing this, even if the employee is ignorant of the law and any laboratory policy prohibiting it, she must be disciplined along with her supervisor. Any employee who notices another employee doing this should correct the employee and report the incident to the department supervisor immediately.

View Page
Advance Beneficiary Notice (ABN)

An Advance Beneficiary Notice (ABN) is given to a Medicare beneficiary to inform him/her (or that person's representative) that Medicare may not provide coverage in a specific case (e.g., for a specific laboratory test). Entities who issue ABNs are known as "notifiers." "Notifiers" can include physicians, practitioners, laboratories, and other suppliers of services that are paid under Medicare Part B. The "notifier" (e.g., the laboratory) must complete the ABN and deliver the notice to the affected beneficiary or his/her representative before providing the items or services that are the subject of the notice. The ABN must be verbally reviewed with the beneficiary or his/her representative and any questions raised during that review must be answered before it is signed. The ABN must be delivered far enough in advance that the beneficiary or representative has time to consider the options and make an informed choice. Once all blanks are completed and the form is signed, a copy is given to the beneficiary or representative. In all cases, the notifier must retain the original notice on file. Note: ABNs are never required in emergency or urgent care situations.

View Page
Changes to ABN, Effective March 1, 2009

Beginning March 1, 2009, providers (including independent laboratories), physicians, practitioners, and suppliers are required to use a newly revised ABN form --Form CMS-R-131-- for all situations where Medicare payment is expected to be denied. The revised ABN replaces the existing General Use ABN, ABN-G (Form CMS-R-131G), and the Laboratory ABN, ABN-L (Form CMS-R-131L), and NEMB (Form CMS-20007). An example of the new form is included on this page as a resource. The revised form will continue to be used for notifying beneficiaries of Medicare denial reasons, but it may also be used to provide voluntary notification of financial liability. The revised ABN still permits pre-printing of lab-specific key information (blanks A - D) and still permits the use of the same denial reasons that were used with the former ABN-L (Blank E). Three commonly used reasons for noncoverage are: Medicare does not pay for this test for your condition. Medicare does not pay for this test as often as this (denied as too frequent). Medicare does not pay for experimental or research use tests. There must be at least one reason applicable to each item or service listed in Blank (D). The same reason for noncoverage may be applied to multiple items in Blank (D).

View Page
HCPCS and CPT Coding

The Healthcare Common Procedure Coding System (HCPCS) and the Current Procedural Terminology (CPT) codes are used to describe specific tests or services. The amount of payment for a test is dependent on the HCPCS or CPT code. HCPCS or CPT codes should be assigned under the supervision of the laboratory technical staff. Billing department employees should never change a HCPCS or CPT code without the approval of a manager or compliance officer. If a billing department clerk notices that a particular HCPCS or CPT code is being rejected by a payer they should report it to their manager. It is against the law to use the wrong HCPCS or CPT code for the purpose of causing or increasing payment for a test.

View Page
ICD-9CM Coding

ICD-9CM (International Classification of Disease, 9th Edition, Clinical Modification) codes are used for the classification of diseases and conditions, and for describing signs, symptoms and medical circumstances. These codes are used to indicate the medical necessity of a particular test. All employees who are directly or indirectly responsible for reporting to Medicare must be aware of these guidelines to prevent fraudulent claims:ICD-9 codes can only be supplied by the ordering physician or a representative of that physician. ICD-9 codes cannot be used from a previous laboratory order. If a physician supplies a narrative description instead of an ICD-9 code the laboratory must accurately translate that code using only certified coders. It is against the law to use the wrong ICD-9 code for the purpose of causing or increasing payment for a test.

View Page
Local medical review policies (LMRPs)

Local Medical Review Policies (LMRPs) are published by Medicare for some laboratory tests. They are usually developed for tests that can be used for screening or diagnosis of disease. LMRPs use CPT codes to identify the tests and ICD-9 codes to determine when coverage is allowed. If an LMRP test is ordered by a physician, an ICD-9 code that is included in the LMRP must be given to the laboratory or the Medicare program will not pay for the test. It is against the law for a laboratory to change or add an ICD-9 code submitted by a physician. A laboratory should not submit a claim for an LMRP test that is not accompanied by an acceptable ICD-9 code. The Balanced Budget Act of 1997 made it illegal for physicians to order LMRP tests and not supply an ICD-9CM code with the order.

View Page
Medical Necessity

The Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services (CMS), the US agency that administers the Medicare program, defines "medical necessity" as services or items reasonable and necessary for the diagnosis or treatment of illness or injury or to improve the functioning of a malformed body member. Medicare will not pay for any tests that CMS determines as unnecessary for diagnosis or treatment of disease.A laboratory may not submit a claim to Medicare or other government payers for any test it suspects is not medically necessary unless: The patient has signed an Advanced Beneficiary Notice (ABN), or A patient has requested the lab to submit such a claim for a determination by Medicare. Medicare does not pay for screening tests or tests that are ordered in the absence of signs or symptoms. Billing department employees are responsible for following all policies and procedures related to the submission of claims to reduce erroneous billings.

View Page
Confidentiality

All employees have a responsibility to maintain the confidentiality of medical information. Medical information should never be discussed outside of the laboratory. Do not leave test orders or test results in areas where they can be viewed by patients. Do not discuss test results or any patient information in areas where patients can overhear the conversation. Be careful not to discuss confidential information on the telephone where patients can overhear the conversation. Employees should verify the identity of an individual requesting patient information.

View Page
Inducements

It is against the law to offer or ask for money or favors to get a physician to order tests from a laboratory. This is known as an "inducement" or a "kickback." Laboratories should only give supplies to a physician for the drawing, processing, storing, or transporting of specimens to the laboratory. The laboratory cannot provide supplies physicians use for their own purposes. The laboratory must monitor the amount of supplies provided to ensure that it matches the number of tests sent to the laboratory. The laboratory cannot give free tests except in the event of laboratory error. The laboratory cannot give free education to clients unless it is about the laboratory's services or policies. The laboratory cannot give excessive or expensive gifts or entertainment to physicians. The laboratory can give discounts, but the price must be above cost and at "fair market value."

View Page
Phlebotomists and Equipment in Client Offices

Laboratories may place phlebotomists or other employees in a physician office if all of the following are done: Employee only performs laboratory related tasks. There is a written understanding given to the physician about what the employee can and cannot do. Periodic audits are done to ensure the employee is following these policies. Laboratories may place printers, computers, fax machines or other equipment or products in client offices as long as they ensure that: The physician understands the equipment belongs to the laboratory. It is used for laboratory purposes like receiving reports or ordering tests. Periodic audits are done to ensure that the client is using the equipment only for laboratory related activities.

View Page
Couriers and Referral Tests

The laboratory's couriers may not transport items except those related to the testing services offered by the laboratory. Couriers must follow all OSHA standards for the handling and transport of specimens. The laboratory is responsible for all tests it refers to other laboratories. Laboratory should not change CPT codes supplied by a reference laboratory without contacting the reference laboratory. The laboratory is responsible for all tests it bills to Medicare/Medicaid even if the test was performed by a reference laboratory.

View Page
Marketing and Record Retention

The laboratory must ensure that its sales and marketing materials are clear and not deceptive: They should fully inform the physician about the appropriate use of laboratory tests and services. They should not be designed to induce unnecessary testing. The laboratory must have in place a document control system and record retention policy that ensures records are accessible in case of an audit or investigation. Records should be retrievable. Related documents should be linked.

View Page
Utilization and Other Regulations

Laboratories must not induce physicians to order unnecessary tests through their marketing or education activities: They must monitor the use of laboratory services by their clients. They must correct any situation where something they did caused an unnecessary increase in test utilization. Cost Reports Hospital laboratories must ensure that information used in hospital Medicare cost reports is accurate and includes only those costs which are appropriate. Laboratories must follow all CLIA and OSHA regulations: failure to do so may result in a False Claims Act violation.

View Page
Billing

Billing is the highest risk area for the laboratory because it generates the claims that are sent to Medicare and other government payers. Payment and payment errors are the focus of the OIG compliance guidance for the laboratory because of the revenue involved. Fraud and abuse is often perpetrated as a billing scheme. Nearly all laboratory functions can affect the billing of laboratory tests.

View Page
Laboratory Billing Department Communication With Physicians and Patients

It is important that billing department employees are clear and accurate when communicating with physician office personnel and patients. Never guess at the answer to a question; ask if you are unsure. Do not speculate or express personal opinions. When requesting diagnosis information from the physician office staff, be careful to not lead them to give a billable code. The code must come from the patient's medical record. Billing department employees must accurately state laboratory policies and procedures, or forward the call to a supervisor to avoid misstatements and misunderstandings.

View Page
Advance Beneficiary Notices (ABNs) and the Billing Department

A laboratory may not bill a Medicare beneficiary for a test unless it notifies the patient in writing before the testing is done that Medicare is not going to pay for the test. This notice is called an ABN. The ABN must contain the specific name of the test and give a specific reason the laboratory thinks payment for the test will be denied. The beneficiary should sign the ABN and a copy should be sent to the laboratory and one given to the beneficiary. The billing department must have evidence that the ABN has been signed before it bills a patient. A laboratory may bill Medicare even though it knows it will not be paid when it has evidence an ABN has been signed.

View Page

Medicare Compliance for Clinical Laboratories (retired)
Introduction

The government believes that fraud, abuse and waste exist in the healthcare industry today because of cases it has settled and prosecuted.All healthcare providers, including laboratories, make billing errors.The Office of Inspector General (OIG) believes that honest members of the healthcare community can police themselves if they receive guidance.The OIG has published Compliance Program Guidance documents for health care providers, including laboratories.

View Page
What is a voluntary compliance program?

A voluntary compliance program is created by a laboratory based on the OIG's published guidance.It will reduce or eliminate improper billings to Medicare and prevent criminal activities within its company.If a laboratory develops and implements an effective compliance program, it will receive special consideration should a problem arise involving a government investigation.

View Page
Element 7

Element 7: The laboratory has a duty to respond to problems it detects either through its auditing or monitoring system or as reported by employees.It is required to take corrective action and review policies and procedures to ensure the problem does not occur again.It is required to discipline or retrain employees if necessary.The laboratory will report problems to appropriate government agencies and return any money to which it is not entitled.

View Page
Element 1

An effective compliance program includes seven basic elements.Element 1: The laboratory has written and distributed to all affected employees standards, policies and procedures that instruct employees in the proper legal and ethical conduct expected in all areas of business the laboratory conducts.These policies must be adhered to by all employees regardless of status or position in the company.

View Page
Element 2

Element 2: The laboratory has appointed a Compliance Officer (CO) and a Compliance Committee to serve as the focal point for all compliance activities and decision making.The CO and any member of the compliance committee is accessible to all employees in the laboratory.

View Page
Element 3

The laboratory has established a comprehensive training and education program about the laws and regulations that govern the laboratory and the standards, policies and procedures of the compliance program. Mandatory for all employees regardless of status or position in the company. There is additional training for those employees who work in higher compliance risk areas of the laboratory such as billing, marketing, and sales. This interactive software is a component of that training program.

View Page
Element 4

Element 4: The laboratory has established a system of communication so that employees can and are encouraged to report problems and suspect activities they might observe or discover, without fear of retribution, including an anonymous option.The anonymous system instructions are posted throughout the laboratory.

View Page
Element 6

Element 6: The laboratory monitors and regularly audits compliance activities, policies and procedures to ensure they are being followed.If a problem is detected through the audit or monitoring process, it should be reported to the appropriate supervisor, manager or the CO.

View Page
Laws and regulations that govern laboratories

Social Security Act: Medicare and Medicaid laws are in this act. Medicare rules and regulations come under this act. Antikickback laws: Provide criminal penalties for individuals or entities that knowingly and willfully offer, pay, solicit or receive money or favors for referrals of tests or services that will be paid for by the Medicare or Medicaid programs. False Claims Act: Provides criminal penalties for knowingly or willingly filing a false claim to a government program. Self Referral (Stark) laws and regulations: Identify financial relationships that have the potential to result in directed referral to one or both of the individuals or entities involved. Prohibit the referral of patients or tests between related entities unless certain conditions are met. Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) Prohibits health care providers and payers from improper or inappropriate use of a patient's confidential health information Requires health care providers to insure that a patient's confidential information is kept secure Provides for standardized electronic formats for all health care transactions

View Page
Risk areas

The government identifies laboratory activities it considers high risk areas for compliance problems.This compliance program focuses on these areas.Training and education for employees lists and explains each of these risk areas.

View Page
Billing and medical necessity

Billing: Highest risk activity a laboratory has. All laboratory activities contribute to the billing process. Many of the risk areas included in this program are components of the billing function. Medical necessity: Medicare is only allowed, by law, to pay for tests that are reasonable and necessary for the diagnosis and treatment of disease. Medical necessity is an underlying principle of the Medicare program. Tests performed for screening or routine exams are not considered medically necessary by the Medicare program.

View Page
Medical coverage policies (LMRPs)

LMRPs (Local Medical Review Policies) are published by Medicare for some laboratory tests. Developed for tests that can be used for screening or diagnosis of disease. CPT codes describe laboratory tests and ICD-9CM codes determine when coverage is allowed. If an LMRP test is ordered by a physician, an ICD-9CM code that is included in the LMRP must be given to the laboratory or the Medicare program will not pay for the test. It is against the law for laboratory to change or add an ICD-9 code submitted by a physician. The Balanced Budget Act of 1997 made it illegal for physicians to order LMRP tests and not supply an ICD-9CM code with the order.

View Page
Advance Beneficiary Notices (ABNs)

Advance Beneficiary Notices (ABNs) allow laboratories to bill Medicare patients directly for specific tests that are not covered by Medicare. A laboratory cannot bill a Medicare Beneficiary for a laboratory test unless it notifies the patient in writing that Medicare is not going to pay for the test. This notice is called an ABN. The beneficiary can choose not have the test performed if they do not want to pay for it. Laboratories cannot make all Medicare beneficiaries sign ABNs. The ABN must contain the specific name of the test. The ABN must give a specific reason the laboratory thinks payment for the test will be denied. The beneficiary should sign the ABN and be given a copy.

View Page
Confidentiality

All employees have a responsibility to maintain the confidentiality of medical information. Medical information should never be discussed outside of the laboratory. It should only be discussed with the ordering doctor or an authorized representative of the doctor. Employees should verify the identity of the individual requesting such information Employees who communicate with patients, physicians or their office staff, insurance company representatives or government employees about any laboratory activity should only give information they know to be true and accurate. Employees should never give false information and should never guess the answer to any question. In case of doubt, refer the person to a supervisor.

View Page
Requisitions and ambiguous orders

Requisitions must be designed to ensure that ordering physicians can choose tests that are medically necessary for their patients. Requisitions should contain reminders about Medicare rules of medical necessity and list the contents of panels and profiles. Requisitions must provide a place for the physician to include diagnosis (ICD9-CM) codes. Physicians should be encouraged to use only the requisitions supplied by the laboratory to order tests. Ambiguous or unclear test orders When the orders for a test are not absolutely clear, the laboratory must contact the ordering physician to clarify the orders before performing and billing for the test. The laboratory cannot guess at the order. The laboratory cannot perform and bill for tests that are not specifically ordered. The laboratory cannot change a physician order without contacting the physician. In any case where specimen integrity or patient care will be compromised by a delay in testing follow the policies the laboratory has established for such cases.

View Page
Tests performed and ordered correctly

The laboratory has a system in place to detect tests that are not performed due to a laboratory error and stop or credit the billing for these tests. The laboratory cannot bill for tests that are not performed. Employee aware of a test being canceled or not being performed for some reason must follow the policies and procedures associated with correcting the billing. The laboratory only performs tests that are ordered by individuals authorized to order tests. If an employee knows that a test has been ordered by someone other then an authorized individual, the employee should report it to their supervisor or the CO.

View Page
Panels and profiles

Panels and Profiles: It is not against the law for a laboratory to allow the use of panels, profiles and custom panels. The laboratory must ensure that the ordering doctor knows what tests are included in a panel or profile and what CPT codes will be billed to the Medicare program. The laboratory notifies doctors about panels and profiles through a written notice and the requisition. Employees should not permit the order of any panel or profile not authorized by the laboratory.

View Page
Physician notices and acknowledgements

Notices to physicians must be sent by the laboratory to its customers once each year. Notices remind physicians about Medicare rules and regulations. Notices include summaries of laboratory test ordering policies, requisition use, CPT coding and ICD coding. Physician acknowledgements must be signed by any physician who wants to create a custom panel, profile or reflex test. This is the only way a special panel or profile may be performed by the laboratory. The physician must order tests individually when there is no physician acknowledgement signed. The laboratory must renew physician acknowledgements at least annually.

View Page
Inducements

It is against the law to offer or ask for money or favors to get a physician to order tests from a laboratory. This is known as an "inducement" or a "kickback." Laboratories should only give supplies to a physician for the drawing, processing, storing or transporting of specimens to the laboratory. The laboratory cannot provide supplies physicians use for their own purposes. The laboratory must monitor the amount of supplies provided to ensure that it matches the number of tests sent to the laboratory. The lab cannot give free tests except in the event of laboratory error. The lab cannot give free education to clients unless it is about the laboratory's services or policies. The lab cannot give excessive or expensive gifts or entertainment to physicians The lab can give discounts but the price must be above cost and at "fair market value."

View Page
Phlebotomists and equipment in client offices

Laboratories may place phlebotomists or other employees in a physician office if all of the following are done: Employee only performs laboratory related tasks. There is a written understanding given to the physician about what the employee can and cannot do. Periodic audits are done to ensure the employee is following these policies. Laboratories may place printers, computers, fax machines or other equipment or products in client offices as long as they ensure that: The physician understands the equipment belongs to the laboratory. It is used for laboratory purposes like receiving reports or ordering tests. Periodic audits are done to ensure that the client is using the equipment only for laboratory related activities.

View Page
Couriers and referral tests

The laboratory's couriers may not transport items except those related to the testing services offered by the laboratory. Couriers must follow all OSHA standards for the handling and transport of specimens. The laboratory is responsible for all tests it refers to other laboratories. Laboratory should not change CPT codes supplied by a reference laboratory without contacting the reference laboratory. The laboratory is responsible for all tests it bills to Medicare/Medicaid even if the test was performed by a reference laboratory.

View Page
Marketing and record retention

The laboratory must ensure that its sales and marketing materials are clear and not deceptive: They should fully inform the physician about the appropriate use of laboratory tests and services. They should not be designed to induce unnecessary testing. The laboratory must have in place a record retention policy that ensures records are accessible in case of an audit or investigation. Records should be retrievable. Related documents should be linked.

View Page
Utilization and other regulations

Laboratories must not induce physicians to order unnecessary tests through their marketing or education activities: They must monitor the use of laboratory services by their clients. They must correct any situation where something they did caused an unnecessary increase in test utilization. Cost Reports Hospitals laboratories must ensure that information used in hospital Medicare cost reports is accurate and includes only those costs which are appropriate. Laboratories must follow all CLIA and OSHA regulations: failure to do so may result in a False Claims Act violation.

View Page
Billing

Billing is the highest risk area for the laboratory because it generates the claims that are sent to Medicare and other government payers.Payment and payment errors are the focus of the OIG compliance guidance for the laboratory because of the revenue involved.Fraud and abuse is often perpetrated as a billing scheme.Nearly all laboratory functions can affect the billing of laboratory tests.

View Page
Medical necessity

Medical necessity means that Medicare is not allowed by law to pay for any tests that are not necessary for diagnosis or treatment of disease.A laboratory may not submit a claim to Medicare or other government payers for any test it knows is not medically necessary except in certain cases: When the patient has signed an advance notice. When a patient has requested the lab to submit such a claim for a determination by Medicare. Medicare does not pay for screening tests or tests that are ordered in the absence of signs or symptoms.Billing department employees are responsible to follow all policies and procedures related to the submission of claims to reduce erroneous billings.

View Page
HCPCS and CPT coding

The HCFA (Health Care Financing Administration) Common Procedural Coding System (HCPCS) and the CPT (Current Procedural Terminology) codes are used to describe specific tests or services. The amount of payment for a test is dependent on the HCPCS or CPT code. HCPCS or CPT codes should be assigned under the supervision of the laboratory technical staff. Billing department employees should never change a HCPCS or CPT code without the approval of a manager or compliance officer. If a billing department clerk notices that a particular HCPCS or CPT code is being rejected by a payer they should report it to their manager. It is against the law to use the wrong HCPCS or CPT code for the purpose of causing or increasing payment for a test.

View Page
ICD-9CM coding

ICD-9CM (International Classification of Disease, 9th Edition, Clinical Modification) codes are used for the classification of disease and conditions and for describing signs, symptoms and medical circumstances.These codes are used to indicate the medical necessity of a particular test.ICD-9 codes can only be supplied by the ordering physician or a representative of that physician. "Code steering" means to steer or direct a physician to supply an ICD-9 code that is payable. ICD-9 codes cannot be used from a previous laboratory order. If a physician supplies a narrative description instead of an ICD-9 code the laboratory must accurately translate that code using only certified coders.It is against the law to use the wrong ICD-9 code for the purpose of causing or increasing payment for a test.

View Page
Local medical review policies (LMRPs)

LMRPs (Local Medical Review Policies) are published by Medicare for some laboratory tests. They are usually developed for tests that can be used for screening or diagnosis of disease. LMRPs use CPT codes to identify the tests and ICD-9 codes to determine when coverage is allowed. If an LMRP test is ordered by a physician, an ICD-9 code that is included in the LMRP must be given to the laboratory or the Medicare program will not pay for the test. It is against the law for laboratory to change or add an ICD-9 code submitted by a physician. A laboratory should not submit a claim for an LMRP test that is not accompanied by an acceptable ICD-9 code. The Balanced Budget Act of 1997 made it illegal for physicians to order LMRP tests and not supply an ICD-9CM code with the order.

View Page
Communication with physicians and patients

It is important that billing department employees are clear and accurate when communicating with physician office personnel and patients. Never guess at the answer to a question; ask if you are unsure. Do not speculate or express personal opinions. When requesting diagnosis information from the physician office staff be careful to not lead them to give a billable code: The code must come from the patient's medical record. There is an incentive program for patients to find and report fraud and abuse by health care providers, including laboratories, so: Billing department employees must accurately state laboratory policies and procedures, or forward the call to a supervisor to avoid misstatements and misunderstandings.

View Page
Advance Beneficiary Notices (ABNs)

A Laboratory may not bill a Medicare Beneficiary for a test unless it notifies the patient in writing before the testing is done that Medicare is not going to pay for the test. This notice is called an ABN. Laboratories cannot make all Medicare beneficiaries sign ABNs. The ABN must contain the specific name of the test and give a specific reason the laboratory thinks payment for the test will be denied. The beneficiary should sign the ABN and a copy should be sent to the laboratory and one given to the beneficiary. The billing department must have evidence that the ABN has been signed before it bills a patient.A laboratory may bill Medicare even though it knows it will not be paid when it has evidence an ABN has been signed. A modifier (GA) must be added to the CPT code for a test where an ABN has been signed.

View Page
Excused charges and other inducements

The laboratory should not offer or provide free testing to any individual in a position to make or control referral for laboratory services: The laboratory may write off charges only when laboratory errors in billing or testing occur. Sales and marketing personnel cannot offer free testing in any form unless approved by the compliance officer. Free testing for indigent patients must be approved by the compliance officer. Sales and marketing personnel cannot offer or give anything of value to a customer or potential customer beyond the usual promotional items. If a client solicits a questionable or illegal item or special consideration, it should be reported to the sales manager or compliance officer.

View Page
Test pricing and antitrust

It is not against the law for a laboratory to have different fee schedules for different billing situations.Most laboratories have one fee schedule for customers that must be billed individually (patients, insurance, Medicare) and one for customers billed monthly on an invoice type of statement (client or doctor billing).The difference in price between the two schedules should be a reflection of the financial benefits of direct client billing.Test prices should be determined by means of a financial analysis that include such factors as cost, market value and reasonable profit.Contractually arranged pricing that results from negotiations with insurance and managed care companies should at least cover costs of testing.Laboratories may not work together to fix or set prices in the market place.

View Page
Equipment and space

Laboratories may only lease space from physicians who refer Medicare patients to them under certain circumstances: There must be a written lease for at least one year. Lease price must be at "fair market value." All leases must be reviewed by legal counsel to ensure compliance with antikickback and Stark laws.When leasing or renting equipment to a physician or from a physician the same basic rules apply as for space.If the laboratory is located in a hospital, the relationship between the hospital and a physician who refers to the lab may have antikickback or Stark implications.

View Page
Client contracts

A laboratory that receives referrals from a nursing home or Skilled Nursing Facility (SNF) should have a written agreement with that facility: The Agreement should define billing and documentation responsibilities. The facility should be responsible for determining the payment status of its patients and is liable for submitting incorrect payment information to the laboratory. Fees should be consistent with other similar customers. A laboratory that provides services to a Home Health Agency treating Medicare/Medicaid beneficiaries should have a written agreement with that agency: The Agreement should define billing and documentation responsibilities. The Agreement should place the responsibility on the Home Health Agency to establish that all patients receiving laboratory services are "homebound" as defined by Medicare. Fees should be consistent with other similar customers.

View Page
ICD-9 codes and ABNs

Never use sign and symptom information received from a patient for laboratory billing purposes.Never use ICD-9 codes from previous visits for a new visit even if the request is for the same test and the patient assures you that it is for the same reason. (Standing orders are an exception.)ICD-9 codes should be requested when setting up standing orders and will then apply to all subsequent visits. It is not necessary in this case to get a new ICD-9 code for each visit.If the patient refuses to sign an ABN but demands to have the test done: Have the fact that they were given notice (ABN) witnessed by a second person. (By phone if you are located in single-person drawing site). Ensure that documentation is complete.

View Page
Confidentiality and inducements

Do not leave test orders or test results in areas where they can be viewed by patients.Do not discuss test results or any patient information in areas where patients can overhear the conversation. Be careful not to discuss confidential information on the telephone where patients can overhear the conversation.Do not provide supplies to physician offices other than those usually provided by the laboratory. Document any supplies given to an office.Do not supply items that the office can use for testing (e.g. urine dipsticks). Do not allow offices to dispose of biohazard waste or sharps in the waste containers paid for by the laboratory.

View Page
Communicating with patients in person

When communicating directly with patients concerning their laboratory tests or orders be careful not to discuss the following: Why a test has been ordered by a physician. What the test might indicate or what the test results mean. Any opinions about their doctor. Any information about internal laboratory issues. Refer the patient to their doctor for information about the tests and the results.If the laboratory provides any printed information about tests that are designed for patients, give the patient that information.

View Page
Test orders

Anytime an order is not clear, the physician office must be contacted.Do not use information supplied by a patient to clarify an order. Patients cannot add tests on their own. If a patient insists they want tests not specifically ordered by the doctor, the doctor should be contacted.When transferring a doctor's order from a non-standard form like a prescription pad to a laboratory requisition, it is important to ensure the accuracy of the order.Attach the original order document to the requisition sent to the laboratory.Follow all laboratory policies about panels and profiles, ambiguous orders and reflex tests.

View Page
Case Study 9

The setting is automated chemistry department, night shift, busy core laboratory for a hospital based outreach laboratory. A medical technologist who operates the automated chemistry analyzer on third shift encounters short samples a couple of times a night. When this happens, he runs as many of the ordered tests as he can and fills in the blank results with a comment indicating that a short sample occurred. As far as he knows there isn't a policy that addresses this problem directly.The test reports out with the results and the comments. The technologist does not have to change the physician order in any way and is providing the maximum results that can be reported for the specimen in a timely fashion. This is done as a matter of patient care and quality service. There has not ever been a complaint about this practice as far as he knows. Are there any additional steps this technologist should be taking?Correct Answer: The technologist should follow the procedures that the laboratory has in place for testing and billing samples for which there is no order or for ambiguous orders. If the policies do not seem to address his particular situation, he thinks there should be a separate policy to cover this situation or has a question about it, he should talk to his supervisor or to the laboratory compliance officerDiscussion: This choice addresses the problem in the most complete manner, in that the employee fulfills his responsibility to take action when he thinks there is a problem.

View Page
Case Study 10

The setting is nursing home where a phlebotomist from the laboratory goes to draw blood samples each day. The phlebotomist picks up the requisitions for blood test orders at the nursing station and then goes to the various rooms to draw blood from the patients. She notices that every requisition has an Advanced Beneficiary Notice (ABN) attached to it that is signed by the patient, even when the tests that were ordered don't need them. She asks the nurse at the station but she informs the phlebotomist that she doesn't know anything about it because it is done on the night shift.She lets the phlebotomist know that she will inform the nursing supervisor about it when she arrives at 9:00 AM. The phlebotomist completes her blood draws and returns to the laboratory. What should the phlebotomist do, if anything, in addition to her letting the nurse know about the problem?Correct Answer: The phlebotomist should report the incident to her supervisor upon returning to the laboratory.Discussion: Since the laboratory is submitting the claims for any Medicare patients that the phlebotomist might draw, the problem is the labs problem. However, it is not going to change the fact that the ABNs were already signed by the patients if the phlebotomist refuses to draw them or if the nursing personnel are required to remove them. By contacting the supervisor, an appropriate representative from the laboratory can follow up with the nursing supervisor to ensure they understand the laws and regulations that govern ABNs.

View Page
Case Study 7

The setting is the cafeteria in a hospital or the lounge in an independent laboratory. Two employees from different departments are old friends are having lunch together. A billing clerk and a medical technologist are friends and are having lunch together. The billing clerk mentions that she saw a bill go through the system for one of her coworkers for a biopsy. She asks the medical technologist if she has the necessary security level access to see pathology test results because she is concerned about the welfare of the coworker. The medical technologist does have the necessary security clearance to see the results. She should:Correct Answer: Refuse to look up the results for the clerk and remind the clerk that it is a violation of compliance policies to do so, or to ask another to do so. Remind her of the requirement for each employee to report any violations of policy. Discussion: The Medical technologist has a responsibility to report violations of compliance policies and the friend has put her in a difficult position. For that reason, it is not enough to just refuse the clerk's request. If the medical technologist does not take the responsibility to inform the employee of the policy then there is a possibility that the employee would ask some other employee to do it for her.

View Page
Case Study 8

The setting is a billing office in a laboratory where two or more clerks work together in very close proximity with each other, so that each can easily see what the other is doing. A billing clerk notices that one of his fellow employees is changing or adding codes to requisitions he is processing. This employee is a friend of his and he knows that he really needs the job at the laboratory because he is a single parent raising two kids. He also knows that what the employee is doing is against the company's compliance policies.He asks the employee about it and is given the explanation that because the computer requires something to be entered in the ICD-9 code field and he only does this with non-Medicare patients, it doesn't matter. The employee explains that it saves him a lot of time he uses to call to get codes for the Medicare patients. What should this clerk do about this?Correct Answer: She should talk to the supervisor about the problem even if she talks to the employee about it and the employee says she will talk to the supervisor and stop doing it.Discussion: Every employee who becomes aware of a violation of the law or a compliance policy has a responsibility to take action, which includes reporting the problem to a supervisor or the compliance officer. It doesn't matter that these patients are not Medicare patients, the important thing is that the employee is violating a compliance policy. If this employee does not report the problem he is himself violating a compliance policy. If it is subsequently discovered that he knew and didn't report it, he could be terminated. If there is a need for refunds to be done or other action, it will not occur and could create a big problem for the lab in a subsequent audit or other action.

View Page
Case Study 5

The Client Services department which is a crowded room divided into cubicles which contain desks separated only by thin moveable dividers. Lots of activity, phones ringing, multiple conversations going on at once etc. A client service representative receives a call from a large client office that she speaks with every day for a variety of reasons. Today the client is requesting the laboratory to write off the charges for a test that the office person ordered incorrectly by mistake even though the laboratory has already done the test and reported the results back to the office. Since this service representative works with this office frequently she believes that this is a rare request. Actions that the client service representative may take are:Correct Answer: Refuse to write off the charges for the test and inform the client that it could be considered an inducement if the laboratory does that, which would make both the laboratory and the office liable should it ever come to light. Offer whatever billing options are available according to lab policies. or Refuse to write off the charges and explain to the client that approval must be obtained from the department manager or the laboratory compliance officer before any action can be taken because writing the test off could be considered an inducement.Discussion: The primary reason is that the test is not written off simply because the client asks for it to be done. Tests should never be written off by the laboratory automatically. There should always be an approval process involved or a policy that strictly forbids any write off except in the case an error on the part of the laboratory where documentation exists to support it.

View Page
Case Study 6

The setting is a large outreach or independent laboratory that processes a high volume of tests with tight resources and a lot of customer service turn around time deadlines to meet that are dependent on the specimen processing department to complete their work on time, every day and night. The manager of the specimen processing department receives a memorandum from the compliance officer (CO) that several of his employees have not attended their compliance training sessions.Since this is the initial training for the laboratory, the CO reminds the manager of the requirement that all employees attend. The employees listed in the memo are key employees, who are top performers in the department. The manager knows that they have been instructed to attend, and that attendance was mandatory but left it up to them to choose the session they would attend. When questioned about their non attendance, all of the individuals said they were too busy to attend and it was a matter of going to the classes or getting the work done. What action should the manager take in this situation?Correct Answer: In consideration of the fact that these are the initial training sessions, sit down with each of the affected employees and very specifically tell them that the classes are mandatory and that they must attend under penalty of disciplinary action.Discussion: The manager knows that the compliance policy is mandatory attendance for these training sessions and informed these employees of that fact. When taking the disciplinary action, the manager may take into account the fact that these employees have not received the training and therefore may not understand the implications of not attending, but the some appropriate discipline should be taken. The manager should also give some consideration to the mentality that caused these employees to skip the training in the first place even after being instructed to attend. This same kind of decision process, the work must get done, is a common cause of compliance problems occurring.

View Page
Case Study 2

A courier is making a routine stop in a client's office and is approached by the office manager with whom he is very friendly because he has been going to this office for years. The office manager asks the courier if Dr. John Smith is a regular stop on his route and the courier answers yes. She then asks the courier if he would do her a little favor since he stops at Dr Smiths office regularly anyway and drop off an x-ray for her so she won't have to call a courier service. The courier knows that this is a big account for the laboratory and customer service is a high priority for the laboratory. This courier should:Correct Answer: Refuse to do it for the customer and explain to the customer that the laboratory has a policy that says he must only provide courier services related to laboratory.Discussion: Even though this is a single incident, by doing this favor the courier is giving the office manager license to ask these kinds of favors in the future. Since the provision of this free courier service is a form of inducement or kickback to the client, both the client and the laboratory would be involved if the such a practice were to go on regularly and be discovered by the government or by the laboratory. Hiding the incident and asking the office manager to conspire with him to do this will only make it worse for the employee and would lead to serious discipline action up to termination. The courier's best course of action, for the protection of his friend the office manager and himself, the physician practice and the laboratory is to not do this and explain the reason to the office manager so she is aware of the consequences of asking this favor.

View Page
Case Study 3

It is 11:00 PM and the specimen processing department is finishing up the night's accessioning and test requesting. A specimen processor is working on a requisition that has an order for a Hepatic Profile but there are two tubes of blood with the order, one of which is a lavender top tube. This is the fourth requisition from this same doctor's office and all of them have had a lavender top tube and serum tube with an order for a chemistry test and a CBC. No CBC is marked on the requisition or written on the tube. The specimen processor figures the office just forgot to mark the test and knows that the results will be delayed and the sample might not be any good if he doesn't order the CBC now. He is also under pressure from the technical departments to finish processing on time so they can get their work done on time for result printing in the morning. What should the processor do?Correct Answer: Look up the laboratory's policy for handling such a situation and follow the policy.Discussion: The laboratory is not permitted to change a doctor's order in any way. By ordering the CBC the processor is ordering a test that the doctor did not specifically order and therefore makes the laboratory subject to a violation of the False Claims Act. By reviewing and following the laboratory policy the processor assures that the laboratory, the physician and the patient's best interests are met.

View Page
Case Study 4

Busy hospital laboratory in a 350 bed urban hospital that provides laboratory testing for the hospital and for the hospital's outreach testing laboratory. A medical technologist in the microbiology department receives a call from a friend who works in a laboratory in a physician office. The physician is not a regular client of the laboratory currently but uses another laboratory for most of their work. The microbiologist knows that the sales department would like to get this account. The friend explains to her that she is doing a quality control check on her in-office microbiology testing and her regular laboratory will do it but is going to charge her for it. She asks the microbiologist if she will do it for free since it is quality control, not Medicare and is not going to be billed to anyone.She tells the microbiologist that she would like to use the hospital lab for everything but her doctor insists on using the competitor. She indicates that the favor might help get the doctor to try the hospital laboratory for other tests. The microbiologist should:Correct Answer: Explain to her friend that if the hospital does the tests for no charge on the promise of other referrals, both the physician office and the hospital could be liable for violations of the antikickback statute.Discussion: The antikickback statute is implicated in this scenario because the free testing is solicited on the condition that other referrals may occur as a result of providing the favor. In fact, the solicitation itself is a violation of the law. The fact that Medicare patients are not specifically mentioned in the scenario is not sufficient to remove the risk. The technologist should also report the incident to the Compliance Officer and seek advise about what documentation, if any, should be kept concerning the incident.

View Page
Case Study 1

A billing clerk is entering billing demographics on requisitions as a part of the normal days work. The department is under pressure to reduce accounts receivable, which means that the more clean claims that are filed, the better. This particular requisition is for a Medicare patient and has an LMRP test but does not have a diagnosis on it. She remembers that just a few requisitions before this one she had a requisition from the same doctor that had this same test on it that did have a diagnosis that allowed the test to be billed. She thumbs back in the pile and finds the previous requisition, notes the code that was used and adds it to the current requisition. This will help her meet the department goal of getting claims paid and reducing accounts receivable. It is all right for her to do this because:Correct Answer: She should not do this because it is against the law to change diagnosis information on a requisition.Discussion: A laboratory employee should never change, add or use previously received diagnosis information for the purpose of making a test billable for the Medicare program or for any other insurance or payer. This is a form of fraud and for each claim submitted as a result of this activity the laboratory is liable for a false claim and would have to pay the government back three up to times the reimbursement for the test and up to $10,000 for each claim submitted. Further, if the employee is caught doing this, even if the employee is ignorant of the law and any laboratory policy prohibiting it, she must be disciplined and so should the supervisor. Any employee who notices another employee doing this should correct the employee and report the incident to the department supervisor immediately.

View Page
Company Responsibility

The company also carries certain responsibilities: The laboratory has a responsibility to communicate to all its employees its compliance policies, procedures, standards of conduct and the consequences of non-compliance. All employees must be able to understand the policies and standards. The laboratory has a responsibility to act on reported problems and suspect activities. The laboratory must resolve problems and ensure they don't recur. The laboratory must take appropriate and fair disciplinary actions against all involved. The laboratory must report to the appropriate government agency when necessary. The laboratory must promptly return money received from the government to which it is not entitled. The laboratory must audit its policies and procedures to ensure they are being followed and that they work.

View Page
Employee's Responsibility

An employee has certain responsibilities: Voluntary Compliance Programs should detect and prevent billing errors and fraud in the clinical laboratory. Compliance programs must be effective to be beneficial in case of an investigation. Compliance is every employee's responsibility regardless of status or position in the company. All employees are subject to disciplinary action if they violate compliance policies or laws. Employees must understand their responsibility to report any problems or suspect activity they encounter in the laboratory. Employees will not be disciplined for reporting problems. Employees should use the Hotline or other established anonymous reporting system if they are afraid of retribution.

View Page

Metabolic Syndrome
At medical examination, a 50-year-old Caucasian male expressed concern regarding diabetes. There is a history of type 2 diabetes, hypertension, and cardiovascular disease in his family. He has gained a few pounds each year and his physician notes abdominal obesity. His physician orders laboratory tests to evalute his risk of cardiovascular disease.Vital Signs and Pertinent Laboratoy Results:Blood Pressure: 128/82 mm Hg Weight: 230 lbsHeight: 5' 11'' Calculated BMI: 32.1Waist Circumference: 45 inchesFasting Blood Glucose: 120 mg/dLTriglycerides: 170 mg/dLHDL-C: 42 mg/dLWhich one of the following statements regarding this patient is true if the physician uses the guidlines of NCEP: ATP III Diagnostic Criteria for metabolic syndrome evaluation?View Page
Clinical Laboratory Testing in Metabolic Syndrome

The diagnostic criteria for metabolic syndrome require laboratory testing of glucose, triglycerides, and HDL-C. Glucose may also be assayed with self-monitoring glucose meters. Several other analytes may be monitored in those diagnosed with metabolic syndrome. Important assays are LDL-C, hs-CRP, IL-6, adiponectin, and PAI-1. Hyperinsulinemia occurs in insulin resistance and insulin levels can be quantitated in the clinical laboratory. However, lack of standardization and significant variation in results currently makes insulin testing impractical.

View Page
A 45-year-old African American female has been diagnosed and treated for type 2 diabetes for the past five years. She maintains good control of her blood glucose with medication but does not exercise and has gained 12 pounds over the past year.At her next appointment, her physician orders hs-CRP along with blood assays to monitor her diabetes.Laboratory Result:hs-CRP 2.8 mg/LView Page
A physician discusses weight with an overweight 60-year-old female at her yearly physical appointment. The female exercises regularly and eats healthy most of the time. The physician suggests she decrease carbohydrate intake and decrease portion size at meals.Review patient vital signs and laboratory assay results to decide if a diagnosis of metabolic syndrome is appropriate using the NCEP:ATP lll Diagnostic Criteria shown on the right.Height: 5' 7'Weight: 192 lbsBMI: 30.1Waist Circumference: 37 inchesBlood Pressure: 108/70Fasting Blood Glucose: 92 mg/dLTotal Cholesterol: 172 mg/dLLDL-C: 112 mg/dLHDL-C: 46 mg/dLTriglycerides: 70 mg/dLhs-CRP: <1.0 mg/LWhich of these statements regarding this patient is true?View Page
References

Armstrong C. Practice guidelines AHA and NHLBI review diagnosis and management of the metabolic syndrome. Am Fam Physician. 2006;74:891-1062.D'Amore PJ. Evolution of c-reactive protein as a cardiac risk factor. Lab Med. 2005;36:234-238.Devaraj, S, Swarbrick MM, Singh U et al. CRP and adiponectin and its oligomers in the metabolic syndrome evaluation of new laboratory-based biomarkers. Am J Clin Pathol. 2008;129:815-822.Eckel RH, Grundy SM, Zimmet PZ. The metabolic syndrome. Lancet. 2005;365:1415-1428.Expert Panel in Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Cholesterol in Adults (authors). Executive summary of the third report of the national cholesterol education program (NCEP) expert panel on detection, evaluation, and treatment of high blood cholesterol in adults (adult treatment panel III). JAMA.2001;285:2486-2497.Gade W, Gade J, Collins M et al. Failures of feedback: rush hour along the highway to obesity. Clin Lab Sci. 2010;23:39-50.Gade W, Gade J, Collins M et al. Beyond obesity: the diagnosis and pathophysiology of metabolic syndrome. Clin Lab Sci. 2010;23:51-61.Grundy SM. Does a diagnosis of metabolic syndrome have value in clinical practice? Am J Clin Nutr. 2006;83:1248-1251.Grundy SM, Brewer HB, Cleeman JI, et al. Definition of metabolic syndrome: report of the national heart, lung, and blood institute/american heart association conference on scientific issues related to definition. Circulation. 2004;109:433-438.Grundy SM, Cleeman JI, Daniels SR, et al. Diagnosis and management of the metabolic syndrome: An American Heart Association/National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute scientific statement. Circulation. 2005;112:2735-2752.Grundy SM. Obesity, metabolic syndrome, and cardiovascular disease. J Clin Endocrinol Metab. 2004;89:2595-2600.Mathew B, Francis L, Kayalar A, et al. Obesity: effects on cardiovascular disease and its diagnosis. J Am Board Fam Med. 2008;21:562-568.Metabolic Syndrome. National Heart Lung and Blood Institute. Diseases and Conditions Index. Available at http://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/health/dci/Diseases/ms/ms_whatis.html. Accessed December 5, 2011.Mittal S. The Metabolic Syndrome in Clinical Practice. London, England. Springer-Verlag Springer Science; 2008.Molinaro RJ. Metabolic syndrome: an update on prevalence, criteria, and laboratory testing. MLO. 2007;39:24-27.Ronti T, Lupattelli G, Mannarino E. The endocrine function of adipose tissue: an update. Clin Endocrinol. 2006;64:355-365.

View Page

Microbiology / Serology Question Bank - Review Mode (no CE)
Which of the following statements about Rickettsia is false:View Page

Molecular Methods in Clinical Microbiology
Prior to 1985

Once relegated to the domain of research laboratories, molecular methods for the diagnosis of infectious disease had little, if any place, in a clinical diagnostic laboratory prior to 1985. Procedurally, molecular methods were very complex and required specialized instrumentation and dedicated laboratory space. They were also susceptible, initially, to the influence of variation of technique. Although they represented valuable research tools, and were helpful as esoteric testing for unique clinical situations, their performance characteristics simply did not fit well into most clinical laboratories.Certain pathogens were logical targets for development. Organisms that were of concern for significant patient populations, were difficult to sustain in transport, and/or were difficult to cultivate and detect by traditional methods represented some of the first targets of commercially offered molecular based assays.Sexually transmitted diseases, affecting significant numbers of people, with key pathogens affected by lability in transport or poor sensitivity with traditional cultivation or antigen detection methods, were among the first targets for development.

View Page
Initially, why were molecular methods difficult to perform in routine clinical laboratories? (Choose all that apply.)View Page
The Key Benefits: Improved Sensitivity of Detection

There are three key benefits that molecular methods can offer, in contrast to traditional culture methods:Improved sensitivity of detectionImproved specificity of identificationReduced turnaround timeImproved sensitivity of detectionSuccessful cultivation or detection of an organism depends on many factors, including the:Ability of the organism to survive transport Fastidious nature of the organism/its ability to grow in available culture media/systems Number of organisms present in a specimen Ability of a staining/culture system to visualize/recover low numbers of organisms Sensitivity of non-culture (antigen detection) methodsOrganisms that have been shown to be very labile are difficult to cultivate even when they are present in significant numbers. The immediacy of transport, plating, and incubation are critical factors that frequently cannot be controlled in a positive direction.Even under the ideal transport conditions, some organisms may require culture media and conditions that are not routinely available in every laboratory, which reduces the likelihood of successful cultivation.

View Page
Challenges for Implementation: Space Requirements

Introducing molecular methods into a clinical microbiology laboratory is not a process without challenges. Some of these may include:Space requirements for both workflow and instrumentation Identifying separate areas for key aspects of the molecular process Familiarizing staff with new workflow requirements Instilling potentially new skill sets Cost of equipment and reagentsSpace requirementsIntroducing molecular methods will necessarily entail the introduction of new equipment. In many laboratories, space is at a premium; identifying space for new and additional equipment can be challenging. Some platforms are quite large; others have a significantly smaller footprint. The necessary separation of certain activities in the workflow will also impact space planning.

View Page
Challenges for Implementation: Separation of Key Activities

Prevention of contamination is a very key consideration when introducing molecular methods into the routine diagnostic laboratory setting. Because amplification methods are so sensitive, the incidental introduction of even a few copies of exogenous nucleic acid can lead to false positive results. Both physical design and process controls are key aspects of preventing erroneous results.Significant potential sources of contamination are the large quantities of target molecules from previously amplified materials. Amplicons may contaminate work surfaces, air space, pipettes, and reagents. Scrupulous technique is one aspect of preventing contamination; another is the physical separation of specific steps of the process. Ideally, all molecular work will take place in distinct areas designated for key aspects of the workflow, with each area having its own dedicated equipment (especially pipetting equipment). The three designated areas are:Clean area: Where master mixes and other reagents are prepared in the absence of any specimen material. In this area, protection from aerosol contamination is a key consideration. Use of a dead air box with ultraviolet (UV) lighting for decontamination, or a separated area with controlled airflow, are two ways to address this need.Specimen preparation and extraction area: Separated from the area where amplification and detection of amplified product occurs, in order to prevent contamination of samples with amplicons of previously processed specimens.Amplification, detection, and identification of the amplified product: Ideally, this area would be both separated and enclosed.To some extent, the introduction of platforms that utilize automated specimen processing equipment and/or closed amplification and detection systems mitigates stringent separation and space requirements. Good practice, however, would always include designated spaces for each activity, as well as a defined workflow.

View Page
Detection and Identification of Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR) Products: Advantages of Real-Time PCR

In real-time PCR, amplification and detection occur simultaneously, within the same reaction tube. Amplification occurs in the presence of a reporter: a probe specific for the target to be amplified, which is typically bound to some type of fluorogenic compound. Although the principles of real time reactions vary depending on the type of probe utilized, the basic premise is that the instrument platform combines a thermocycler with a fluorimeter, and utilizes light of specific wavelengths to excite the reporter molecules. If the target is present, probes bind to the target during each cycle of amplification. A fluorescent signal of increasing intensity is generated as the target is amplified, which is measured by the real time instrumentation. This signal intensity is directly proportional to the amount of amplified nucleic acid. When the signal exceeds a threshold, amplification of the target can be demonstrated.Once the sample is prepared and placed on the instrument, results are available in approximately 1 to 2 hours, depending on the assay and platform. In addition to reduced turnaround times, real time methodologies are more adaptable to automation and require significantly reduced handling of amplicons, and reduced risk of cross contamination. In some ways, the introduction of real time PCR accelerated the integration of molecular methods into the routine clinical diagnostic laboratory setting. Melt curve analysis Real time PCR methods can also specifically identify amplified products through melt curve analysis. The melting temperature of double stranded DNA depends on its base composition and length. All PCR products for a specific primer pair should have the same melting temperature, unless there is contamination, primer-dimer pairs, or some other problem. Real time instruments can be programmed to perform an analysis of the melting temperature of the PCR product. When hybridization probes are utilized, after the last PCR cycle, the samples are denatured, and then cooled to a temperature approximately 10o C below the expected melt temperature (Tm), as determined by previous testing of known samples. (This cooling protocol maximizes the formation of probe-target duplexes.) Then the temperature is incrementally raised while the fluorescence is continually monitored. At the melting point, the probe separates from the target strand, and the fluorescence rapidly decreases. The instrumentation software plots the rate of change in fluorescence with time on the Y axis, versus temperature on the X axis. The temperature at which the peak rate of change occurs is the Tm, and can be compared to known controls or established ranges to identify the PCR product.

View Page
Molecular Versus Culture - Pros and Cons

Traditional culture methods for the detection and identification of methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) employing mannitol salt and/or blood agar for cultivation, can take up to 72 hours for isolation and identification, depending on the identification procedures utilized. Concurrent with the development of molecular assays, improvements in culture methods have also been achieved. CHROmagar™ media, specific for MRSA, are employed by many laboratories. These media are both selective and differential, containing chromogenic substrates. MRSA strains utilize the substrates to produce colonies of a specific and characteristic color, minimizing the need for additional identification procedures.Initially these agars required 48 hours of incubation; newer formulations require only 24 hours incubation.Given the reduced incubation and identification requirements, what are the pros and cons of the molecular assays? Cost per test will be greater with the molecular assays as compared to culture methods. Will molecular methods provide for a more efficient workflow and significant improvement in availability of results? To some extent, this will depend on how they can be implemented within each different laboratory setting. Both of the previously described molecular assays require manual specimen preparation and extraction before the sample is placed into the instrument. This hands-on work may actually be greater than the effort expended in swabbing and streaking a culture plate. How much an obstacle this is for implementation will depend on both the volume of testing and the staff available. In a high volume setting, this will be a greater factor.Will tests be performed as specimens come in, or will specimens be accumulated and batched? If controls are required with each run, batching is desirable to reduce this cost. If testing will occur in batches, how many batches can be performed in one day? This will be heavily influenced by the capacity of the instrument. (For example, a single Smart Cycler unit can run up to 16 samples; multiple units would be needed in a high volume lab.) Can they be set up on more than one shift? The greater the number and frequency of batches that can be run, the greater improvement in turnaround time can be realized. Given these variables, implementation of a molecular assay for MRSA is not a given in each laboratory.

View Page
Prior Traditional Methods and the Need for Change

Rapid detection of influenza was a key focus for method development for many years. Traditional viral culture methods require special transport mediums, appropriate cell culture lines, and staff well versed in the manipulation of these cultures. Although the introduction of shell vial cultures and monoclonal fluorescent staining provided some improvement, the availability of results did not always meet the clinical need.Direct fluorescent antibody (DFA) staining of specimen smears can provide more immediately available results; however the availability of trained staff to interpret these smears is an obstacle for many laboratories. Antigen detection kits employing enzyme immunoassay (EIA) or immunochromatographic membrane principles did provide easily performed alternatives that fit well in most laboratory settings and provided more immediate results. Despite the fact that published studies demonstrated less than desirable sensitivity, these assays had found a niche and remained in place, even as molecular methods began to target these viruses.

View Page
Improvements for Influenza Testing

Public health laboratories were the first provided with the reagents and procedures for the reverse transcriptase-polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) assay developed by the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) under the Emergency Use Authorization (EUA). As information was shared between laboratories, other facilities implemented RT-PCR procedures that provided for the detection and differentiation of the H1N1 "swine" strain from previously encountered seasonal strains. Although many facilities utilized laboratory developed procedures, the FDA did grant emergency approval to a handful of commercially developed methods. One example was Prodesse's ProFlu-ST™ assay which became available in October 2009. Employing real time methodology, the kit was also optimized for use with automated extraction platforms, such as Roche's MagNA Pure Systems and Biomerieux's NucliSENS® easyMAG®.The ProFlu-ST™ assay is a multiplex RT-PCR assay utilizing fluorogenic hydrolysis (Taqman) probes for use on the SmartCycler platform. As a multiplex assay, it includes primers and probes for seasonal H1, seasonal H3, and 2009 H1 strains of influenza A. Targets are as follows:Seasonal H1: conserved area of A/H1 hemagglutinin (HA) geneSeasonal H3: conserved area of A/H3 hemagglutinin (HA) gene2009 H1/N1: conserved area of the 2009 nucleoprotein (NP) geneExtraction of RNA from patient samples is followed by a one-step multiplex reverse transcription of RNA targets into complementary DNA (cDNA), which is subsequently amplified in a real time thermocycler. In this process, the probe anneals specifically to the template, followed by primer extension and amplification. The assay utilizes the 5' - 3' exonuclease activity of the Taq polymerase, which cleaves the probe, thus separating the reporter dye of the fluorogenic probe from the quencher. This generates an increase in fluorescent signal. With each cycle, additional reporter dye molecules are cleaved from their respective probes, further increasing the fluorescent signal.

View Page
Which statement about the 2009 H1N1 virus is TRUE?View Page
Which statements are TRUE about the molecular methods made available under the Emergency Use Authorization (EUA)? (Choose all that apply.)View Page
Previous Methodologies: Antigenic Detection of Toxin and Glutamate Dehydrogenase (GDH)

Toxin assaysThe most common laboratory tests for the detection of C. difficile are enzyme immunoassays (EIA) for the detection of C. difficile toxin A and toxin B. The immunoassays are simple to perform, provide rapid results, and are easily incorporated into the workflow of most laboratories. Sensitivities of these tests do NOT compare favorably to culture, cell cytotoxicity neutralization assay (CCNA), or molecular methods. There are many test kits commercially available for detection of C. difficile toxins. Results are available in 15 minutes to 2 hours, depending on the assay. Initially, toxin A was thought to be the toxin responsible for the majority of the effects of C. difficile disease, so most early kits only detected toxin A. With the realization that there are strains that produce aberrant or no toxin A (A-) that are known to produce infection, and more recently toxin B negative (B-) strains, it is now recommended to use kits detecting BOTH toxins.Glutamate Dehydrogenase (GDH) assaysPublished studies have indicated that toxin immunoassays, by themselves, may not provide adequate sensitivity of detection. GDH assays initially attracted attention as a possible means to provide a rapid but more sensitive means for screening for C. difficile.GDH is an enzyme produced by C. difficile. EIAs negative for the GDH antigen have been associated with high negative predictive values. However, positive results are not necessarily associated with a toxin producing strain. A second assay on GDH positive samples is required to confirm the presence of a toxigenic strain. Initially, CCNA assays were recommended as the confirmatory method of choice; molecular methods (PCR for the toxin gene) were subsequently explored for this purpose.

View Page
Molecular Methods

A 2009 evaluation and comparison of a variety of commercially available toxin detection assays, glutamate dehydrogenase (GDH) assays, the cytotoxin assay, cytotoxigenic culture, and real time PCR for the C. difficile tcdB gene revealed that ALL methods demonstrated a relatively low positive predictive value, which compromised the utility of a single test for laboratory diagnosis of C. difficile. However, of all methods, PCR had the highest negative predictive value, and was considered the optimum rapid single test.Molecular methods for C. difficile are based on the detection of the tcd gene. With the application of real time methodology, results can be available within 2 to 3 hours. These methods are highly sensitive and demonstrate good sensitivity, in comparison to all methods with the exception of toxigenic culture. As the methodologies and instrumentation are developed and improved, they are increasingly adaptable to the environment of a busy clinical diagnostic setting. The BD GeneOhm™ and Meridian illumigene® assays are examples of currently available molecular assays for C. difficile.

View Page

Multi-drug Resistant Organisms: MRSA, VRE, and Clostridium difficile
Laboratory Identification of Staphylococcus aureus

A clinical isolate is presumptively identified as Staphylococcus aureus by means of several simple procedures :Gram Stain : Gram-positive cocci, occurring singly, in pairs or "bunches of grapes"Catalase test: Staphylocci are catalase-positive, distinguishes them from Streptococci which are catalase-negative.Coagulase test: S. aureus is coagulase-positive.DNAse Test – S. aureus is DNAse-positiveHeat stable endonuclease – S. aureus is positiveThere are also many commercial kits available for identification of S. aureus based on latex agglutination.

View Page
Screening cultures for MRSA

Surveillance is a critical component of any program for controlling multi-drug resistant organisms. Many institutions are using active surveillance cultures to identify patients who are colonized with a targeted MDRO. With respect to MRSA, an increasing number of hospitals are screening patients upon admission and on a periodic basis (usually weekly). The anterior nares is the primary site that is swabbed for screening.There are several selective and/or differential media that can be used for this purpose.Baird Parker Agar is a selective medium for the isolation of S. aureus; on this medium S. aureus produces black colonies with a clear halo.Mannitol Salt Agar is also a selective medium; S. aureus produces yellow colonies which contrast with the red color of the medium.Chromogenic agars have been developed for the isolation and presumptive identification of different species of bacteria and yeast. The media are formulated so that as different organisms utilize various substrates in the media, the organism of interest produce colonies with a unique color. Chromogenic agars specifically designed for the detection of MRSA are commercially available.In addition to culture methods, there are now commercially available, FDA approved methodologies for screening for MRSA by PCR. Although equipment and cost factors may not make these a viable option for every laboratory, they may offer greater sensitivity and improved turnaround times.

View Page
Laboratory Detection of Clostridium difficile

Several laboratory methods are currently available to aid in the detection of C. difficile including culture for toxigenic C. difficile (considered the "gold standard" for viable C. difficile detection), detection of Toxin A, B, or both, and molecular detection methods. These methods differ in their sensitivity and specificity and should always be used in conjunction with clinical considerations. To make the diagnosis, it is usually only necessary to submit 1-2 diarrheic (non-formed) stools per episode. Once positive for C. difficile by any laboratory method, there is no need for follow-up assays to make sure the organism or toxins are absent from the initial episode. If assays are performed for subsequent episodes, culture or tissue culture assay for Toxin B are probably most appropriate to avoid the possibility of detecting the initial antigen, toxin, or gene.

View Page
Enzyme Immunoassay Methods

The most common laboratory tests for detection of C. difficile are enzyme immunoassays (EIA) for detection of C. difficile Toxin A and Toxin B. The immunoassays are simple to perform and provide rapid results. However the sensitivities of these tests are not as good as culture, CCNA, or molecular methods. Only liquid stool samples should be processed. Due to the fact that the colonization rate is high, a positive result with a normal stool sample proves that the patient is colonized with C. difficile but not necessarily infected. There are many test kits available commercially for detection of C. difficile toxins. Results are available in 15 minutes – 2 hours depending on assay. Initially Toxin A was thought to be the toxin responsible for the majority of the effects of C.difficile disease, so most early test kits only detected Toxin A (based on monoclonal anti-Toxin A antibodies) but with the realization that there are strains that produce aberrant or no Toxin A (A-) that are known to produce infection, and more recently Toxin B negative (B-) strains, it is now recommended that a kit is used that detects both toxins.

View Page
References

Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing, Twentieth Informational Supplement. CLSI document M100-S20. CLSI. Wayne, PA: 2010.Fenner L, Widmer AF, Goy G, Rudin S, Frei R . Rapid and reliable diagnostic algorithm for detection of Clostridium difficile. JCM, 2008; 46(1): 328-330.Forbes BA, Sahm DF, Weissfeld AS, eds.Bailey & Scott's Diagnostic Microbiology. 11th ed. Mosby; 2002.Gillespie SH, Hawkey PM, eds. Principles and Practice of Clinical Bacteriology. 2nd ed. West Sussex, England: John Wiley & Sons Ltd; 2006.Isenberg HD. Clinical Microbiology Procedures Handbook. 2nd ed. Washington, DC: ASM Press; 2004.MDRO Guidelines. CDC website. Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/ncidod/dhqp/pdf/ar/MDROguideline2006.pdf. Accessed July 9, 2010.Vancomycin Resistant Enterococci and the Clinical Laboratory. CDC website. Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/ncidod/dbmd/diseaseinfo/drugresisstreppneum_t.htm Accessed July 9, 2010.

View Page
Your laboratory's primary susceptibility testing method is disk diffusion. The cefoxitin disc has a zone size of 19 mm and the vancomycin disc has a zone size of 7 mm. Appropriate courses of action include:View Page
Susceptibility Testing

When a clinical isolate is presumptively identified as S. aureus, susceptibility testing will be performed by either the Standardized Disk Diffusion (Kirby-Bauer) or Broth Dilution (MIC) methods, using the following testing conditions as recommended by the Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI): Medium: MHA for disk diffusion; CAMHB + 2% NaCL for oxacillin, methicillin, and nafcillin; CAMHB supplemented up to 50 ug/ml calcium for daptomycin Inoculum: Direct colony suspension (0.5 McFarland Standard) Incubation: 35° C (Testing at temperatures above 35° C may not detect MRSA); ambient air; disk diffusion; 16to 18 hours; dilution methods; 16 to 20 hours. All methods: 24 hrs for oxacillin, methicillin, nafcillin, and vancomycin.

View Page
Selection of Drugs for Testing

The panel of drugs selected for testing must take into consideration a number of factors: The laboratory performing the testing The number of drugs that can practically be tested Infection control requirements Drugs that are available in formularies Susceptibility patterns exhibited locally Consideration of the body site of the infection and whether the drug is an appropriate therapy

View Page
Your laboratory performs MIC tests, in addition to Kirby Bauer and on blood culture isolates, a PBP 2a assay. Which of the following isolates should be reported as oxacillin resistant?View Page

Mycology: Hyaline and Dematiaceous Fungi
Match each of the names of the hyaline molds listed with the environmental conditions or natural objects with which it is most likely associated.View Page
The most helpful feature in differentiating the Zygomycetes from the other hyaline molds in the clinical mycology laboratory is:View Page
Saprophytic Cladosporium species may be difficult to differentiate from Cladosporium trichoides (Xylohypha bantianum) in culture as both produce chains of conidia separated by distinct scars or dysjuncters. Each of the following characteristics of Cladosporium trichoides are helpful in separating the two except:View Page
The disease with which the dematiaceous fungus illustrated in this photomicrograph is most likely associated is:View Page

Mycology: Yeasts and Dimorphic Pathogens (retired 2/12/2013)
Match the names of the species of dimorphic fungi listed in the drop-down box with its corresponding yeast form as illustrated in the images.View Page
One of the characteristics common to the dimorphic molds is the ability to convert the mold forms to the yeast forms by incubating subcultures in enriched media at 35°-37°C. The upper image illustrates a subculture of a mold colony suspected of being a dimorphic fungus inoculated to the surface of blood agar and incubated for 3 days at 37°C. Note that the colonies have a prickly appearance, suggesting an intermediate stage of conversion. The lower image is a lactophenol blue mount of a portion of one of the prickly colonies. This fungus can be identified as:View Page
Each of the following dimorphic fungal infections have been observed in animals living in their natural environment except:View Page
Procedures for the rapid culture confirmation of suspected colonies of B. dermatitidis, C. immitis and H. capsulatum recovered from clinical specimens include:View Page
The colonies growing on the surface of this brain-heart infusion with blood agar plate were "converted" from a mold colony suspected of being Histoplasma capsulatum by incubating a subculture at 37°C for 5 days. The yeast forms that must be identified in mounts made from one of these colonies to confirm the identification are:View Page
Although care should be taken when working with all fungus cultures in the laboratory, personnel are particularly prone to develop laboratory acquired infections from the inhalation of airborne species of:View Page
Match each of the fungal species listed below with the appropriate category, indicating whether or not it has the capability of producing pseudohyphae on cornmeal agar.View Page
This photomicrograph is an acid-fast stained smear prepared from a yeast colony growing on ascospore agar. A helmet-shaped, red-staining, acid fast yeast cell is seen in the center of view at the tip of the arrow, against the background, blue-staining blastoconidia. The presumptive identification of Hansenula anomala was made. Predisposing conditions that may indicate that this isolate is more than a contaminant include:View Page

OSHA Electrical Safety (retired 11/19/2012)
An adapter can be used to increase the number of available outlets in a laboratory area.View Page
Precautionary information that pertains to a laboratory instrument or appliance can ONLY be obtained by contacting the manufacturer.View Page
Introduction

Electrical hazards are present in all laboratories. Because of this, adherence to all electrical safety standards is essential in preventing electrical accidents.

View Page
Ground

A ground is a conducting connection between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or between an electrical circuit and some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.The purpose of a ground is to prevent the buildup of voltages that may result in a hazardous situation for the connected equipment and/or for the person operating the equipment.All electrical equipment in the laboratory that is not clearly marked as "double-insulated" must be grounded by using a three-pronged power cord.

View Page
Space Heaters

Electrical space heaters are prohibited unless they are approved for use and inspected by your facility's management department. Space heaters are NOT permitted in hospital sleeping areas or in laboratories containing flammable liquids or gases.

View Page
Checks and Inspections

All laboratory instruments and appliances should be checked for ground integrity and current leakage before initial use, after repair or modification, and any time a problem is suspected.Periodic checks should be made on all electrical wires. Frayed cords are the most common cause of laboratory fires. If frayed cords or wires are found, the equipment should be immediately removed from use and repaired.Report to your supervisor any shocks or tingling received from electrical equipment.

View Page

OSHA Formaldehyde
Relevant OSHA Standards

1987 Haz-Com Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) is designed to help control employee exposure to chemicals on the job. 1990 Chemical Hygiene Standard (29 CFR 1910.1450) is specifically designed to meet the needs of laboratories with large varieties of chemicals, and to require specific training for laboratory employees. 1992 Formaldehyde Standard (29-CFR 1910.1048) is designed specifically for employees who work with formaldehyde. The goal of this standard is to reduce the risk of formaldehyde overexposure by establishing safe exposure limits.

View Page
Respirators

Respirators usually are not needed in a pathology laboratory. However, they are required if formaldehyde exposure exceeds the action level of 0.5 ppm. Respirators, if required, must be provided to you at no cost.Some OSHA-approved respirators include:Air-purifying full-facepiece or half mask respirator equipped with a canister or cartridge approved for protection against formaldehyde. If a half mask is used, gas-proof goggles must also be worn.Self-contained breathing apparatus operated in the demand mode or pressure-demand mode.

View Page
In Case of a Spill

Small spills (as defined by your facility) may in most instances be handled by laboratory or other employees. However, if you experience symptoms of overexposure during the clean up, such as burning eyes, or throat irritation, immediately leave the cleanup area and get help from your institution's Spill Response team or other designated persons.Major spills (as defined by your facility) will usually require immediate assistance from the Spill Response team or other designees. There are several ways to clean up small spills, two of which are described below:1. Dike up the formaldehyde with absorbent pillows. Then dispose of these pillows in a sealed, formaldehyde-labeled container. 2. A chemical that reacts with and neutralizes formalin may be used to treat the spill.Your supervisor will show you the location of these emergency spill clean-up materials or discuss alternative procedures. Be sure to follow your own institution's policies and procedures in regard to formalin spills.

View Page
What is Formaldehyde?

Formaldehyde solution is a colorless, aqueous liquid with a pungent odor. Concentrated formaldehyde solutions contain not less than 37% of formaldehyde or CH2O. These are usually supplied in 55 gallon drums. Ten percent (10%) aqueous formaldehyde solution, known as formalin , is almost universally used in the histology laboratory to fix and store pathology specimens, and, while still an important potential health hazard, is safer to use because of its lower formaldehyde concentration.

View Page
Safety Data Sheet

The appropriate SDS (Safety data sheet) for formalin can be found in your laboratory's SDS book or online. You should know where to access the SDS and be familiar with its content. Direct any questions you may have to your supervisor.

View Page
How is Exposure to Formaldehyde Monitored?

A monitoring badge is attached to your lab coat collar in the "breathing zone" for a specified length of time. This badge is then sent to an outside laboratory by your supervisor to determine your level of exposure to formaldehyde.

View Page
Fume Hoods and Other Controls

Engineering controls must be established to reduce formalin exposure to the lowest possible level. In most cases, chemical fume hoods or/and ventilated grossing stations serve as the primary engineering controls to reduce formaldehyde vapors. Rooms in which formalin is used may also require special direct exhaust ventilation. Formaldehyde should be dispensed or used in a chemical fume hood or other appropriately ventilated and approved work area. Check your laboratory's policies and procedures to be sure you use the engineering controls provided, as well as the required personal protective equipment.

View Page

OSHA Formaldehyde (retired)
Relevant OSHA Standards

1987 Haz-Com Standard is designed to help control employee exposure to chemicals on the job.1990 Chemical Hygiene Standard is specifically designed to meet the needs of laboratories with large varieties of chemicals, and to require specific training for laboratory employees.1992 Formaldehyde Standard is specifically for employees that work with formaldehyde. The goal was to reduce the risk of formaldehyde overexposure by establishing safe exposure limits.

View Page
Where is Formaldehyde Used?

Formaldehyde is a preservative, ideally used in: Histology laboratories Autopsy laboratories Surgical pathology Anywhere biopsies are performed

View Page
What is Formaldehyde?

Formaldehyde solution is a colorless, aqueous solution containing not less than 37% of formaldehyde or CH2O. It is usually supplied in 55 gallon drums.Formalin is a 10% formaldehyde solution that is commonly used in the laboratory.

View Page
Material Safety Data Sheet

Formaldehyde has an MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet).It can be found in your laboratory's MSDS book.Read the MSDS carefully!Ask questions.

View Page
Your Laboratory

Your laboratory is committed to providing you with a safe working environment. It also expects you to do your part : Be a responsible member of the laboratory team. Use safe work practices.

View Page

OSHA Hazard Communication and Chemical Hygiene Updated to the Globally Harmonized System
Regulation of Chemical Hazards in the Laboratory

The portion of the OSHA Standard that is specific to laboratories is 29CFR1910.1450, which is titled "Occupational exposure to hazardous chemicals in laboratories." Part of this regulation requires laboratory administration to develop a documented chemical hygiene plan (CHP). The CHP defines provisions for procedures, special equipment, personal protective equipment (PPE), and work practices that, if used correctly, will protect employees from the hazards associated with chemical exposure. Within the CHP, you will find:Provisions for worker training in the elements of the CHPThe laboratory's policy regarding chemical exposure monitoring, where appropriateSpecific information regarding medical consultation when exposure occursThe laboratory's criteria for the use of personal protective equipment (PPE) and engineering controlsSpecial precautions for particularly hazardous substancesThe person who is designated as the Chemical Hygiene Officer (the person responsible for implementation of the CHP)

View Page
Right to Know

As an employee, you have the right to know the types of hazardous substances that are used in your workplace. Material safety data sheets are now referred to as safety data sheets (SDSs) under the Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labeling of Chemicals (GHS). SDSs must be available to you for each chemical used in the laboratory, either in paper or electronic form. Ask your supervisor for the exact location.

View Page
Sections Seven and Eight

Section seven includes handling and storage information. Section eight contains exposure controls/personal protection information including:Occupational exposure limit values or biological limit valuesAppropriate engineering controlsIndividual protection measures, such as personal protective equipment

View Page
Be Prepared!

Remember to read and be familiar with the MSDS and the Laboratory's Chemical Hygiene Plan before you start a job so that you will be prepared for any emergency.

View Page
General Laboratory Precautions

Laboratory safety includes a number of precautions designed to protect you and your coworkers. Remember that: eating drinking smoking applying cosmetics or lip balm are forbidden in areas where chemicals are present.

View Page
Personal Protective Equipment

Personal protective equipment is an essential way to protect yourself from the dangers of chemicals. You'll find on the label or safety data sheet (SDS) exactly what kinds of clothing, gloves, and coverings you'll need to keep yourself safe. Also, the laboratory's chemical hygiene plan will include information about necessary personal protective equipment and engineering controls that will reduce your exposure to hazardous chemicals. At a minimum, chemical safety goggles and rubber or nitrile gloves (not necessarily utility gloves) are necessary parts of your personal protective equipment.

View Page
Reducing the Risk of Fires Involving Chemicals

Chemicals that are flammable or combustible should be stored in a fire-resistant cabinet; only a minimal amount should be stored on open shelving in the technical work areas. Be conscientious about storing flammable and combustible chemicals far from sources of ignition. Conduct work involving flammable and combustible chemicals within a chemical fume hood if possible.

View Page
Monitoring

Certain chemicals in use in the laboratory, such as formaldehyde, are hazardous if your exposure to them is prolonged. The amount of the chemical to which you can be exposed before possible danger is called the threshold limit value. Monitoring badges are used from time to time to measure your exposure. These are worn in the "breathing zone" for a certain period of time--often eight hours (for long-term exposure) or fifteen minutes (for short-term exposure). Based on the results of this monitoring, additional personal safety measures, such as ventilation or face-fitted masks, may be implemented for your protection.

View Page
Common Sense Rules, continued

Also remember to: Learn basic first aid measures.Read chemical labels.Read safety data sheets (SDSs).Follow warnings and instructions.Use the correct engineering controls and personal protective equipment.Practice sensible, safe work habits.Be knowledgeable about your laboratory's chemical hygiene plan and the location in your laboratory of all reference materials on the hazards, safe handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous chemicals, including the location of SDSs.Know the location of the eyewash stations that are closest to the areas where chemicals are handled and know how to use the eyewash correctly.Know the location of spill kits.

View Page
Keep It Safe!

Your laboratory has provided you with the equipment and training to protect you from chemical hazards. As a responsible member of the laboratory team, it is up to you to utilize safe work practices.

View Page

Packaging and Shipping Infectious Materials
What Records Must Be Maintained?

Training records must include:Employee name Most recent date trained Description of training Description, copy, or location of training materials Name and address of trainerThese records must be maintained throughout employment and 90 days thereafter, according to the US Department of Transportation (DOT). IATA requires repeat training every two years. DOT requires training every three years. Laboratory accrediting agencies require training at the frequency appropriate to the specimen types and distance transported. You will be able to print a certificate when you have completed this course that will certify your completion of training for packaging and shipping Division 6.2 (infectious) materials.

View Page
Classifications of Hazardous Materials

The US Department of Transportation (DOT) classifies hazardous materials according to the risks that they pose. There are nine hazard classes: Class 1: Explosives Class 2: Gases Class 3: Flammable liquids Class 4: Flammable solids Class 5: Oxidizers/organic peroxides Class 6: Toxic and infectious substances Class 7: Radioactive material Class 8: Corrosives Class 9: Miscellaneous hazardous materials Within class 6 are two divisions: Division 6.1- poisonous material Division 6.2- infectious substanceA division 6.2 infectious substance is defined as a material known or reasonably expected to contain a pathogen. A pathogen is a microorganism or other agent (e.g., a prion) that can cause disease in humans or animals. The regulations that govern packaging and shipping a class 9, miscellaneous hazardous material, may also need to be reviewed by those who package and ship laboratory specimens. Dry ice is a class 9 hazardous material and, if used, requires special packaging, and specific labeling and marking on the outer package.

View Page
IATA and US Postal Service Exempt Specimens

Laboratory specimens that are unlikely to cause disease and do not meet the criteria for category A or B substances are not subject to Division 6.2 regulations. Specimens for which the hazardous materials regulation (HMR) does not apply include human or animal samples (including, but not limited to, secreta, excreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluids, and body parts) being transported for routine testing not related to the diagnosis of an infectious disease. This includes specimens that are being sent for:drug or alcohol testing cholesterol testing blood glucose level testing prostate specific antibody (PSA) testing testing to monitor kidney or liver function pregnancy testing tests for diagnosis of non-infectious diseases such as cancer biopsies The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has no "Exempt Specimen" classification and there are no DOT guidelines for packaging non-regulated specimens.* According to the DOT, in the U.S., if a package is marked as "Exempt Human/Animal Specimen" the understanding is that it contains no infectious substance. However, both IATA and the US Postal Service (USPS) have these requirements for packaging exempt specimens: Packaging IssueIATAUSPSType of packaging requiredTriple packagingTriple packagingOuter containerOne dimension must be a minimum of 100 mm X 100 mm (approximately 4 x 4 inches) Must be able to survive a drop test of 4 feet One dimension must be a minimum of 100 mm X 100 mm (approximately 4 x 4 inches) Must be able to survive a drop test of 4 feet Quantity limits: outer containerNone NoneQuantity limits: Primary receptacleNone500 mLQuantity limits: secondary packagingNone500 mL* Non-regulated specimens may become regulated because of preservatives, such as 10% formaldehyde (class 9) or 25% formaldehyde (class 8); or 25% ethanol (class 3).

View Page
Exempt Specimen Packaging and Labeling

Although the specimens that were discussed on the previous page are not subject to the Division 6.2 requirements for packaging and labeling, it is important to remember that there are other packaging and labeling requirements that may apply, such as OSHA requirements included in the Bloodborne Pathogens Standard, healthcare facility requirements, and laboratory regulatory agency requirements, such as those of the Joint Commission and the College of American Pathologists. If the package is being sent by air or through the US mail, IATA and the USPS both require an exempt specimen to be labeled on the outer package as "Exempt Human Specimen," or "Exempt Animal Specimen." The DOT does not require this marking.

View Page
Classification Scenario 1

A blood specimen is collected from a patient that is suspected of having Hepatitis B. The specimen will be sent via commercial carrier (e.g., UPS) to a reference laboratory for further testing. What classification should be used for appropriate packaging and labeling? Work through the Classification Decision Tree.

View Page
Classification Scenario 2

A blood specimen is collected from a patient suspected of having Hepatitis B. The specimen will be taken to the testing laboratory by the laboratory's own courier service using an exclusive use motor vehicle. What classification should be used for appropriate packaging and labeling?Work through the Classification Decision Tree.

View Page
Classification Scenario 3

A blood sample collected from an outpatient, will be sent by ground using a carrier who follows DOT Regulations for classification of dangerous goods. The specimen is being sent to a reference laboratory for cholesterol screening. What classification should be used for appropriate packaging and labeling?Work through the Classification Decision Tree.

View Page
Classification Scenario 4

A culture of Mycobacterium tuberculosis is to be sent by commercial carrier to the Public Health Laboratory. What classification should be used for appropriate packaging and labeling? Work through the Classification Decision Tree.

View Page
Packaging Considerations

Several things need to be considered when you are determining how to package a laboratory specimen. These considerations include: Type of specimen Solid Liquid Classification Category A Category B Exempt Size of the specimen Temperature at which the specimen must be held during shipping Will dry ice be included in the package? The specimen components Does the specimen contain a preservative, such as formalin, that may be regulated? Mode of transportation Commercial ground Passenger air Cargo air Postal service Private or contract carrier using exclusive use motor vehicle

View Page
Shipper's Declaration For Dangerous Goods- First Section

The first section of the form contains your laboratory's name and address (Shipper), and the name of the laboratory or organization where the specimen is being sent (Consignee). If an Air Waybill is used, its number should also be included on this form.

View Page
Four scenarios will now be presented to evaluate your understanding of the material that has been presented on classifying, packaging, and labeling laboratory specimens for shipment. The scenarios are for your practice and will not be graded.Choose all the appropriate labels from the table below that must be used when packaging the substances described in the following scenarios:Scenario OneThree serum samples for hepatitis testing need to be sent via courier. The courier is an employee of your healthcare system. The specimens will be transported in a motor vehicle used exclusively for transporting specimens. What packaging labels are required? Choice Label Choice Label AGBH CIDJ EK FL View Page
A sputum specimen from a patient suspected of having tuberculosis is being sent by commercial ground carrier to a reference laboratory. The package does not require a refrigerant.Which of these labels must be used on the outer packaging? Choice Label Choice Label AGBH CIDJ EK FL View Page
References

International Air Transport Association. Guidance document: Dangerous Goods Regulations (DGR). 52nd ed. 2011.National Laboratory Training Network. Packaging and shipping Division 6.2 materials. Georgia Public Health Laboratory; 2011. Sentinel laboratory guidelines for suspected agents of bioterrorism: Clinical laboratory bioterrorism readiness plan. Available at: http://stanfordhospital.org/PDF/bioterrorism/labGuidelinesSuspectedAgentsBT.pdf. Accessed January 31, 2011.US Department of Transportation Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration. Transporting Infectious Substances Safely. Available at http://www.phmsa.dot.gov/staticfiles/PHMSA/DownloadableFiles/Files/Transporting_Infectious_Substances_brochure.pdf.

View Page

Parasitology Question Bank - Review Mode (no CE)
The avoidance of laboratory diagnosis techniques that utilize water is recommended for the identification of which of these parasites? View Page
Match each parasite listed here with the appropriate laboratory technique that may be used for its identification: Each answer may only be used once.View Page
The ideal stool sample for parasitic examination is one that is freshly collected and submitted to the laboratory at:View Page
Suppose that a stool sample was submitted to the laboratory for O & P examination. Macroscopic examination revealed a chalky-clay colored sample. If you were the alert clinical laboratory scientist on duty, which of the following would be the proper protocol would you follow in handling this sample?View Page
Suppose that a stool specimen was received in the laboratory for an O & P examination. The clinical laboratory scientist on duty performed direct wet preparations and found suspicious forms. An ethyl acetate concentration procedure was done, the top layer was examined, and no suspicious forms were seen. A slide of the sample was stained with Trichrome and again suspicious forms were noted. Which of the following is the most likely explanation for these discrepant results?View Page
A 44 year old female immigrant from Southeast Asia presented to the local clinic complaining of fever, chills, diarrhea and weakness. Patient history revealed that the woman worked in a research laboratory in her homeland. Her primary project was to develop an effective insecticide for the dreaded sandfly. The doctor decided to culture her blood for parasites. This form, measuring 14 µm, was recovered. The patient is most likely suffering from:View Page
A 65 year old Asian female presented to the emergency room exhibiting severe abdominal pain, fever and diarrhea. Examination revealed an enlarged liver that was tender to the touch. Patient history revealed that the woman worked in a fish processing plant for years prior to moving to the United States. Her diet was heavy in raw fish. Stool and duodenal contents were collected and sent to the laboratory for cultures and parasite examination. The cultures were unremarkable. This suspicious form was seen in both specimen types. It measures 27 µm by 14 µm. This patient is most likely suffering from:View Page
A fresh stool sample was submitted to the laboratory for parasitic examination on a 30 year old male who presented to a local clinic complaining of gastrointestinal discomfort and overall weakness. The only patient history available about the patient was that he was here job hunting and that he is originally from rural Mississippi. The sample was immediately processed and this suspicious form was seen. No other suspicious forms resembling eggs were seen. The patient is most likely infected with:View Page
A stool collected at a local doctor's office was received in the laboratory for parasitic examination. The sample was not received in fixative and due to the new courier system did not arrive in the lab within the traditionally acceptable time frame. Due to logistical difficulties of the patient collecting and submitting another sample, the laboratory director authorized the sample to be processed. The comment "specimen delayed in transit, please evaluate results accordingly" was included in the report. These two suspicious forms were seen upon examination of the specimen. Label these two forms:View Page
A stool was received in the laboratory for parasitic examination on a 49 year old female who just returned from missionary work in numerous third world countries around the world. The patient had been suffering from mild diarrhea over the past two weeks. These two suspicious forms were seen. Form 1 measures a mere 6 µm whereas form 2 measures 35 µm. Label these two forms:View Page

Pharmacology in the Clinical Lab: Therapeutic Drug Monitoring and Pharmacogenomics (retired 10/15/2012)
Introduction

Therapeutic drug monitoring and pharmacogenomics are both pharmacy-related areas within the clinical laboratory. Although each is considered a sub-discipline within laboratory medicine, the two fields overlap significantly. In this course, we will provide an overview of each of these laboratory sub-disciplines and discuss the utility, rationale, and practice of each one.

View Page
Laboratory Methods

Immunoassay is the most common technique used by clinical laboratories for therapeutic drug monitoring. Antibodies that recognize drugs can be developed. Although most drugs are much too small to evoke an immune response, scientists can conjugate drugs to immunogenic proteins to produce antibodies that recognize drug-specific epitopes. There are several methods that utilize the principals of immunoassay for detection and quantification of therapeutic drugs in serum. Some of these methods are: Particle-enhanced turbidimetric inhibition immunoassay (PETINIA) Fluorescence Polarization Immunoassay (FPIA) Chemiluminescent assays

View Page
Clinical Utility

The ultimate goal in measuring CYP450 function or identifying polymorphisms is to predict effective therapeutic doses and responses in patients.Polymorphisms are identified using molecular techniques (allele-specific PCR, restriction digests, sequencing, hybridization assays, bead-based systems, microarrays, pyrosequencing, et al).Although most clinical labs do not offer PGx testing, reference labs are beginning to market these tests. For example, one reference laboratory in the Midwest that offers CYP2D6 profiling measures about one dozen of the most common and significant mutation sites on this enzyme. This allows for detection of approximately 98% of the known CYP2D6 polymorphisms. The laboratory then generates a report which will advise the physician on the patient's drug-metabolizing status.Estimates show that 6-10% of the general population have a complete deficiency of CYP2D6, with the prevalence of mutations varying from <1% to as much as 21% within a given population.

View Page
Genotype versus Phenotype

Phenotyping involves measuring the metabolism of a probe drug. For example, with CYP2D6, dextromethorphan or debrisoquine can be given to a patient to see how well the drug is metabolized. Both these drugs are safe and extensively metabolized by CYP2D6. By measuring the parent drug and the metabolite in urine, the metabolic capacity of a CYP450 enzyme can be estimated. Such testing is complex and tedious, however, and has not become routine in clinical laboratories. Therefore, genotyping is likely to be the main tool that is used for assessing the PGx of a patient.

View Page

Phlebotomy
Case

James Brown, a phlebotomist from the laboratory went to the second floor of Memorial Hospital to draw a STAT BMP (chem-8), CBC, and PT on a patient. The patient was in critical condition so the lab results were crucial for treatment. James quickened his pace in order to speed up the result time. He collected the specimens and took them back to the lab. However, the technologist in hematology and coagulation notified him that he would need to recollect the specimen because the CBC and PT were clotted.

View Page
Case

A phlebotomist from the laboratory at Midtown Memorial Hospital was working evening shift. Her shift ended at 11 PM and it was 10:30 PM. She suddenly got orders for a STAT blood culture on the second floor. The order specified blood culture times two, 30 minutes apart. The phlebotomist went to the patient's room and decided to collect both blood cultures at the same time form the same site so she would be able to leave on time without having to come back in thirty minutes to collect the second set. She also wanted to "save" the patient from an extra stick. While the phlebotomist was preparing for the collection, she realized she didn't have any Betadine on her tray, and decided she would just clean the site twice with alcohol. She finished the blood culture collections and was able to leave by 11 PM.

View Page
Unsatisfactory specimens

Poor and unsatisfactory specimens pose significant problems : They can cause misleading laboratory results.Unsatisfactory specimens must be rejected by the laboratory. The patient must then undergo another venipuncture to get a better specimen. It costs time & money to redraw the specimen.The credibility of the laboratory is reduced if too many unsatisfactory specimens are drawn.

View Page
Labeling errors

Labeling errors are the most common cause of incorrect laboratory results.If detected, the incorrectly labeled specimen will be rejected.If undetected, it will produce incorrect results which might adversely affect your patient's care.

View Page
What is a phlebotomist's role in a health care facility?

The phlebotomist collects blood & other specimens which ultimately provide doctors and nurses with laboratory test information critical to patient care.He or she therefore plays a vital role in any health care system.

View Page
Laboratory work-flow cycle

The work flow of any medical laboratory involves these basic steps: Physician orders lab tests. Order is received in lab. Work list and labels generated by lab. Phlebotomist is dispatched to patient.

View Page
Work-flow cycle: patient ID to specimen processing

Phlebotomist positively identifies patient. Phlebotomist draws and labels blood specimen. Specimen is transported to laboratory. Specimen is accessioned and processed in lab.

View Page
Work-flow cycle: test performance to treatment

Laboratory performs analytical tests. Lab results are returned to physician. Physician treats patient based on results of lab tests.

View Page
Laboratory work-flow cycle: phlebotomist role

As a professional phlebotomist, you have a critical role in this basic work-flow cycle. The rest of this program contains the information you need to begin training in this important profession.

View Page

Preliminary Identification of the Primary Select Agents of Bioterrorism
Development of the Laboratory Response Network (LRN)

The Laboratory Response Network (LRN) was created under presidential directive as part of the government bioterrorism response program. The initial partners included the Centers for Disease Control (CDC), Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI), and the Association of Public Health Laboratories (APHL). The LRN became operational in 1999. Due to limited ability to respond to a bioterrorism event, the initial objective was to improve the nation's public health laboratory infrastructure.

View Page
Purpose of the Laboratory Response Network (LRN)

Today, the Laboratory Response Network (LRN) is a multi-level network of local, state, federal, and military laboratories across the United States and internationally which work together in an integrated and coordinated way to provide a rapid response to public health emergencies. The LRN concept of operations is based on a system of safety and proficiency.Some of the goals of the LRN are to: Establish standardized protocols used for the identification of pathogens that carry a high consequence Provide guidance for safe and effective handling of suspected threat agents Serve as a source of expert advice for agents of concern Identify threat agents using complex molecular methods

View Page
Which of the following is NOT a function of the Laboratory Response Network (LRN)?View Page
Select Agents of Bioterrorism

The United States government has determined a list of select agents that include the bacteria, viruses, fungi, and toxins that have the potential to cause a severe threat to public health and safety if used in a bioterrorist attack.This course will primarily focus on sentinel laboratory procedures used to rule out the bacterial organisms that are part of the select agents list, as well as provide information regarding some of the viral and biological toxins.

View Page
Definition of a Sentinel Laboratory

Laboratories within the LRN are divided into 3 levels: Sentinel labs Reference labs National labsAny laboratory that performs microbial analysis is by default a sentinel laboratory. A laboratory that refers specimens that may contain microbial agents or toxins is also a sentinel laboratory. These laboratories are the first responders in the line of defense. Based on the extent of service provided, sentinel laboratories are designated as basic or advanced.

View Page
Role of a Sentinel Laboratory

The role of a sentinel laboratory is to utilize standardized testing protocols to rule-out critical biological agents and refer them to one of the Laboratory Response Network (LRN) reference laboratories, such as public health laboratories, for confirmation. In the event that a potential agent of bioterrorism is suspected, the appropriate internal staff should be notified and then contact your LRN reference laboratory. The sentinel laboratory should NOT: Make the decision that a bioterrorism event has occurred Contact law enforcement or public health officialsSentinel laboratories are divided into basic and advanced categories based on the level of diagnostic testing performed. Advanced sentinel laboratories have greater capability to analyze specimens that may contain an agent of bioterrorism than a basic level laboratory would have.

View Page
Role of Reference and National Laboratories Within the Laboratory Response Network (LRN)

A reference laboratory within the LRN performs tests to detect and confirm (rule-in) the presence of a threat agent. These labs ensure a timely local response in the event of a terrorist incident. Rather than having to rely on confirmation from laboratories at the Centers for Disease Control (CDC), reference laboratories are capable of producing conclusive results. This allows local authorities to respond quickly to emergencies. A national laboratory is the highest level within the LRN. Examples would include those operated by CDC, the United States Army Medical Research Institute for Infectious Diseases, and the Naval Medical Research Center. These laboratories have very unique resources to handle highly infectious agents and the ability to identify specific agent strains.

View Page
What is the role of a sentinel laboratory within the Laboratory Response Network (LRN)?View Page
Basic Sentinel Laboratory within the Laboratory Response Network (LRN)

A basic sentinel laboratory has the following characteristics: Certified by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS) for subspecialty within the specialty of microbiology Accredited by Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments of 1988 (CLIA) or a deemed status agency Has policies and procedures in place for the referral of diagnostic specimens to an advanced sentinel laboratory Has policies and procedures in place for the direct referral of suspicious isolates to an appropriate LRN reference laboratory

View Page
Advanced Sentinel Laboratory within the Laboratory Response Network (LRN)

An advanced sentinel laboratory has the characteristics of a basic sentinel laboratory. In addition, they must:Be certified by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS) as a high complexity laboratory performing the specialty of microbiologyHave a class II or higher certified biosafety cabinet (BSC) Comply with biosafety level II (BSL-2) practices Have policies and procedures in place for the use of fit-tested respiratory equipment

View Page
Any laboratory that analyzes microbes or refers specimens that have the potential to contain microbial agents or toxins is a sentinel laboratory.View Page
Protocols

The American Society for Microbiology (ASM) has developed standardized guidelines in coordination with the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Association of Public Health Laboratories (APHL). These protocols should be integrated into the standard operating procedures of any sentinel laboratory. The purpose is to provide the algorithms used to rule out suspected critical agents of bioterrorism and to refer the specimens to public health laboratories for confirmation. The protocols are available to sentinel laboratories at: http://www.asm.org/index.php/policy/sentinel-level-clinical-microbiology-laboratory-guidelines.html

View Page
Where can sentinel laboratory staff find the standardized testing protocols?View Page
Sentinel Laboratory Safety Protocols

Recommendations for establishing the necessary laboratory safety protocols can be found in Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories 5th Edition, available online at:http://www.cdc.gov/biosafety/publications/bmbl5/BMBL.pdf

View Page
Agent Biosafety Level (BSL) Requirements and Laboratory Exposure Risk

These agents are dangerous, highly virulent organisms that should NEVER be manipulated on an open bench! Laboratory infections can occur and the use of a class II, or higher, biological safety cabinets (BSC) is critical when aerosols are likely. The importance of following facility specific safety protocols and standard microbiology practices at ALL times cannot be understated. Agent Biosafety Level Laboratory Exposure Risk B. anthracis BSL-2 Low Y. pestis BSL-2 Medium F. tularensis BSL-2/3 High Brucella species BSL-2/3 High Burkholderia species BSL-2/3 High

View Page
A class II, or higher, biological safety cabinet (BSC) must be used when manipulating potential bioterrorism agents or if aerosols are likely.View Page
Bacillus anthracis

Clinical specimens where organism may be encountered: CSF Blood Stool (rare) Vesicle fluid, skin swab, or biopsy Gram stain morphology from clinical specimens: Large, gram-positive rods with square or concave ends in short chains Spores are usually NOT present Capsule may be viewed in smears from infected tissue, but this is NOT reliable Gram stain morphology from culture material: Large, gram-positive rods with square or concave ends, often in long chains (more than 2-4 cells) Cells easily decolorize as the culture ages Does NOT form capsules in culture Central to sub-terminal, oval spores, with NO significant swelling of the cell It must be noted that spore production increases with the age of the culture. Do NOT keep these cultures in the laboratory for longer than 24 hours for this reason!

View Page
Brucella species

Brucella is a dangerous, highly virulent organism and the aerosols are highly infectious. It is the MOST common cause of laboratory-associated bacterial infections. Laboratory acquired cases have occurred by aerosol generating procedures, direct skin contact with cultures, and by sniffing cultures. It should NOT be manipulated on an open bench.Catalase: Brucella is catalase positive. Catalase testing MUST be performed with extreme caution in a biosafety cabinet (BSC) due to the creation of aerosols. Oxidase: PositiveBeta-lactamase: PositiveUrease: PositiveXV factors: Not required for growth (satellite phenomenon with S. aureus is negative)Serological testing: Often used because so difficult to grow. An acute and convalescent phase specimen should be collected 21 days apart.

View Page
Bacillus anthrasis

Any isolate with the following features should be immediately referred to your LRN reference laboratory: Gram stain shows large, gram-positive rods with sub-terminal or central spores (if present) Gray colonies with a ground glass appearance Non-hemolytic on sheep blood agar (SBA) Tenacious or "sticky" colonies like petroleum jelly Catalase positive Non-motile

View Page
Yersinia pestis

Any isolate with the following features should be immediately referred to your LRN reference laboratory: Gram stain shows fat, gram-negative rods in single or short chains that may demonstrate bipolar staining Faster growth at 25oC Gray-white, translucent colonies on sheep blood agar (SBA) at 24 hours that turn slightly yellow and opaque at 48 hours Irregular colonies that have a "fried egg" and/or "hammered copper" appearance after 48-72 hours Catalase positive Oxidase negative Urea negative Indole negative

View Page
Francisella tularensis

Any isolate with the following features should be immediately referred to your LRN reference laboratory: Gram stain shows tiny, weak staining, gram-negative coccobacilli Gray-white, opaque colonies on sheep blood agar (SBA) and chocolate (CHOC) agar a at 48 hours Slow growth in broth (up to three weeks) Oxidase negative Urea negative

View Page
Brucella species

Any isolate with the following features should be immediately referred to your LRN reference laboratory: Gram stain demonstrates tiny, faintly staining gram-negative organisms that may stain gram-positive Slow growing, convex, non-hemolytic, non-pigmented colonies Catalase positive Oxidase positive Urea positive

View Page
When following sentinel laboratory procedures and protocols, any isolate that cannot be ruled out as one of the select agents should be immediately referred to your LRN reference laboratory.View Page
Toxins

Toxin Comment Most Likely Means of Dissemination Primary Route of Entry General Signs and Symptoms Laboratory Testing Botulism toxin: Gram stained image of C. botulinum courtesy of CDC Produced by Clostridium botulinum Could be purified and used in a bioterrorist event to contaminate food or aerosolized to cause disease Aerosol Food contamination Inhalation Ingestion Difficulty speaking or swallowing Blurred or double vision Drooping eyelids (ptosis) Dilated pupils Dry mouth, decreased gag reflex Weakening of the reflexes (hyporeflexia) Abnormal sensations such as numbness, tingling, and progressive arm or leg weakness Flaccid paralysis Culture, anaerobic Digoxigen-labeled IgG ELISA to detect A, B, E, and F toxins Mouse Bioassay for all toxin types and to confirm DIG ELISA Ricin toxin: Extracted from Castor beans Inhibits protein synthesis Causes death approximately 72 hours after initial exposure As an aerosol Inhalation Fever Cough Chest tightness Dyspnea Cyanosis Gastroenteritis Necrosis Antibody detection in clinical specimens Clinical testing not performed unless known exposure has occurred

View Page
Role of a Sentinel Laboratory Regarding Toxins and Viruses

Always follow your facilities procedures and contact your Laboratory Response Network (LRN) reference laboratory for guidance with regard to the toxins and viruses that may be used as bioterrorism agents. A sentinel laboratory should NOT attempt to: Accept or process environmental or animal samples Culture from clinical specimens or detect for these agents Collect specimens for suspect viruses unless directed by a public health officialThe laboratory testing listed on the following pages is intended ONLY as information. For suspect specimen collection, contact your LRN reference laboratory for guidance before collecting or referring specimens.

View Page
A sentinel laboratory should NOT accept orprocess environmental or animal samples or culture clinical specimens for viruses or toxins that are potential agents of bioterrorism.View Page
Location Where Organisms Naturally Occur, Disease Produced, and Mode of Transmission

These organisms can be encountered outside of a bioterrorism event and produce human disease. It's important to be familiar with the geographic areas where these organisms naturally occur and the how disease is transmitted.Bacillus anthracis: Bacillus species inhabit the soil, water, and airborne dust. Anthrax is the disease produced, which is transmitted to humans via direct contact with infected herbivorous animals. This is where the disease is primarily encountered. Anthrax is controlled in animals in the United States, so the disease is rare. In humans, most cases are cutaneous infections found in people that handle animals and animal products, including veterinarians and agricultural workers. Anthrax is consistently present in the animal population of some geographical regions, such as Iran and Pakistan, but only small numbers of animals experience the disease at any given time. Yersinia pestis: Y. pestis is found primarily in rodents, but can also be found in several animal species, such as cats, rabbits, camels, squirrels. Animal to human transmission most commonly occurs via a flea bite, causing the most common form of the disease known as the bubonic plague. Human-to-human transmission occurs by either flea bite or respiratory droplets. This causes an overwhelming disease known as pneumonic plague, which is the most likely form that would be implicated in the event of a bioterrorist attack. Human cases of the plague continue to occur in many countries, including Africa, the southwestern United States, parts of Asia, and the former Soviet Union. Francisella tularensis: Many animals, including rodents, rabbits, deer, and raccoons act as host for this organism. Humans and domesticated animals, such as horses, cattle, cats, and dogs can become infected. The infection is transmitted to domesticated animals by ticks and biting flies. Humans are most commonly infected from the bite of an infected tick or fly. Other means of infection include direct contact with the blood of infected animals when skinning game, eating contaminated meat, drinking contaminated water, or inhaling the organisms produced by aerosols. F. tularensis carries a high risk of laboratory acquired infection and documented cases of infection have occurred. Most cases of tularemia are reported in the southern and south-central United States.

View Page
Location Where Organisms Naturally Occur, Disease Produced, and Mode of Transmission, continued:

Brucella species: Brucella is distributed in nature worldwide and found in domesticated and wild animals, such as cattle, sheep, and pigs. Infection with Brucella species, known as brucellosis, is caused in humans by exposure to infected animal fluids or food products. This includes ingesting non-pasteurized dairy products, such as milk or cheese, inhaling aerosols, and skin contact with the fluids of infected animals. Brucellosis poses an increased risk of occupational exposure to laboratory, veterinary, and slaughterhouse workers. Brucella is the most commonly reported laboratory-associated bacterial infection.Burkholderia mallei and B. pseudomallei: Most Burkholderia are found in soil, but B. mallei is only found in mammals. B.mallei is the causative agent for Glanders which primarily affects animals such as donkeys, mules, and horses. Horses, the organism's natural host, are highly susceptible to infection. Human infection is rare and usually occurs in people working with infected animals or laboratory workers handling the organism. The organism is endemic in Africa, Asia, the Middle East, and Central and South America, and usually enters via the eyes, nose, mouth, abrasions or cuts in the skin, or through inhalation. B. pseudomallei is found in soil and water and can accidentally infect animals, plants, and rarely humans. It is the causative agent of melioidosis, which is endemic in areas of southeast Asia, Taiwan, and northern Australia. The organism generally enters through cuts in the skin, ingestion of contaminated water, or by inhalation of an aerosol.

View Page
Match the organism to the disease produced outside a bioterrorism event.View Page
References

American Society for Microbiology. Sentinel Level Clinical Microbiology Laboratory Guidelines. Available at: http://www.asm.org/index.php/guidelines/sentinel-guidelines. Accessed on April 12, 2013.Association of Public Health Laboratories web site. LRN Sentinel Laboratories Clinical. Available at: http://www.aphl.org/aphlprograms/preparedness-and-response/Documents/LRN_Sentinel_Clinical.pdf. Accessed on October 29, 2012.Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Laboratory Information for Bioterrorism Emergencies. Available at: http://emergency.cdc.gov/bioterrorism/lab.asp. Accessed August 16, 2011.Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Laboratory Network for Biological Terrorism. Available at: http://emergency.cdc.gov/lrn/biological.asp. Accessed August 16, 2011.Klietmann WF, Ruoff KL. Clincal Microbiology Reviews: Bioterrorism: Implications for the Clinical Microbiologist. American Society for Microbiology; April 2001 p. 364-381, Vol. 14, No. 2. Available at: http://cmr.asm.org/cgi/content/full/14/2/364. Accessed August 16, 2011.Snyder JW. Role of the Hospital-Based Microbiology Laboratory in Preparation for and Response to a Bioterrorism Event. J Clin Microbiol; 2003 41(1): 1–4. Available at: http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC149646/. Accessed August 16, 2011. Winn WC Jr, Allen SD, Janda WM, Koneman EW, Procop G, Schreckenberger PC, Woods G. Koneman's Color Atlas and Textbook of Diagnostic Microbiology. 6th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins; 2006.

View Page
Considerations When Using Automated Identification Systems

It is important to consider that commercial identification systems may misidentify the bioterrorism threat agents. There is an increased risk of incorrect identification for organisms that are: Slow growing Fastidious Limited in the number of strains available in the database It is also important to note that automated systems can create aerosols, which increases the possibility of laboratory exposure to these pathogens.

View Page

Quality Control
What is Quality Control?

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision. Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct. Quality control applies not only to specimen testing, but also to collection, storage, and transportation.

View Page
Assayed and Unassayed Controls

Assayed controls have been analyzed by the manufacturer so that the range of values for the analytes they contain is known. Unassayed controls are unknowns. The laboratory purchasing the controls must determine the concentration of each analyte.

View Page
Calibration Curve

Standards are also used to determine the linearity of the testing instrument. This is done by plotting a calibration or standard curve. Most testing instruments must be operated within a linear range. The Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) defines linearity as "the measure of the degree to which a curve approximates a straight line.The examples to the right show linearity because a change along the x-axis shows a corresponding change along the y-axis, whether the x-value is low or high.

View Page
External Quality Control

External quality control (also called proficiency testing or PT) evaluates a laboratory's testing results by comparing them to those of similar laboratories. Specially prepared specimens are obtained by multiple laboratories participating in the proficiency testing program.These "unknowns" are then tested by the participating laboratories and results are returned to the proficiency testing program. For external quality control, the laboratory must use its routine testing methods.

View Page
External Quality Control, continued

Validated material for the different testing areas in a laboratory (such as chemistry, hematology, and microbiology) are provided several times a year. Participating laboratories test the specimens and return results to the proficiency testing source. The laboratory's performance is then evaluated using the comparative method mean as the target value plus or minus a defined limit. In general, the evaluation report will show:number of laboratories comprising the peer groupcomparative mean of the group for that particular analyte the laboratory's performance compared to the peer group whether the performance was satisfactory or unsatisfactory

View Page
Levey-Jennings Control Charts

Daily documentation and evaluation of quality control is vital to detection of errors. One of the most commonly used methods for documentation is the Levey-Jennings control chart (L-J chart). In 1931, Dr. Walter Shewhart, a scientist at the Bell Telephone Laboratories, proposed the application of statistical-based control charts to monitor industrial manufacturing processes. In 1950, S. Levey and E.R. Jennings applied Dr. Shewhart's control charts to the clinical laboratory.

View Page
CUSUM Example: Plotting Control Data

To illustrate the use of CUSUM in the laboratory, we'll use daily control values for glucose testing. In the example laboratory, testing is not performed on weekends, explaining the lack of data on days 1, 7, and 8.First, we'll list daily control values under "daily results." Then, we'll calculate mean by using formula A. Next, we can find the difference from the mean for each result, and square that result for the two relevant columns. Using all of the squared differences from the mean, we can find the standard deviation using formula B. Using the mean from formula A and the standard deviation calculations from formulas B and C, we can plot our data points on the Levey-Jennings chart. Formula D helps us calculate the coefficient of variation (CV), which expresses SD as a percentage of mean value and is more reliable for comparing precision at different concentration levels. The lower the CV the greater the precision.

View Page
Verification of Performance Specifications for Nonwaived Testing

On April 24, 2003, the Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments (CLIA) Final Rules went into effect.As of that date, each laboratory that introduces a nonwaived, unmodified, FDA-cleared or approved test system must do the following before reporting patient test results: Demonstrate that it can obtain performance specifications comparable to those established by the manufacturer for the following performance characteristics: Accuracy. Precision. Reportable range of test results for the test system. Verify that the manufacturer's reference intervals (normal values) are appropriate for the laboratory's patient population.

View Page
Verification for Nonwaived Testing

Laboratories that do nonwaived testing must verify that they can obtain performance specifications comparable to those established by the manufacturer. Generally this can be accomplished by doing split sample comparison studies with another laboratory to estimate any inaccuracy or bias, plus linearity studies to estimate imprecision and determine the reportable range. The laboratory can do studies to determine its own reference ranges or the laboratory director can document that the manufacturer's ranges are appropriate. For those laboratories doing nonwaived tests that have been modified or developed in-house, additional verification studies are required.

View Page
A laboratory developing a new testing procedure runs the test on 1,000 patients. Later confirmation shows that the experimental procedure produced remarkably few false-negative results, but many false-positive results. Which of the following statements is true regarding the experimental procedure?View Page
What is internal quality control?View Page
Match the type of quality control to the benefits it provides.View Page
A Quality Control Exercise

For this problem, you may need to work off-line. After you have evaluated the data on the following page, return to the course and answer the accompanying questions. Problem You are the only full-time employee at a small clinic's laboratory. You use an assayed control for your glucose determinations. The manufacturer's printed values for the present lot number are: Level 1 Control Mean: 72 mg/dL Standard deviation: +/- 2 mg/dL Level 2 Control Mean: 281 mg/dL Standard deviation: +/- 12 mg/dL The table on the next page shows the control results for the first twelve days of testing for the month. Plot your QC results on a Levey-Jennings chart and evaluate your data.

View Page

Reading and Reporting Gram Stained Direct Smears
Gram-negative Bacilli

Most bacteria that are encountered in the clinical microbiology laboratory will be gram-negative bacilli. Gram-negative bacilli include the Enterobacteriaceae, nonfermentative bacilli, Haemophilus species, and several fastidious species. Gram-negative bacilli can be observed in this field.

View Page
References

Morris AJ, Tanner DC, Reller LB. Rejection criteria for endotracheal aspirates from adults. J Clin Microbiol. 1993;31:1027-1028.Murray PR, Baron EJ, Jorgensen JH, Landry ML, Pfaller MA, eds. Manual of Clinical Microbiology. 9th ed. Washington, DC: ASM Press; 2007. Thomson RB, Peterson L. Microbiolology laboratory diagnosis of pulmonary infections. In Niederman MS, Sarosi GA, Glassroth G, eds. Respiratory Infections. 2nd ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins; 2001:541-549.Winn, WC Jr. Koneman's Color Atlas and Textbook of Diagnostic Microbiology. 6th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: 2006.

View Page

Real-Time PCR
PCR Introduction

Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) is a molecular diagnostic tool that allows for in vitro amplification of DNA at a rapid pace. The steps of PCR are: denaturation, annealing, and extension. DNA doubles during each PCR cycle, resulting in exponential accumulation of the targeted DNA fragment. The ability to rapidly amplify a specific nucleic acid sequence in a short period of time has revolutionized molecular diagnostics. A major advantage of PCR is that only a small amount of initial intact genomic DNA is required. PCR can be effective with only a single strand of intact DNA. This is often critical for forensic analysis where only trace amounts of DNA are available. PCR has also been used to amplify and analyze ancient DNA for anthropologic and archeological purposes. PCR augments many common laboratory methods such as Southern and northern blotting. These techniques require a large amount of DNA. PCR can be used to supply these techniques with the needed amounts of specific DNA. PCR can also be incorporated into DNA sequencing and genetic fingerprinting.

View Page
DNA Primers

The DNA sequences that flank either side of the genomic DNA of interest must be known for PCR to be successful. Synthesized oligodeoxynucleotides, known as primers, are short DNA fragments that range in size form 20 to 30 base pairs. The primers are complementary to the sequences flanking either side of the desired DNA region. Primers can either be purchased or produced in the laboratory.

View Page
Automated Vs. Manual Extraction

In clinical laboratories today, DNA and RNA are isolated and extracted through both manual and automated techniques.Manual extraction requires many different manipulations to the sample, which increases the risk of contamination. It is also considered high complexity testing so not every laboratory professional is capable of performing this process. Another downside to manual extraction is that the process is extremely time consuming and requires the undivided attention of the technician performing the procedure. Automated extraction has many benefits over the traditional manual methods. The most important benefit is the consistency of the isolated nucleic acid. Manipulation of the sample and reagents is reduced, which dramatically decreases the chance of cross-contamination. Also, automated extraction instruments are considered moderate complexity so that testing can be performed by a greater number of laboratory professionals. Though automated extraction instruments have many benefits over manual methods, the cost per test is high and generally requires a high throughput of samples in order to justify the expense.

View Page
Advantages of Real-Time PCR

Though both standard PCR and real-time PCR follow a similar procedure, there are many advantages to real-time PCR. One of the primary advantages of real-time PCR is the ability to identify amplified fragments during the PCR process. Real-time PCR measures the amount of the product during the exponential phase whereas standard PCR measures product during the plateau phase. It is more effective to measure during the exponential phase because measurements taken during the plateau phase do not always clearly indicate the quantity of starting material. Standard PCR requires post-PCR analysis, possibly agarose gel electrophoresis; it identifies the product either by size or sequence. Though running gel electrophoresis is relatively inexpensive, it is time-consuming and non-automated. It is also low in specificity, since molecules of the same or similar weights cannot be easily differentiated. Gel electrophoresis alone is not suitable for endpoint analysis for most laboratory purposes. The use of probe hybridization is often used for characterization of the product by its sequence. Though this method is more reliable and informative, it is time-consuming and expensive. ELISA detections are also time-consuming. Real-time PCR eliminates these needs. Amplicon recognition is achieved by monitoring the accumulation of specific products during each cycle.Another advantage of real-time PCR over standard PCR is that the entire process from amplification to analysis is performed in the same tube. This differs from standard PCR where the PCR product is moved and manipulated into other formats. As a result, there is a decreased possibility of contaminating the product with real-time PCR methods.

View Page
Laboratory Applications

There are numerous applications for real-time PCR in the laboratory for both diagnostic and research purposes. Diagnostic applicationsReal-time PCR can rapidly detect nucleic acids that are diagnostic of infectious diseases, cancers, and genetic abnormalities. Real-time PCR has allowed for viral quantitation of infectious and newly emerging diseases such as influenza A H1N1 subtype. In malignant diseases, real-time PCR can be performed directly on genomic DNA to detect translocation-specific malignant cells. For RNA samples, real-time PCR has become extremely important for the detection and monitoring of HIV, hepatitis C and CMV. Real-time PCR can also be used for array verification and drug therapy efficacy. Research applicationsIn a research setting, real-time PCR is primarily used to measure gene transcription. The technology is commonly used to determine genetic expression of a particular gene over time in response to different pharmacologic agents or environmental conditions and can also be used to compare gene expression in exposed and unexposed individuals. The use of real-time PCR in this manner can help researchers find and detect diagnostic or prognostic indicators to increase the understanding of disease pathogenesis.

View Page
References

Dimmock NJ, Easton AJ, Leppard KN. Introduction to Modern Virology. 6th ed. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing; 2007.Foxman B. Molecular Tools and Infectious Disease Epidemiology. San Diego, CA: Elsevier; 2011. Kaplan LA, Amadeo JP. Clinical Chemistry:Theory, Analysis, Correlation. 5th ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby-Elsevier; 2010.Logan J, Edwards K, Saunders N. Real-Time PCR: Current Technology and Applications. Norfolk, UK: Caister Academic Press; 2009. Ream W, Gellar B, Trempy J, Field K. Molecular Microbiology Laboratory: A Writing-Intensive Course. Boston, MA: Academic Press; 2003. Turgeon ML. Immunology & Serology in LaboratoryMedicine. 3rd ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby Elsevier; 2003.Walker JM, Rapley, R. Molecular Biology and Biotechnology. Cambridge: The Royal Society of Chemistry; 2009.

View Page
Conclusion

The invention of PCR and real-time PCR has lead to many major scientific advances. Though both methods are still regularly used in laboratories, real-time PCR is gaining popularity and quickly becoming the most cost- and time-effective method for analyzing DNA products.The use of real-time PCR expands to many areas of the clinical laboratory including genetics, virology, and microbiology. The uses mentioned throughout this course are only a small sampling of the many different applications in which this technology is used. With more real-time PCR platforms and practices being created, the growth and potential of this technology is just beginning. However, the concept and process will stay the same and it is important for laboratory professionals to understand and learn about this technology.

View Page

Red Cell Disorders: Peripheral Blood Clues to Nonneoplastic Conditions
References

Glassy, Eric F.,(Ed). Color Atlas of Hematology: An Illustrated Field Guide Based on Proficiency Testing. 1998. College of American Pathologists Hematology and Cliical Microbiology Research Committee. College of American Pathologists, Northfield, IL 60093-2750.Hookey,L., Dexter, D., Lee,D. H. The Use and Interpretation Of Quantative Terminology In Reporting Red Blood Cell Morphology. Laboratory Hematology 7:85-88, 2001.Peterson P, Blomberg DJ, Rabinovitch A, Cornbleet PJ. Physician Review of the Peripheral Blood Smear: When and Why. For the Hematology and Clinical Microscopy Resource Committee of the College of American Pathologists. Laboratory Hematology 7:175-179, 2001

View Page
A blood smear represented by the photograph was submitted for hematologic review. Based on the erythrocyte morphology and the accompanying histogram, which of the following choices is the most likely situation or condition?View Page
Criteria for Peripheral Blood Smear Review

When an Initial analysis of red blood cells (RBCs) from an automated instrument are found to be abnormal, many laboratories will microscopically evaluate the peripheral blood morphology of the RBCs. This important step can help to establish which, if any, abnormalities are present as well as correlate possible disease states or conditions associated with the findings. Most laboratories will employ guidelines for review of the peripheral blood smear for RBC morphology. Though each laboratory will create their own guidelines, the following are a few examples that could trigger a manual, microscopic peripheral blood smear review:Hemoglobin: < 8 or >18 g/dL (<10 or > 21g/dL in a newborn)Hematocrit: <20% or > 60% in adults (<40% or >65% in a newborn)MCHC: <29 g/dLMCV: <69 femtoliters (fl) or >110flFlags generated by the hematology analyzer that indicate possible red cell abnormalities or spurious results In most laboratories, when these findings are noted, they should be followed up with a peripheral blood smear review for RBC morphology.

View Page
Introduction to Red Blood Cell Morphology Reporting

After an automated complete blood count (CBC) analysis has determined that abnormal RBC morphology may be present, a well-made and well-stained peripheral blood smear should be prepared. When a peripheral blood smear is made for the purpose of evaluating RBC morphology, accurate recognition and identification of RBC morphologic abnormalities can be an invaluable aid in the diagnosis of a variety of disorders. It is important to understand that red blood cell morphology report formats tend to vary widely among laboratories. Despite the standardization of many laboratory technologies and test result formats, there are still various protocols in use in the area of red cell morphology reporting. Current methods of reporting and quantifying red cell morphology include descriptive terms such as 'rare,' 'occasional,' 'many,' 'slight,' or 'moderate,' as well as numerical gradings of 1+, 2+, 3+, etc. Regardless of the terminology used, consistency is of greater importance. There must be a defined, semi-quantitative scheme that dictates how many cells with a specific morphologic abnormality qualify as "rare" or "many," and so on. The report format must be clear and useful to the physician. Some morphologic abnormalities are quite specific and diagnostic, but others are ambiguous and of little diagnostic significance.A well-defined, semi-quantitative report format for RBC morphology should be based on clinical significance. Some morphologic abnormalities are significant, even when they occur in very low numbers. These include:SchistocytesSickle cellsAcanthocytesSpherocytesTeardrop cellsPolychromatophilic cells Other morphologic abnormalities are significant only when seen in considerable numbers. These include:MacrocytesMicrocytesOvalocytesBurr cells (echinocytes)Target cellsStomatocytesHypochromic cells A final category includes morphologic abnormalities that do not need to be quantified as it serves no purpose; these findings can be noted as "present." These include RBC agglutinationRouleauxDimorphic or double red cell populationAn example of a standardized reporting format is given on the following page.

View Page
A ten-year-old boy came to a physician's attention because of recent jaundice and icteric sclerae after taking the medication Primaquine before a trip to Africa. The immediate laboratory work revealed: Hct 24%(normal 36%-47%), MCV 79.5 fl (normal 78-95fl),RDW 13%(normal 11.5-15.0%). His blood smear findings are reflected in the images to the right. The upper image is a Wright-Giemsa stained smear while the lower is a supravital-stained smear. Which condition should be considered for this patient when analyzing his symptoms, history, and laboratory results?View Page
A teenage boy is visiting his doctor uder the suspicion of a viral illness. He has always been relatively healthy without many illness-related complaints. The doctor decides to order a laboratory workup including a complete blood count. A peripheral blood smear is reviewed. The image on the right is a representative field, with a predominance of the arrowed cells throughout the smear. Which of the following conditions would be most consistent with this patient's history and peripheral blood picture?View Page
Dimorphic (Double Cell) Population

Dimorphic is a term used to describe two circulating red cell populations. One is the patient's basic red cell population while the other is a second population with distinct morphological features. The distinct populations can be observed in the top image on the right. The bottom image on the right illustrates the two distinct peaks that are observed on the RBC histogram from the automated hematology analyzer.Dimorphic red blood cell populations can be found in conditions/situations such as: red blood cell transfusions, myelodysplasia, refractory anemia with ringed sideroblasts, hemolytic processes involving a reticulocyte response, and when patients are given erythropoietin therapy.It is important to recognize when a population of cells in the peripheral smear is not in context with anticipated laboratory findings and the clinical situation.

View Page

Red Cell Morphology
Summary

It is important to differentiate in vitro changes, which are secondary to preparing the slide, from in vivo morphology, which is the result of the pathophysiological condition of the patient. Examining erythrocytes in the critical viewing area is extremely important in making this distinction. The determination of the clinical significance of the morphology reported is the responsibility of the physician, who must correlate the blood smear findings with other laboratory parameters and with the clinical picture.

View Page
Acanthocytes, continued

Acanthocytes can also be seen in this slide. Alcoholic cirrhosis is the most common source of acanthocytes seen in blood smears in the laboratory (10-50%). Other sources are lipid disorders and a small number following splenectomy.

View Page

Rh negative female with anti-D at delivery: A case study
Case Presentation

Patient A.D., a 30 year old female, was admitted to the hospital in active labor to deliver at 37 weeks gestation. Transfusion service (TS) records showed A.D. to be group O Rh negative with no record of unexpected red cell antibodies.Maternal history showed two prior pregnancies. Her first pregnancy four years ago ended in spontaneous abortion at 9 weeks gestation and she received a mini-dose (50 µg) of RhIg.In the second pregnancy, two years ago, the infant typed as Group A Rh positive, DAT negative. Patient A.D. was injected with RhIg within 72 hours of delivery. The laboratory also confirmed that in the current pregnancy RhIg was administered at approximately 28 weeks gestation subsequent to a negative antibody screen.After many hours of non-productive labor, the physician considered that labor had stalled and decided to do a cesarian section (C-section). According to hospital policy for C-sections, a type and screen was ordered.

View Page
Introduction

This case concerns a common scenario in the transfusion service (TS) laboratory, the detection of anti-D at delivery in a female who has received Rh immune globulin (RhIg) during pregnancy.Distinguishing between passive and immune anti-D is important clinically: If passive anti-D is misinterpreted as immune, RhIg prophylaxis may be omitted leading to D sensitization. If immune anti-D is misinterpreted as passive, appropriate follow-up of the antibody may be curtailed putting the fetus at risk.Unfortunately, differentiating between immune and passive anti-D is often impossible. This case study presents an opportunity to review perinatal testing programs and the crucial role of RhIg in preventing hemolytic disease of the fetus and newborn (HDFN) due to anti-D. The case also examines practical aspects of routine serologic testing involving neonates and women who have received RhIg during pregnancy. The case is a companion to "Hemolytic Disease of the Fetus and Newborn" and complements its content.In brief, the case will: Guide participants through laboratory findings that need to be interpreted and resolved; Examine current best practices in perinatal testing programs; Review the characteristics of RhIg and its use in pregnancy; Review and investigate key issues associated with detection of anti-D in women who have received antenatal RhIg; Discuss crossmatch and LIS policies related to RhIg-derived passive anti-D.

View Page
Use in Pregnancy

As applied to pregnancy, RhIg's purpose is to prevent immunization to the D antigen in the perinatal period and thus prevent HDFN due to anti-D. If the mother has already produced anti-D, RhIg is of no use.Accordingly, RhIg is routinely administered to Rh negative women* not previously sensitized to the D antigen under the following circumstances:1, Antenatal. Antepartum prophylaxis of 300 µg (1500 IU) at about 28 weeks gestation in the USA and Canada, which could be weeks later, depending on how physician appointments are scheduled. To illustrate variation in antenatal international practice, in the UK smaller doses of RhIg (e.g., 500 IU) may be given at 28 weeks and 34 weeks, although many UK facilities issue a 1500 IU dose at 28–30 weeks. With antenatal administration, the Rh of the fetus is usually unknown. Some transfusion services recommend a further antenatal dose if the infant is undelivered after 40 weeks.2. Postnatal. Prophylaxis of 300 µg (1500 IU) at delivery of an Rh positive or weak D infant, preferably within 72 hours of delivery but can be given up to 28 days later if administration is delayed. If RhIg administration is delayed beyond 72 hours, laboratory policies differ as to when it would no longer be administered.* Policies related to women who are weak D (formerly Du) are discussed later.Note: Because RhIg contains IgG anti-D, when given antenatally, it can cross the placenta and sensitize fetal D-positive red cells. Occasionally the fetus may be born with a weakly positive DAT, but significant hemolysis does not occur.

View Page
RhIg 'Failures'

Numerous studies have shown that, if administered correctly, RhIg is effective at preventing D immunization. To work, RhIg must be given in sufficient dose, and it must be given before Rh immunization has begun.Unfortunately, despite RhIg's proven efficacy, some women still make anti-D in the perinatal period. Such 'failures' are mainly (but not totally) due to human error. Examples of how women may still produce anti-D some 40+ years after the implementation of RhIg prophylaxis: Immunization to D occurred before RhIg was administered, e.g., before 28 weeks gestation*; Immunization to D occurred after the administration of RhIg at 28 weeks and before delivery because an antenatal FMH occurred that was too large for residual passive anti-D to give protection; Female was already immunized from a prior pregnancy but anti-D was too weak to be detected in antibody screen tests prior to RhIg administration; RhIg dosage was insufficient to clear a larger fetal bleed at delivery (e.g., FMH screen or quantification was not done or a false negative occurred); Incorrect calculation of RhIg dosage; RhIg administered too late , e.g., well after 72 hours of delivery; Antenatal RhIg not given, e.g., mother had no or limited access to prenatal care, or did not seek it, and a FMH occurred during pregnancy; Failure of physician to carry out prenatal blood testing; RhIg not given due to laboratory clerical or technical error in Rh typing the mother or child; RhIg not given in cases such as abortions, ectopic pregnancies, and trauma (e.g., car accidents). * Because anti-D production before 28 weeks is rare (the order of 0.24% to 0.31%), RhIg's use earlier in pregnancy is not recommended. It is not cost effective and would expose most women to an unneeded blood product.

View Page
RhIg-Derived Anti-D Reaction Strength

As noted, reaction strength can suggest whether anti-D at delivery is likely immune or passive, however, several factors affect RhIg's reaction strength in laboratory tests.Before proceeding, take a moment to think about the following questions. Which reaction strengths are typically seen at delivery from RhIg-derived passive anti-D? Which variables can affect RhIg-derived passive anti-D reaction strengths?

View Page
Introduction

As noted earlier, in this case study the laboratory's protocol is to set up a mini-panel, providing these criteria are met: Mother is Rh-negative and has been tested on two separate occasions; Laboratory has confirmed administration of RhIg prophylaxis; Result of current antibody screen is positive and typical of anti-D due to RhIg; There is no record or history of an unexpected antibody. All criteria were met and a selected mini-panel was set up to confirm the presence of anti-D and exclude possible co-existing maternal antibodies. Other clinically significant antibodies have implications for possible HDFN and for transfusion to both the mother and newborn, thus must be excluded.

View Page
Serologic Tests on Newborn

Based on the results of the mini-panel, the laboratory concluded that only anti-D was present and that it was consistent with administration of RhIg at 28 weeks.Patient A.D. delivered a 5 lb 13 oz female by C. section with serologic test results on cord blood as follows. Well washed cord red cells were used for ABO and Rh(D) typing to remove possible Wharton's jelly.Before proceeding to the next page, evaluate if the infant's ABO and Rh(D) types are valid. You will be asked questions that assess basic knowledge of blood grouping practices and test results for newborns. ABO Forward Group ABO Reverse Group Rh anti-A anti-B A1 cells B cells anti-D* 0 0 NT NT 3+ NT = not tested / * monoclonal IgM anti-D DAT Reagent DAT CC Polyspecific AHG w+ 2+ W+ = microscopic positiveAHG = antihuman globulin serum CC = IgG sensitized cells Note: It is the lab's policy to add IgG sensitized cells to weak antiglobulin test results.

View Page
Assessing FMH and RhIg Dosage

The remaining issue in this case is to determine if one vial of RhIG is sufficient or if there has been a FMH >30 mL of whole blood, requiring more than one vial of RhIg (300 µg). Recall that the incidence of FMH greater than 30 mL at delivery is rare and estimated to be about 1 in 400 deliveries (~0.3%). The laboratory used the rosette test to screen for FMH and it was negative. Accordingly, quantitation using the Kleihauer-Betke test or flow cytometry was not needed.RhIg dosageBased on the negative rosette test, the mother was injected with one vial of RhIg (300 µg). She was later discharged along with her healthy infant.

View Page
Newborn's Clinical Status

The newborn showed no clinical evidence of HDFN or early newborn hyperbilirubinemia, with related laboratory tests as follows (laboratory's reference ranges for newborns in brackets): Test USA SI Hemoglobin 16 g/dL (13.5 - 21.0 g/dL) 160 g/L(130.5 - 226.0 g/L)* Hematocrit 52% (43-62%) 0.52 (0.43-0.62) Total bilirubin (cord blood) 2.1 mg/dL (<2.5 mg/dL) 35.9 µmol/L (<43 µmol/L) *Most countries that adopted SI do not use the official SI unit for Hb (mmol/L), but rather use g/L.

View Page
Crossmatch Issues

In this case the mother did not require transfusion. For reference, the TS laboratory routinely uses an electronic crossmatch to detect ABO incompatibility for cases where patients do not have unexpected clinically significant antibodies in current antibody screen tests nor a history of clinically significant antibodies. When the laboratory information system (LIS) is down, the lab performs an immediate spin crossmatch.Should transfusion have been needed, these questions arise:1. Does a mother with a detectable passive anti-D due to RhIg qualify for an immediate spin (IS) or electronic crossmatch should transfusion be necessary?The issue also extends to the future:2. Should having a record of passive anti-D that is no longer detectable disqualify a woman from being a candidate for an immediate spin or electronic crossmatch?Before proceeding, consider the policies used in your TS laboratory and which rationales are used to support them.

View Page
Crossmatch Implications of RhIg-associated Passive Anti-D

Once again, policies vary from laboratory to laboratory since the issue is not directly addressed by blood safety standards. For example, AABB and other standards require a version of the following: When clinically significant red cell antibodies are detected or the recipient has a history of such antibodies, RBC components shall be prepared for transfusion that lack the corresponding antigen and are serologically crossmatch-compatible, where serologically is taken to be an IAT at 37oC. If no clinically significant antibodies were detected in antibody screen tests and the patient has no record of such antibodies, detection of ABO incompatibility is required, which can be accomplished by immediate spin crossmatch or an electronic crossmatch. The key issues are whether detectable passive anti-D from RhIg or a record of passive anti-D from RhIg should be considered clinically significant for crossmatch purposes. Because standards do not directly address these issues, TS laboratories are left to interpret what is required to meet the standards. Practices may be further complicated because of the transfusion service's laboratory information system (LIS).

View Page
Case Summary

A group O Rh negative female who had received RhIg at 28 weeks gestation had a weak anti-D when a type and screen was done prior to performance of a Cesarean section (C-section). A mini-panel of selected red cells confirmed the presence of anti-D and excluded other antibodies. The laboratory decided that the anti-D was likely passive and consistent with RhIG administration. A group O Rh positive child was delivered by C-section. The newborn had a weakly positive DAT but was healthy and required no treatment. A rosette test to screen for FMH was negative and A.D. was injected with 1500 IU (300 µg) of RhIG within 72 hours of delivery.

View Page
Main Learning Goals

This case concerns a common scenario in the TS laboratory, the detection of anti-D at delivery in an Rh negative female who received antenatal RhIG. The case was used to review some of the key learning goals relevant to HDFN and its prevention. More specifically, the case study reviewed the following topics: Historical aspects of HDFN due to anti-D and its prevention; Clinical symptoms and associated laboratory test results in HDFN; Best practices related to perinatal testing programs to prevent HDFN; Interpretation of serologic test results on mother, father, and child; Characteristics and uses of RhIg; Tests to screen for and quantify FMH; Issues related to women with anti-D following RhIg injection; Crossmatch and LIS policies related to passive anti-D from RhIg.Before taking the final quiz, for each of the above topics, list as many of the key learning points that you can recall. As required, review topics that need more study. As well, re-read the learning objectives at the start of the case as these determine assessment questions.It's also worthwhile to read the literature and online resources in Further Reading as these reinforce key points, add to the depth of learning, and enrich course materials.

View Page
Literature and Online Resources

The following published literature and online resources, while useful, should not be used as a substitute for technical and clinical judgment. Medical and technical information becomes obsolete quickly and current sources relevant to the user's location should always be consulted.References indicated by * provide a broad overview of HDFN and are highly recommended.LITERATUREAvent ND, Reid ME. The Rh blood group system: a review. Blood. 2000 Jan 15;95 (2):375-87.Bowman J. Thirty-five years of Rh prophylaxis. Transfusion 2003 Dec;43(12):1661-6.* Eder AF. Update on HDFN: new information on long-standing controversies. Immunohematology. 2006;22(4):188–195. (scroll to article).Eder, AF, Manno, C.S. Alloimmune hemolytic disease of the fetus and newborn. In Wintrobe's Clinical Hematology, 11th ed. (Greer JP, Foerster J, Lukens JN, Rodgers GM, Paraskevas F, Glader BE, (eds). Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2004.Flegel WA. Molecular genetics of RH and its clinical application. Transfus Clin Biol. 2006 Mar-Apr;13(1-2):4-12. Kennedy MS, McNanie J, Waheed A. Detection of anti-D following antepartum injections of Rh immune globulin. Immunohematology 1998;14(4):138-40.Koelewijn JM, de Haas M, Vrijkotte TG, van der Schoot CE, Bonsel GJ. Risk factors for RhD immunisation despite antenatal and postnatal anti-D prophylaxis.BJOG. 2009 Sep;116 (10): 1307-14. Epub 2009 Jun 17.* Kumar S, Regan F. Management of pregnancies with RhD alloimmunisation. BMJ. 2005 May 28;330(7502):1255-8. (UK perspective but much valuable information relevant to all)* Murray NA, Roberts IAG. Haemolytic disease of the newborn. Arch Dis Child Fetal Neonatal Ed 2007 Mar; 92(2): F83–F88. Oepkes D, Seaward PG, Vandenbussche FP, Windrim R, Kingdom J, Beyene J, Kanhai HH, Ohlsson A, Ryan G; DIAMOND Study Group. Doppler ultrasonography versus amniocentesis to predict fetal anemia. N Engl J Med. 2006 Jul 13;355(2):156-64.Ramsey G. Inaccurate doses of Rh immune globulin after Rh-incompatible fetomaternal hemorrhage: survey of laboratory practice.Arch Pathol Lab Med 2009 Mar; 133(3):465-9. Reid ME. The Rh antigen D: a review for clinicians. Blood Bulletin 2008 Apr; 10(1).Sandler SG. Effectiveness of the RhIg dose calculator. Arch Pathol Lab Med 2010 Jul;134(7): 967-8.Shulman IA, Calderon C, Nelson JM, Nakayama R. The routine use of Rh-negative reagent red cells for the identification of anti-D and the detection of non-D red cell antibodies. Transfusion 1994 Aug;34(8):666-70.Tamul KR. Determining fetal-maternal hemorrhage with flow cytometry. Advance 2000. Posted online June 5, 2000.Westhoff CM, Sloan SR. Molecular genotyping in transfusion medicine. Clin Chem 2008;54(12): 1948-50.ONLINE RESOURCESPaxton A. Bringing new rigor to RhIg calculations. CAP Today May 2008. *Wagle S, Deshpande PG. Hemolytic disease of the newborn. eMedicine / WebMD. Updated Apr. 9, 2010.

View Page
Which of the following are possible causes of the positive antibody screen?View Page

Risk Management in the Clinical Laboratory
Definitions of Risk and Risk Management

A risk is a future event that may result in loss or injury. In healthcare, the future event specifically refers to injury to a patient (negative patient outcomes). Risk management involves the creation of policies and procedures and the implementation of practices that are aimed at the prevention of future events that could result in negative patient outcomes. Basically, risk management is the process of making and carrying out decisions that will assist in the prevention of detrimental events. It also describes techniques used in the prevention of adverse consequences or losses if an unintended or unexpected event does occur. It is important to demonstrate how to analyze risks and what options a laboratory has in deciding how to deal with risks. Often, a critical incident that affects patient care is the result of multiple errors and system flaws that coincide.

View Page
Risk management as it applies to the clinical laboratory is most accurately defined in which of the following ways?View Page
Why Manage Risk?

Every director and manager knows that at any given time, unexpected events arise in the laboratory. Unfortunately, the negative unexpected events can have a serious impact on the effectiveness as well as the financial welfare of the laboratory. Some of these negative events can have such devastating consequences that the sheer risk of them occuring cannot be left to chance. Such impacts can be avoided or dealt with systematically through the process of risk management. The challenge is to assess and control risk in an appropriate and cost-effective manner. By using risk management strategies, the laboratory can approach risk in a structured and calculated manner.

View Page
Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments of 1988 (CLIA)

In 1988, Congress passed The Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments in order to establish quality standards for all laboratory testing to ensure accuracy, reliability and timeliness of laboratory results regardless of where the patient's specimen was tested. The CLIA regulations are based on the complexity of the test method. The more complicated the method, the more stringent the requirements. Three categories of tests have been established: waived, moderate (which includes the sub-category of provider-performed microscopy), and high complexity. CLIA stipulates the quality standards for proficiency testing, patient management, quality control, personnel qualifications, and quality assurance for those laboratories performing moderate and/or high complexity testing. Those laboratories performing only waived testing must enroll in CLIA and are required to follow the manufacturer's instructions for those testing methods performed. The Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services is charged with laboratory registration, fee collection, surveys, surveyor guidelines and training, enforcement, approval of proficiency testing providers as well as accrediting organizations and exempt states. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention is responsible for CLIA studies, convening the CLIA Committee, and providing scientific and technical support and consultation to the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services. It is the responsibility of the Food and Drug Administration to categorize new test methodologies.

View Page
Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996

The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) was enacted by Congress in 1996. There are two titles within the Act that are of importance in the clinical laboratory. Title I of the act protects insurance coverage for workers and their families if they change or lose their jobs. Title II of the act requires the establishment of national standards for electronic health care transactions as well as national identifiers for providers, health insurance plans, and employers. A very important feature of Title II is that it addresses the security and confidentiality of health data. It also entitles patients to have access to their medical records within a reasonable amount of time. Another concept worth noting within HIPAA rules is the term "covered entity". A covered entity is a term applied to a health care provider who transmits any health information in connection with a HIPAA transaction. Since substantial fines can be levied against any covered entity that does not comply with the Privacy Rule, it is important that all employees in the laboratory are fully aware of and compliant with both HIPAA and state confidentiality requirements. This should be enforced with both initial and follow-up training. The privacy of electronically transmitted personal health information (PHI) was further expanded and strengthened with the passage of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA).

View Page
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

The Occupational Safety and Health Administration is an agency working within the United States Department of Labor. It was created in 1970 by congress under the Occupational Safety and Health Act. As the primary regulatory agency in the field of occupational safety and health, its mission is to prevent work-related injuries, illnesses, and deaths by issuing and enforcing standards for workplace safety and health. Several states have also implemented their own occupational safety and health programs. To qualify as a state plan, the state agency must promulgate regulations that are equal to or more stringent than the federal OSHA program. Some of the safety regulations brought about by OSHA that affect the laboratory are: Personal protective equipment (PPE)- primarily to prevent exposure to bloodborne pathogens. Lockout/tagout- securing energy sources in an "off" condition when performing repairs of maintenance. Hazard communications- requires developing and communicating information on hazards of chemical products used in the laboratory, such as material safety data sheets (MSDS). Bloodborne pathogens- a standard designed to prevent both employees and patients from being exposed to bloodborne pathogens.

View Page
Safe Medical Devices Act of 1990 (SMDA)

The Safe Medical Devices Act of 1990 requires user facilities (e.g., hospitals, nursing homes) to report suspected medical device-related deaths to both the FDA and the manufacturers. Medical device-related serious injuries must be reported to the manufacturer. However, if the medical device manufacturer is unknown, the serious injury is reported by the facility to the FDA. Laboratory personnel should familiarize themselves with their institution's procedures for reporting adverse events to the FDA.Medical devices that are included in this reporting requirement (if they may have caused serious injury to a patient or patient death) are laboratory instruments, reagents, or devices used during phlebotomy procedures. If it appears that a device has caused injury, it is important that the device and packaging be saved and any serial or lot numbers noted. An incident report should be completed within 24 hours. The incident report must then be handled by the institution's "Risk Management" department (if applicable), who will file the necessary reports.

View Page
State Regulations for Risk Management

In addition to federal regulations, states may also have their own set of statutes, codes, and regulations with which laboratories must comply. The requirements vary from state to state. A limited number of states also require the licensure of laboratory personnel. The license is specific to the individuals' certification and scope of practice.

View Page
Which Amendment or Act describes the quality standards that all laboratories must meet in order to ensure testing accuracy, reliability, and timeliness no matter where a patient sample is tested?View Page
Introduction to Patient Safety and Risk Exposures

Laboratory quality management and risk management plans that address processes in the preanalytic, analytic, and postanalytic phases of testing are key elements in ensuring patient safety. The preanalytic phase of testing includes all processes prior to the actual testing of a specimen. The analytic phase consists of all the processes involved in the testing of a specimen, and the postanalytic phase includes all the processes involved after test analysis.

View Page
Preanalytic Phase

A study that was published in 2002 concluded that 68 - 87% of laboratory errors occur in the preanalytic and postanalytic stages of the testing process with the majority occurring in the preanalytic phase.* Steps in the pre-analytic phase occur both inside and outside the laboratory, and are performed by both laboratory and non-laboratory personnel. While the following list is not exhaustive, some of the most common sources of error in the preanalytic phase include:Patient preparation Patient not told to be fasting; improper or no instruction to patient on proper collection of specimen such as clean catch urine. Patient injured during phlebotomy Development of hematoma resulting in no specimen obtained for testing. Requisition errors Patient information missing, illegible, or on wrong patient; wrong tests ordered. Patient identification Patient incorrectly identified. Labeling of specimen Specimen not labeled or incorrectly labeled. Preparation of specimen Specimen centrifuged too long or not long enough; specimen placed in improper preservative.Storage of specimen Specimen not refrigerated or frozen as required or refrigerated when it should be at ambient temperature. Shipment of specimen Shipped at ambient temperature when it should have been shipped frozen; delay in shipment. Accessioning process including preparation for analysis Sorted into wrong batch; incorrect labeling. Order entry Incorrect data entered during manual entry of a test requisition. Specimen sub-optimal Not enough specimen for testing; visible hemolysis. Contamination Inadequate cleansing of venipuncture site resulting in contamination during blood culture collection. *Reference: Bonini P, Plebani M, Ceriotti F, Rubboli F. Errors in laboratory medicine. Clin Chem. 2002;48:691-698. Available at http://www.clinchem.org/cgi/content/full/48/5/691#T2BAccessed June 23, 2010.

View Page
Analytic Phase

Errors occur much less frequently in the analytic phase of laboratory testing than in either the preanalytic or postanalytic phases. The supposition of published studies on the error rate in this category is that the percentages remain low primarily because of: The qualifications of testing personnel Effectiveness of internal quality control programs and external assessment practices which assist in identifying analytical errors and detecting possible sources.Following is a list of examples of errors that may be encountered during the analytic testing activities. The list includes both human and instrumentation errors. While random errors (those that occur independently of the operator) may be encountered during the analytic phase, primarily listed are systematic errors. That is, errors that bias the measurement resulting from either instrument malfunctions or human mistakes. Errors in quality control and verification of performance specifications. Instrument malfunctions. Calibration errors causing a direction of bias in results. Manual pipetting errors. Reagent errors. Test interference caused by unsuspected antibodies. Specimen interference i.e. failing to visually see sample was lipemic. Math errors. Staff errors in testing preparation and processing. Inadequate staffing which may precipitate errors caused by fatigue.

View Page
Postanalytic Phase

Recently, significant attention has been focused on errors made during the postanalytic phase of laboratory testing and the impact errors made during this phase have on laboratory-related patient outcomes. Similar to the preanalytic phase, the postanalytic phase can be subdivided into those procedures that are within the laboratory, and those outside the laboratory; where the physician receives, interprets, and acts on the laboratory results. The examples listed below are limited to possible postanalytic errors that may occur within the laboratory and over which the laboratory has more control: Laboratory results not verified before being reported. Improper data entry or typing mistakes causing erroneous information to be reported. Critical values not reported, or not reported in a timely manner. Laboratory tests not reported or reported to the wrong health provider.(For example, poor communication to a patient's physician of the results of laboratory tests that are pending at the time of a patient's discharge.) Lack of timeliness of reporting laboratory results (slow turnaround time). Misinterpretation of an alphabetic flag in the result field (i.e. lower case "l" interpreted as the number "1". Oral results misunderstood by receiving party- no "read back" requested to confirm that data was correctly received.

View Page
The majority of all laboratory errors occur during which phase of laboratory testing?View Page
Introduction to Risk Management and Employment Practices Liability

Another area where risk management is vitally important is that of employment practices. The laboratory can also minimize its potential liability by being vigilant during the pre-employment process; ensuring that employment guidelines (and if required, termination guidelines) are followed consistently. A resource that discusses major statutes related to employees is included on this page.

View Page
Employee Competence Assessment

It is important that job-related performance standards be established for each position in the laboratory (e.g. medical laboratory scientist, medical laboratory technician, phlebotomist, and laboratory aide). The standards should be distinctly stated and clearly communicated (both in writing and verbally) to the employee so that the employee fully understands what is expected. It is also important to remember that when performing an employee performance evaluation, an individual's performance must only be compared to the established performance standard. If the employee's performance falls below an established performance standard, it should be clearly articulated to the employee where he/she needs to improve to meet the standard. The supervisor should then meet with the employee at established intervals to discuss whether the employee is making progress toward meeting the established standard. In addition, it is important that supervisors understand how to conduct and properly document an evaluation. Documentation, however, should not be limited just to the annual or biannual evaluation review. Performance problems for all employees should be documented regularly. Apply policies consistently to all employees and in all situations; avoid inconsistent enforcement. Ensure that all personnel documentation is reviewed only by those individuals who have a "need to know." The review process is not to be a means for someone to publicly embarrass an employee.

View Page
References and Recommended Reading

Astion ML, Shojania KG, Hamill TR, Kim S, Ng VL. Classifying laboratory incident reports to identify problems that jeopardize patient safety. Am J Clin Path. 2003;120:18.Bersch C, Clemons K. The wheel of misfortune prepare to win if disaster strikes. MLO. 2008;40:12. Berte L. Laboratory quality management: A road map. Clin Lab Med. 2007;27:771.Bonini P, Plebani M, Ceriotti F, Rubboli F. Errors in laboratory medicine. Clin Chem. 2002;48:691-698. Available at http://www.clinchem.org/cgi/content/full/48/5/691#T2B Accessed February 2, 2012.Carraro P, Plebani M. Errors in a stat laboratory: Types and frequencies 10 years later. Clin Chem. 2007;53:1338-1342.Carroll R ed. Risk Management Handbook for Health Care Organizations. 5th ed. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass; 2006.Howanitz PJ. Errors in laboratory medicine: Practical lessons to improve patient safety. Arch Pathol Lab Med. 2005; 129:1252 - 1261.Kalra J. Medical errors: Impact on clinical laboratories and other critical areas. Clin Biochem. 2004;37:1052-1062. Kohn LT, Corrigan JM, Donaldson MS, eds. To Err Is Human: Building a Safer Health System. Washington, DC: National Academies Press; 2000.Lippi G, Guidi G. Risk management in the preanalytical phase of laboratory testing. Clin Chem & Lab Med. 2007;45:720. Malone B. Risk management for clinical labs. Clinical Laboratory News. 2008;34:1.Pierangelo B, Plebani M, Ceriotti F, Rubboli F. Errors in laboratory medicine. Clin Chem. 2002;48:691-698.Sazama K. Legal implications of laboratory errors. Lab Med. 2005;36:213.Smith TJ. Strategies for error reduction, Advance Magazine. 2009;18:25.Vidal Y. 101 Ways to Prevent Medical Errors: A 24-year Odyssey. Andrews, TX: Lara Publishing; 2002.

View Page
Legal Concerns and Risk Management

Some laboratorians may feel overwhelmed with the many rules and regulations that seem to govern and complicate our professional lives. All too often it seems that every time a tech turns around, there is another law governing the laboratory. In addition, the laboratory's administration must be engaged with a variety of contracts and the laws, as well as deal with the threat of litigation resulting from alleged negligence.As our laws become more complex, many of us have simply thrown up our hands and looked to attorneys for interpretations. Though this is not necessisarily a bad response, it should not be the only response. Since statutes and regulations are so entwined in their daily work, it behooves laboratorians to be better informed about the law- principally to acquire a broad understanding about the legal system and the laboratory professionals' responsibilities and obligations under that system. The resource that is included on this page discusses various categories of US law and may be of interest to those who want to increase their understanding of the basic principles of the legal system in the United States.

View Page
Identify and Analyze Loss Exposure

Risk management is the process by which the laboratory becomes aware of risk that can cause potential loss exposure. Loss could result from a variety of circumstances and, depending upon the circumstances, can be insignificant to catastrophic. Therefore, in addition to identifying the risk, it is also important to establish the severity of the risk by determining the probability of loss if the risk is not controlled. There are a variety of ways the laboratory can identify potential risks. The following methods are generally considered among the more effective methods. Evaluating complaints from patients and clients Reviewing incident reports Evaluating deficiencies cited by accreditation or governmental inspections (external assessments) Reviewing proficiency testing results However, it is important to be sensitive to events or trends that may alert you to risk potential. For example, although continually monitoring the number of phlebotomies that are performed in a day may not be a normally effective method for evaluating risk, if there is a sudden staff shortage of phlebotomists or a sudden increase in hospital census, it may be worth evaluating the number of phlebotomies that are done because the risk potential may increase if the phlebotomy staff is overworked.

View Page
Select the Best Risk Management Treatment(s)

Selecting the best risk management treatments involves two steps. The first step requires that there be an attempt to forecast what effect or effects the suggested alternative risk treatments might have on the desired objective(s). The second step entails implementing one or more of the alternative treatments that not only meet the desired objective(s) but also meet the desired objective in a cost-effective manner.Implement the selected treatment(s)The selected alternative treatment or treatments are then implemented. Everyone who might be affected by the selected treatment(s) must be made aware of the implementation. The pareto chart is a useful tool during the implementation phase. It graphically summarizes and displays the importance of the cause or causes that have been identified in the fishbone chart and helps the laboratory staff determine which cause to focus on first.

View Page
Which of these methods should be used when an adverse event occurs that results in patient injury (negative patient outcomes) to prevent a recurrence?View Page
Accrediting Organizations

External assessments performed by hospital and laboratory accrediting agencies can assist health care facilities/laboratories understand where they may need to improve to avoid negative patient outcomes (i.e., manage risk). Since all accreditation programs are voluntary, it is not required that each laboratory become accredited in order to become licensed by their state. Nevertheless, participation in accreditation is viewed as essential to the laboratory's commitment to meeting high standards. In addition, accreditation provides laboratories with benchmarks for maintaining those standards. The three accrediting bodies discussed next have the deeming authority to grant to those laboratories they accredit "deemed" status. This is determined by the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services (CMS) as they have met CMS's condition of participation in the Medicare Program. Laboratories with "deemed" status not only meet the requirement for reimbursement from Medicare and certain managed care organizations. The "deemed" laboratories are also not required to undergo Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments (CLIA) surveys other than random validation surveys. "Deemed" status, however, does not ordinarily provide an exemption from state requirements for state licensure.

View Page
Risk Management Accrediting Organizations: Joint Commission

The Joint Commission (formerly known as the Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations, or JCAHO) is a private sector, non-profit organization based in the United States. It was created by the merging of the Hospital Standardization Program with similar programs run by the American College of Physicians, the American Hospital Association, the American Medical Association, and the Canadian Medical Association. Unannounced surveys are performed on the entire hospital, including clinical laboratories, in order to gain accreditation for the laboratory and the hospital as a whole. Joint Commission Survey ProcessCompliance with applicable standards is based on the following: Tracing the care delivered to patients Verbal and written information provided to The Joint Commission On-site observations and interviews by Joint Commission surveyors Documents provided by the organizationThe table to the right describes the factors evaluated by the Joint Commission to determine technical competence of a laboratory.

View Page
Risk Management Accrediting Organizations: College of American Pathologists

The College of American Pathologists (CAP) is a private, non-profit accrediting organization that has been granted "deeming" authority by CMS. The goal of the CAP laboratory accreditation program is to "Improve patient safety by advancing the quality of pathology and laboratory services through education, standard setting, and ensuring laboratories meet or exceed regulatory requirements." Though CAP inspects only clinical laboratories, there are various types such as: reference laboratories, clinics, military installations, hospital laboratories, etc. which may be accredited through this organization.Surveys are unannounced and the program uses volunteer teams of practicing laboratory professionals as inspectors, or CAP inspection specialists. Inspection specialists are CAP employees who have extensive experience in laboratory medicine. If a hospital is inspected by the Joint Commission and the laboratory chooses to seek CAP accreditation, the CAP inspection is recognized by the Joint Commission so that the laboratory will not be inspected again by the Joint Commission during the hospital inspection. In the fall of 2008 CAP launched a laboratory accreditation program based on the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 15189:2007. This program utilizes criteria and procedures specifically developed to determine technical competence and account for quality management systems. It does not replace the CAP Laboratory Accreditation Program but is an addition to it. Participation is strictly voluntary and there is no tie to CMS for Medicare reimbursement.The table to the right depicts factors involved in determining technical competence.

View Page
Risk Management Accrediting Organizations: Commission on Laboratory Accreditation

The Commission on Laboratory Accreditation (COLA) was founded in 1988 and in 1993 was granted deeming authority by CMS. Although COLA was initially created to provide voluntary inspections of physicians' offices, COLA now accredits not only laboratories in physicians' offices but also laboratories associated with hospitals, mobile clinics, Veterans Administration, Department of Defense and independent laboratories. Its laboratory accrediting program is also recognized by the Joint Commission. COLA is approved by CMS to accredit the following specialties: Chemistry Hematology Microbiology Immunology Immunohematology/transfusion services Pathology, including cytology, histopathology, and oral pathology

View Page

Routine Venipuncture
What is Venipuncture?

Venipuncture is the collection of blood from a vein. The person having the responsibility for the performance of the venipuncture may be a phlebotomist who is a part of the laboratory staff, or he/she may be another healthcare professional that has been trained to perform this duty. In this course, we will refer to the person performing the venipuncture as the phlebotomist.

View Page
Tools of the Trade

A variety of tools are available to ensure a safe and successful venipuncture. It is important to know which tools to choose and how to use them correctly so that an adequate specimen is collected for laboratory testing.

View Page
What is a Hidden Error?

Hidden errors are those that cannot be detected or corrected by the laboratory analyst prior to testing. Most often these errors can be prevented by the phlebotomist following correct venipuncture procedure for every procedure, every time.Hidden errors include hemoconcentration, incorrect order of draw, and (the most serious of all errors) misidentification of patient or specimens. Because these errors often are unknown, the analyst may inadvertently report erroneous patient results which could be harmful to the safety and well-being of the patient. Condition What is it? How does it happen? What is the Result? Hemoconcentration Blood pools at site of venipuncture Tourniquet is applied for a prolonged period of time Test results may be inaccurate because blood components move between blood and tissues Pouring Blood between tubes Mixing contents of two or more tubes Removing top of tube to combine contents of one tube with another Inaccurate test results due to over or under dilution or incorrect anticoagulant Clots form due to lack of mixing Patient may have to be redrawn Incorrect patient identification and incorrect specimen labeling Using the wrong name to label a specimen Failure to positively identify EVERY patient using 2 unique identifiers BEFORE beginning venipuncture Failure to label EVERY specimen in the presence of the patient Failure to concentrate fully on the task Results reported to caregiver for wrong patient Compromises patient care; may be life-threatening

View Page
Labeling Specimens

All specimens must be labeled in the presence of the patient at the time of collection. Inaccurate or incomplete labeling may result in rejection of the specimen by the laboratory. Unlabeled specimens will automatically be rejected by the laboratory. When labeling a specimen for the laboratory, the following information must be included: Patient's first name and last name Hospital medical record number, date of birth or alternate unique patient number Collector's ID Time the specimen was collected Date the specimen was collectedA phlebotomist must NEVER pre-label specimen containers. This can result in specimen mix-up and potentially disastrous consequences for the patient.

View Page
Correct Fill

Fill blood collection tubes completely (until vacuum is exhausted) to ensure the correct blood to anticoagulant ratio necessary for accurate patient results. Specimens may be rejected by the laboratory if the tube is short-filled or over-filled. To avoid short-filling of tubes, the phlebotomist must ensure that the blood flow stops completely before removing the tube from the needle. When using a winged device (butterfly) to collect blood for coagulation studies (e.g., protime, aPTT), the phlebotomist must draw a light blue top "waste" tube before attaching another light blue top tube for testing. If the air in the tubing of the winged device is not displaced into a waste tube and is drawn into the tube used for testing, the tube used for testing will short-fill. The laboratory may reject the specimen because of invalid blood to anticoagulant ratio.

View Page
Order of Draw

Blood collection tubes must be filled in a specific order to avoid specimen contamination from the additive in the preceding tube. The following order of draw is an accepted laboratory standard. 1. Tubes or bottles for blood cultures 2. Light-blue top tubes (sodium citrate) 3. Serum tubes (with or without clot activator) 4. Green top tubes (sodium or lithium heparin) 5. Lavender or pink top tubes (Potassium EDTA) 6. Gray (Sodium fluoride and sodium or potassium oxalate)

View Page
Pre-analytic and hidden errors can greatly affect a laboratory result.Match the error listed below with the cause from the drop-down box.View Page
What are Pre-analytical Errors?

Pre-analytical errors are errors that occur prior to the testing process. Hemolyzed specimens, clotted specimens, incorrect tube type, and inadequate tube fill can all produce pre-analytical errors. Fortunately, many of these errors can be detected by the laboratory analyst so that corrections can be made before testing begins or before resulting and reporting the test. Unfortunately, the correction that needs to be made usually involves redrawing the patient. The table on the following page lists several preanalytical errors that can occur during the phlebotomy procedure.

View Page
References

Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Collection, Transport, and Processing of Blood Specimens for Testing Plasma-Based Coagulation Assays; Approved Guideline. Fourth ed. CLSI document H21-A4. NCCLS. Wayne, PA: 2003.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Procedures for the Collection of Diagnostic Blood Specimens by Venipuncture; Approved Standard. Sixth ed. CLSI document H3-A6. NCCLS. Wayne, PA: 2007.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Procedures for the Handling and Processing of Blood Specimens; Approved Guideline. Third Edition. CLSI document H18-A3. NCCLS.Wayne, PA: 2004.Ernst DJ. Applied Phlebotomy. Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: 2005.Lowe B. Reinforcing safety sticklers. Advance for Medical Laboratory Professionals. May 2004; 16:2A-3A.The Joint Commission. National Patient Safety Goals. Available at: http://www.jointcommission.org/standards_information/npsgs.aspx. Accessed July 2, 2012.

View Page
Blood Collection Tubes

Most blood collection tubes contain an additive that either accelerates clotting of the blood (clot activator) or prevents the blood from clotting (anticoagulant). A tube that contains a clot activator will produce a serum sample when the blood is separated by centrifugation and a tube that contains an anticoagulant will produce a plasma sample after centrifugation. Some tests require the use of serum, some require plasma, and other tests require anticoagulated whole blood. The table below lists the most commonly used blood collection tubes. Tube cap color Additive Function of Additive Common laboratory tests Light-blue 3.2% Sodium citrate Prevents blood from clotting by binding calcium Coagulation Red or gold (mottled or "tiger" top used with some tubes is not shown) Serum tube with or without clot activator or gel Clot activator promotes blood clotting with glass or silica particles. Gel separates serum from cells. Chemistry, serology, immunology Green Sodium or lithium heparin with or without gel Prevents clotting by inhibiting thrombin and thromboplastin Stat and routine chemistry Lavender or pink Potassium EDTA Prevents clotting by binding calcium Hematology and blood bank Gray Sodium fluoride, and sodium or potassium oxalate Fluoride inhibits glycolysis, and oxalate prevents clotting by precipitating calcium. Glucose (especially when testing will be delayed), blood alcohol, lactic acid

View Page
Scenario Conclusion

When the results on Mr. John Ready were called to the nurse, she was very surprised that the result of his CBC was normal. The nurse explained to the laboratory technologist that Mr. John Ready had a known diagnosis of lower GI bleeding. His hemoglobin had been very low for the past 24 hours because of the internal bleeding, and she thought it was very surprising that his hemoglobin had normalized so quickly without having received a blood transfusion. Mr. Ready's doctor decided the patient should be redrawn to ensure a correct result. The nurse further questioned if the phlebotomist could possibly have drawn the wrong patient because earlier that day Mr. Ready had been moved to room 831, and room 825 was presently occupied by a patient named Walter Redding. If Julie had properly identified the patient by asking him to state his name and then checking the name and identification number on the wristband, she would have realized that the patient in 825 was the wrong patient.

View Page

Semen Analysis
A semen specimen was collected three hours before it was brought to the laboratory for examination. What course of action should be taken?View Page
Materials Needed

The following is a list of materials needed for semen analysis. Laboratories will differ slightly in the equipment used. Use of this equipment will be described further in the later pages of this course. Materials needed include:graduated test tube or serological pipets with safety bulb to measure volumepH paper in neutral to basic range (e.g. 7.2-8.8)counting chamber and/or automated counting machineglass slides and coverslips for wet mount if motility and sperm count are to be assessed separatelyhand counterif dilution is donediluting fluid calibrated automatic pipetspositive pressure pipets and glass boreslight microscope with phase contrast objectives for sperm count and bright field objectives for morphology assessmentglass slides and fixative for morphology slidesset-up for performing Papanicolaou or other morphology stainingReference materials, such as the most current WHO laboratory manual for the examination and processing of human semen, a publication of the World Health Organization.

View Page
Round Cells in Semen

Round cells in semen are of two types: immature sperm (germ cells) and white blood cells (WBCs). These cells can be differentiated by examining a stained smear at 1000X magnification. A more precise identification can be achieved by detecting peroxidase activity. The presence of immature germ cells could indicate testicular damage; increased numbers of WBCs may indicate inflammation of the accessory glands.

View Page
Prerequisites

The basic laboratory skills that you will need to do a semen analysis include: Use of a microscopePerformance of manual cell countsMeasuring volumeMeasuring pHMeasuring viabilityKnowledge of OSHA regulations for handling potentially infectious human fluids

View Page
Morphology: What this presentation will teach you.

This presentation will describe basic aspects of WHO III assessment. For information on details of some of the morphological assessments you will need to review information presented in the 1992 WHO III manual.Learning to do strict morphology assessments is more complicated than learning WHO III and generally requires that the technician take one of the many hands-on laboratory courses offered periodically around the country. Details of strict morphology assessment are presented in the 1999 WHO IV manual.

View Page
Summary: Reference Values

The following are lower reference limits for a normal semen analysis. It should be noted that these are recommendations only, as stated in World Health Organization. WHO Laboratory Manual for the Examination and Processing of Human Semen. 5th ed. The limits may differ from those used in your laboratory, if laboratory studies or different reference materials were used to establish the values.Liquefaction: ≤30 minutes (no greater than 1 hour)Volume: >1.5 mLpH: ≥7.2Sperm concentration: ≥15 x 106 / mLMotility: Progressive motility 32%. The lower reference limit for total motility (progressive + non-progressive) 40%.WHO 5th edition: ≥4% normal forms

View Page
Viscosity

Liquefaction should be complete before viscosity is assessed. Semen viscosity can be estimated by aspirating the sample into a wide-bore plastic disposable pipette, allowing the semen to drop by gravity and observing the length of the thread that is formed. A normal sample leaves the pipette in small drops with very little trailing thread. A semen sample that is abnormally viscous will form a thread more than 2 cm long.A specimen that is more viscous than normal after liquefaction may have reduced sperm motility. During sexual intercourse, hyperviscosity can prevent the sperm from reaching the cervix.

View Page
Viability

Sperm viability (vitality) should be assessed if a low percentage of sperm are progressively motile, e.g., 30 - 40%. Since motile cells are inherently viable a viability assessment may not be necessary when motility is high. This test is important to determine if the non-motile spermatozoa are alive or dead. The percentage of live spermatozoa is determined by identifying sperm with an intact cell membrane. This is usually done by using a dye exclusion method where dye enters a non-vital (dead) cell due to the damaged plasma membrane. Therefore, viable cells will not appear stained, but non-viable cells will take up the stain. Viability testing should be performed as soon as possible after liquefaction. To assess viability, place a drop of semen on a slide. Add an equal volume of a vital stain such as trypan blue. Cover with a coverslip. Allow color to develop for several minutes, but not more than 5 minutes. Count 100 cells (both motile and non-motile cells) on each of 2 slides. During the count, differentiate between the nonstained cells (living) and stained cells (non-living).Another commonly used staining method is eosin-nigrosin. The advantages to this stain are that permanent slides can be made and the nigrosin provides a dark background for easier recognition of the non-stained, viable cells. Non-viable sperm have red or dark-pink heads and viable sperm have white or faintly-pink heads,as shown in the image on the right.If viability testing is not performed in your laboratory and a low percent motility is reported (e.g., less than 30 - 40%), a comment should be added to the the report that the decreased motility may be the result of non-viable or non-motile sperm.

View Page
Collection (continued)

Other aspects of specimen collection that must be considered are the temperature of the specimen and the time needed to transport it to the laboratory.Ideally, the specimen should be collected in a room at the testing site.If onsite collection is not possible:The specimen should be kept between 20 -37°C (room temperature to body temperature) from the time of collection until it arrives at the laboratory. This can be facilitated by holding the container close to the body, for example by carrying it in an inside pocket.Semen should arrive at the laboratory as soon as possible after collection, preferably within one hour.The man should record the time of semen production.The report should note that the sample was collected at a location outside the laboratory.

View Page
Collection

Accurate semen analysis results require appropriate sample collection. Patients must receive detailed directions for proper specimen collection and transport. Directions should be in writing. Specific instructions should include: The period of abstinence from ejaculation prior to collection should be at least 2, but no more than 7 days.Avoid lubricants and other contaminating substances.The entire specimen must be collected because different portions of the ejaculate have varying concentrations of spermatozoa. The first portion of the ejaculate is rich in sperm whereas the later portions of the ejaculated specimen are mainly seminal vesicular fluid. If the first portion is lost, the semen analysis results will be greatly affected. An appropriate collection container (supplied by the physician's office or laboratory) must be used.Each laboratory should designate an appropriate, wide mouth, collection container.Each lot of collection containers should be tested to ensure that it is non-toxic to sperm or contain confirmatory information from the manufacturer that this testing was completed.Alternative collection containers should be discouraged because their level of toxicity is unknown.Use of condoms for collection should be discouraged particularly when the purpose of the semen analysis is to test for fertility. Condoms are toxic to sperm unless the brand that is used is specifically for the purpose of specimen collection for semen analysis. Collection in a condom may also cause inaccurate semen volume measurement.

View Page
Initial Microscopic Examination of Semen

Initial microscopic examination of semen using 100X magnification includes assessment of: Mucus strand formationSperm aggregation or agglutinationCellular elements other than spermatozoa, for example round cells, including leukocytes and immature germ cells, and isolated sperm heads or tailsAgglutination should be noted in the report. The WHO 5th edition recommends grading agglutination as:Grade 1 - isolated: <10 spermatozoa per agglutinate, many free spermatozoaGrade 2- moderate: 10-50 sperm per agglutinate, free spermatozoaGrade 3- large: >50 sperm per agglutinate, some spermatozoa still freeGrade 4-gross: All spermatozoa agglutinated and agglutinates interconnectedTo assess motility and estimate sperm concentration, switch to 400X magnification. An estimate of sperm concentration may be needed to determine an appropriate dilution for performance of the sperm count.A phase contrast microscope is recommended for initial microscopic semen examination, motility evaluation, and sperm count.Thoroughly mix the semen specimen in order to ensure as much as possible that the sample you are examining is representative of the whole specimen. One recommended mixing method is to aspirate the sample 10 times into a wide-bore disposable plastic pipette, gently so as not to create air bubbles. Obtain the sample to be examined immediately after mixing the contents in the original container. If additional aliquots are taken, mix the specimen in the original container again before taking those samples.

View Page
Sperm Counting Methods

Sperm can be counted either manually or by automated methods. Although automated counting has some advantages for assessment of motility parameters, manual counting is still performed by most laboratories. There are several manual counting methods available for semen. These include: Improved Neubauer hemocytometerMakler chamberCellVu (Millennium Sciences, Inc)MicroCell (Conception Technologies) The Makler, CellVu, and MicroCell methods have the advantage of requiring no dilution of the semen. Since semen is viscous, accurate dilution can be problematic. These methods also allow counting of motile and non-motile sperm at the same time and thus avoid the need for separate assessment via wet mount. Each laboratory should determine the best most reproducible method for their own situation, equipment, and expertise.

View Page
Motility: Standardization of Assessment Method

Sperm motility is important because sperm must be moving in order to penetrate the cervical mucus, travel to the fallopian tube, and fertilize ova.Accurate motility evaluation requires standardization of temperature, sample size, and depth of chamber for viewing. Some laboratories read motility at 37°C while others routinely report motility at room temperature. The temperature of the assessment should be specified in the final report and all laboratory personnel must perform the analysis at the temperature stated in the laboratory's procedure.The laboratory's procedure should also state the volume of semen to be used for viewing motility, e.g., 10 mL. The coverslip that is used for the stated semen volume should provide a chamber approximately 20 µm in depth. A chamber depth that is less than 20 µm may constrict the movement of sperm and a chamber that is too deep will not display the spermatozoa in a single plane, making it difficult to assess motility.The use of an eyepiece reticle with grid, as shown in the image on the right, is recommended for more accurate assessment within a defined area of the microscopic field. If the sperm concentration is high, score only the top row of the grid. If the concentration is low, score the entire grid. Do NOT choose fields to view based on observation of highest motility. This will cause inaccurate results to be reported.

View Page
Requirements for the microscopic examination of semen

For assessing count, motility, viability and other cellular components your laboratory will require a microscope with 10x oculars and phase contrast objectives up to 20x. You will also need hand counters.For assessing morphology you will need bright field objectives of 40x and/or 100x (oil immersion).You will also need counting chambers, glass slides and coverslips and a method for staining sperm for morphology assessment.

View Page
Automated Procedures

Automated semen analysis instruments are available that are able to evaluate sperm motility more accurately than manual microscopic methods and can add specific information about motility parameters. In addition to determining percent motility, some instruments may calculate the speed at which the sperm are swimming in microns/second.

View Page

Special Topics in Phlebotomy
References

Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Procedures for the Collection of Diagnostic Blood Specimens by Venipuncture; Approved Standard. 6th ed. CLSI document H3-A6. Wayne, PA: CLSI: 2007.Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Procedures and Devices for the Collection of Diagnostic Capillary Blood Specimens; Approved Standard. 5th ed. CLSI document H4-A5. Wayne, PA: CLSI: 2004. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Procedures for the Handling and Processing of Blood Specimens; Approved Guideline. Third Edition. CLSI document H18-A3. Wayne, PA: CLSI: 2004.Ernst DJ. Applied Phlebotomy. Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: 2005.

View Page
Introduction

Patient-centered health care is care that is delivered in a manner that is "respectful of and responsive to individual's preferences, needs, and values."*Great health care for every patient involves a team approach. All team members contribute in a unique way to ensure successful patient outcomes. The phlebotomist is a key member of the health care team and the team relies on the phlebotomist to obtain quality specimens. Patient diagnosis and treatment is often dependent on laboratory test results. The accuracy and reliability of these results are contingent on a quality specimen. It is easy to see how the phlebotomist directly affects the care of the patient. As members of a professional health care team, phlebotomists should exhibit professional behaviors. Simple things, such as appropriate dress and grooming, reflect a professional image. Language and conversation should also show that you value yourself, your employer, and the patient. Work habits demonstrate to the rest of the team that you provide an invaluable service.*Reference: Committee on Quality of Health Care in America. Crossing the Quality Chasm, A New Health System for the 21st Century. Washington, DC: National Academy Press. 2001.

View Page
How might patient harm result from each of these problems related to phlebotomy services? Consider your answer and then click on the defined problem to reveal the potentially harmful result(s) of the action or condition.View Page
Collection and Communication

The laboratory plays an important role in monitoring the level of therapeutic drugs. Communication with clinical personnel is critical. Blood specimens are collected at specific time intervals to determine the trough level and peak levels of the drug. The pharmacist uses these trough and peak values to adjust the dose of the drugs appropriately.It is the responsibility of the phlebotomist to obtain the specimen at the precise time ordered for the specific peak or trough drug level. With some drugs, altering the draw time by even 15 minutes can have an adverse affect on adjusting and administering the next drug dose.Obtain the specimen at the requested time. If the time is missed, ask the clinical staff if the test should still be obtained or if another draw time is desired. If the clinical staff still wants a specimen collected, make a note of the time the drug was administered in relation to when the specimen was collected.Failure to communicate could have an adverse effect on the patient who may be given too little or too much medication based on an erroneous test result.

View Page
Special Tests May Mean Special Collections

Some laboratory tests are so specialized that they require the use of special collection tubes to prevent erroneous results.Some examples of special requirements include:Laboratory TestConsiderationsHeavy metalsBlood collection container material must be free of heavy metalsTissue typingSample may need to be collected in preservative solutionBlood culturesSpecimens must be collected in bottles containing nutrient media to promote growth of bacteria within the bottle. Genetic studiesSpecial tubes may be needed to preserve DNA and/or RNA It is the responsibility of the phlebotomist to be aware of special requirements for certain tests. If the correct collection tube is not known then the phlebotomist MUST refer to the specimen collection manual or ask the appropriate laboratory worker to obtain the information. It is also imperative that the phlebotomist obtain and use only the correct equipment and not substitute something that is "close". This could affect the test results and the safety of the patient.

View Page

The Disappearing Antibody: A Case Study
Transfusion Service Laboratory

The transfusion service laboratory (TS) instructed clinical staff to draw blood specimens for compatibility testing before transfusing any blood components or products.Once the blood samples were collected, the clinical staff immediately began transfusing the patient with the O Rh-negative blood.

View Page
Unexpected anomaly

3. Do the results of the initial antibody screen support the presence of the identified antibody?No: All 3 screen cells reacted in the initial screen. Upon review, however, only Screen Cells 1 and 3 were Jk(a+); Screen Cell 2 reacted but was Jk(a-).This anomalous result was investigated by a reference laboratory. It was discovered that the patient had anti-Rd, an antibody to the low frequency antigen Radin (Rd). By chance, Screen Cell 2 was Rd-positive. Radin has a frequency of less than 0.5% in several populations tested. The screen cell manufacturer was notified. They would likely confirm that the cell was Rd-positive, make their clients aware of it, and document it in future antigrams.

View Page
The patient's red cell eluate initially was unidentifiable, reacting weakly with only two panel cells that did not fit a pattern. Once anti-Jka was identified, a check of the eluate panel results showed that both reactive cells were Jk(a+b-) but two other JkaJka panel cells did not react.Consider the question below, then click on the answer.View Page
Literature and online resources

LiteratureDutton RP, Shih D, Edelman BB, Hess J, Scalea TM. [abstract]. Available at: Safety of uncrossmatched type-O red cells for resuscitation from hemorrhagic shock.J Trauma. 2005 Dec;59(6):1445-9. Accessed November 5, 2012.Johnson ST, Rudmann SV,Wilson, SM. Serologic problem solving strategies:a systematic approach. Bethesda, MD: AABB, 1996.Online resourcesThe following are online examples of good practice. The information should not be used as a substitute for technical and clinical judgment. Medical and technical information becomes obsolete quickly and current sources relevant to the user's location should always be consulted.Transfusion reactions: Transfusion complications (Canadian Blood Services)Education website for CBS's hospital customersREACT (Sunnybrook HSC, Toronto, ON, Canada) Pocket reference card for nurseson signs and symptoms of transfusion reactionsQuick cals (online calculator of p values for Fisher's exact test) Use a one-tailed test (since we would expect an antibody to react with red cells that are positive for the corresponding antigen)

View Page
The antibody screen is positive but the transfusion of the O Rh-negative RBCs is already in progress. What are the transfusion service (TS) laboratory's priorities in this case?Place the following procedures that will be followed by the TS in the appropriate order of priority.View Page
Crossmatch Results

These are the results of the crossmatch that was being performed in the transfusion service laboratory while the patient was receiving the two units of O Rh-negative RBCs. Cells Gel IAT* Donor I** 2+ Donor 2** 2+ Donor 3 3+ Donor 4 3+ Donor 5 2+ Donor 6 3+ * IAT = indirect antiglobulin test ** O Rh-negative RBC (Donors 3 - 6 are O Rh-positive)

View Page
Pretransfusion Direct Antiglobulin Test Result

The laboratory obtained post-transfusion blood specimens in order to perform a serological investigation. Pretransfusion and post-transfusion DATs were performed. Patient cells DAT CC Pretransfusion 0 2+ DAT = direct antiglobulin test with polyspecific antiglobulin serumCC = IgG sensitized RBC

View Page
Investigating weak antibodies

In this case the patient's antibody has disappeared from the plasma by adsorbing to transfused donor red cells. It is detectable but unidentifiable in the post-transfusion red cell eluate. Several trial and error procedures exist to enhance weak antibodies. Which methods will enhance the reactivity of a given antibody depend on its characteristics. Methods to investigate weak antibodies include: Use a higher plasma to red cell ratio (add more antibody-containing plasma or eluate) Increase incubation time (if consistent with manufacturer instructions, if applicable) Use enzyme-treated panel red cells (enzymes enhance IgG antibodies in Rh and Kidd blood systems but denature some antigens, e.g., Fya, Fyb, S) Try alternative antibody detection methods, e.g., if using LISS routinely, try polyethylene glycol (PEG) or column agglutination methods such as gel, providing they have been validated for use in the TS laboratory.

View Page

The Influenza A Virus: 2009 H1N1 Subtype
Genetic Components of Influenza A Subtype H1N1

The influenza A H1N1 2009 virus is regarded as being genetically different from the normally prevelent seasonal influenza A viruses. Novel influenza A virus was originally referred to as "swine flu" because laboratory testing showed that many of the genes in this new virus were very similar to influenza viruses that normally occur in pigs in North America. However, influenza A, subtype H1N1 virus actually has genetic components of human, avian, and swine influenza A combined into one virus; a process called antigenic shift. This virus contains: Two genes from flu viruses from pigs in Europe and Asia One avian, or bird, gene One human geneThis type of virus is called a "quadruple reassortment" virus. Pigs serve as intermediate hosts for influenza A viruses since the respiratory tract of pigs contains receptors for not only swine influenza A viruses, but also avian and human influenza A viruses. Since pigs are also susceptible to avian influenza A viruses from turkeys, ducks, and wild waterfowl, the genetic mixing of swine and avian viruses has been documented over the past 15 years. An additional reassortment may occur with the inclusion of human influenza A genes when pigs are exposed to farmers with respiratory tract infections. The current 2009 H1N1 virus thus represents the most recent example of swine influenza A virus reassortment that contains both avian and human influenza A genes.Reference 1

View Page
Laboratory Tests

A variety of tests are available for the detection of influenza A viruses, including the 2009 H1N1 strain. These tests include: rapid antigen tests, direct fluorescent antibody tests to detect the presence of virus in patient specimens, shell vial cell cultures, classical tube cell cultures, and reverse transcriptase PCR (RT-PCR), which detects influenza-specific viral genes. These tests differ in sensitivity, specificity, availability, and the ability to distinguish between different influenza strains and subtypes, such as influenza A 2009 H1N1.The rapid tests, such as the direct rapid antigen tests or immunofluorescence assays, have lower sensitivity and specificity compared to cell culture and the RT-PCR based tests. Rapid tests vary in their ability to detect the 2009 H1N1 virus. The range of sensitivity is 10% to 70% and none of the rapid tests that are currently available are specific for H1N1. However, results of rapid tests are available within 30 minutes to one hour so that a positive test will provide further information toward a diagnosis when it is coupled with a patient's symptoms. A few FDA-cleared RT-PCR kits are available for the detection of influenza A viruses. For the subtyping of influenza A viruses, such as Influenza A seasonal H3N2, and 2009 H1N1, the FDA has given the status of "Emergency Use Authorization" (EUA) to a few of the RT-PCR kits; currently available kits under this emergency status category include those made by the CDC, ELITech, Prodesse, Focus Diagnostics, and Roche. (http://www.fda.gov/MedicalDevices/Safety/EmergencySituations/ucm161496.htm)State Departments of Health have been provided with RT-PCR kits from the CDC for the subtyping of influenza A viruses. This testing has also been FDA-reviewed and given the status of EUA. State and local health department guidelines determine which specimens should be submitted to public health laboratories for RT-PCR testing. In addition, several commercial reference laboratories, academic labs, and hospital labs have been able to perform influenza A subtyping for 2009 H1N1 under the same EUA status. Any laboratory that performs an EUA method would be required to perform an internal validation process.

View Page
Specimen Collection and Storage

The manufacturer's instructions (package insert) lists the acceptable respiratory specimen types for testing in each rapid influenza A/B test kit. The following specimen types are preferred for influenza virus diagnostic testing: nasopharyngeal swabs, washes and aspirates; endotracheal aspirates, and bronchoalveolar lavage (BAL). The CDC recommends nasopharyngeal washes for patients less than 3 years old and nasopharyngeal swabs for patients over 3 years of age. The image on the right illustrates the correct area to swab when collecting a nasopharyngeal specimen. Two swabs or washes would facilitate both rapid influenza A/B testing and a second specimen that could be sent for confirmatory H1N1 testing by RT-PCR if needed. Nylon fiber flocked swabs have been shown to be more effective than dacron or other woven fiber swabs for the collection of virus from the nasopharynx. The soft brush-like nylon fiber swabs are more efficient at collecting cells and viral particles and subsequently releasing virus when swabs are placed into viral transport media due to the capillary action of the flocked swab. It is suggested that the ill patient should have specimens collected as soon as possible after the onset of symptoms. For certain patients, more than one specimen may be necessary to confirm the presence of the virus. Nasopharyngeal swabs should be placed into sterile universal transport medium (UTM) or comparable viral transport media and promptly delivered to the laboratory within 2 hours. If processing is delayed longer than 2 hours, respiratory specimens should be placed in a refrigerator (held at 40C). Viruses usually remain stable for 2 to 3 days when held at this temperature.

View Page
Which of these laboratory methods is the most sensitive and specific for the 2009 Influenza A H1N1 virus?View Page
Survival of the Influenza A 2009 H1N1 Virus

Influenza A viruses, including the 2009 H1N1 strain, are able to survive and maintain infectivity on surfaces for extended lengths of time. Influenza A viruses typically remain infectious for 12 - 48 hours on non-porous surfaces, for 8 - 12 hours on cloth or paper, and for 5 minutes on hands.To reduce spread of the virus from person to person, it is important to discard contaminated items such as tissues and laboratory testing supplies and to wash hands frequently. To eliminate viruses from contaminated surfaces, a number of disinfectants can be used, such as chlorine, hydrogen peroxide, detergents, iodophores, and alcohols. Influenza viruses also can be rapidly inactivated with heat from 167 - 212°F.

View Page
CDC Surveillance of the Influena A 2009 H1N1 Virus

The Epidemiology and Prevention Branch in the Influenza Division at CDC acquires, organizes, and evaluates data and information regarding influenza virus activity year-round in the United States and produces a weekly report for the public to view. This report features the Influenza A 2009 H1N1 virus as well as other seasonal flu strains. The U.S. influenza surveillance system is a collaborative effort between CDC and its many partners in state and local health departments, public health and clinical laboratories, vital statistics offices, healthcare providers, clinics and emergency departments. Information in five categories is collected from nine different data sources that allow CDC to: Find out when and where influenza activity is occurring Track influenza-related illness Determine what influenza viruses are circulating Detect changes in influenza viruses Determine the number of deaths attributed to influenza

View Page

The Urine Microscopic: Microscopic Analysis of Urine Sediment
Microscopic Examination

The microscopic examination was traditionally performed on all urine specimens. Today, many laboratories perform a urine microscopic only if preliminary evaluation indicates the need for microscopic examination. Such laboratories must have criteria determining the specimens on which urine microscopic examinations will be performed. The microscopic exam is often important in detecting and evaluating renal and urinary tract disorders as well as other systemic diseases.

View Page
An Introduction to Quantitating the Urine Microscopic

In order for a urinalysis to be useful a physician must know not only what elements are present but the quantity of each. This section will deal with counting and estimating the microscopic elements found in the urine sediment. The quantifications may vary slightly between laboratories, but each lab should have its own criteria. Quantitation may be divided into three steps: Looking for casts Counting elements Estimating elements

View Page

Transfusion Reactions
Preliminary Laboratory Investigation

When the laboratory receives notification of a transfusion reaction, the first step is a clerical check. The clerical check should be performed as soon as possible to identify any possible ABO incompatibility. The technologist will compare the component bag, label, paperwork, and patient sample and look for errors. If an error is found, the physician must be notified. Once the post-transfusion sample is received, the sample should be examined for the presence of hemolysis. Both the pre-transfusion sample and post-transfusion sample can be compared. Destruction of red cells and release of free hemoglobin will result in a pink to red supernatant. Pink or red colored serum may indicate intravascular hemolysis. The patient's serum may appear icteric if the hemolytic process is extravascular. The ABO testing must be repeated on the post-transfusion specimen as well. Examination of a post-reaction urine sample made aid in the diagnosis of acute hemolysis. Free hemoglobin in the urine indicates intravascular hemolysis. A direct antiglobulin test (DAT) must be performed on the post-transfusion sample. An EDTA lavender top tube is the required specimen type. If the DAT is positive on the post-transfusion sample, then one should be performed on the pre-transfusion sample. If the pre-transfusion DAT is negative and the post-transfusion is positive, the presence of incompatible red cells should be suspected. All findings must be reported to the supervisor or medical director, who may request additional tests.

View Page
What is the first step a transfusionist should take when a transfusion reaction is suspected?View Page
When performing a transfusion reaction investigation, what is the clerical check used to detect?View Page
Records and Reporting

After the medical director has reviewed the laboratory results from the investigation, the interpretation is recorded on the patient's permanent medical record. The transfusion service must retain the records of the test results, interpretations, and reaction classification indefinitely. In the U.S., deaths of patients resulting from a transfusion reaction must be reported to the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) by the transfusion service as soon as possible. A written report must follow within seven days. The report should contain the patient's medical records, including laboratory reports and autopsy results. Transfusion services accrediting agencies, such as AABB, the College of American Pathologists (CAP), and the Joint Commission may require reporting to them as well. All of these agencies require that transfusion services have written policies for transfusion reactions addressing the steps for detection, evaluation, and reporting.

View Page
Procedure for a Suspected Adverse Reaction

Adverse reactions after transfusion of blood components must be evaluated promptly. Most serious reactions occur within the first 15 minutes of starting a transfusion. Continuous monitoring allows reactions to be discovered in a timely manner. The transfusionist must be able to recognize the symptoms of a transfusion reaction and know the appropriate steps to take when one occurs. The first critical step is to stop the transfusion immediately, but keep the patient's line open with saline. The physician should be contacted immediately for instructions regarding patient care. The transfusion service must be notified of the reaction. They will usually provide instructions on proper documentation of the reaction, and the return of any remaining component and/or tubing. The appropriate patient samples are to be sent to the laboratory and usually include blood and urine. The transfusionist must be sure to follow all hospital policies.

View Page
Clinical Laboratory Tests

A post transfusion specimen should be sent to the laboratory for work-up. A clerical check should be performed to investigate possible errors in specimen labeling, blood product issuance, or patient identification. The plasma must be examined for hemolysis. A direct antiglobulin test must be performed. The patient's ABO, Rh and antibody screen should be repeated and confirmed. The blood product ABO/Rh can be confirmed. Other laboratory tests include: complete blood count (CBC), urinalysis, serum bilirubin, creatinine, coagulation profile, and disseminated intravascular coagulation (DIC) evaluation. The full laboratory work-up and details of other laboratory tests will be discussed later in the course.

View Page
Clinical Presentation and Laboratory Findings

Symptoms begin within 6 hours of transfusion and include acute respiratory distress, severe hypoxemia, hypotension, fever and bilateral fluffy infiltrates on chest radiograph. Respiratory distress is due to noncardiongenic pulmonary edema. Patient may have shortness of breath. Signs and symptoms may be mild, and resolve after a few days, or they may be severe and result in pulmonary failure. Laboratory findings include leukopenia and hypocomplementemia.

View Page
Physical and Chemical Mechanisms of Hemolysis

Patients can experience a transfusion reaction caused by a range of physical or chemical factors. These factors can either affect the blood component or result from a transfusion event. These reactions include physical red cell damage, depletion or dilution of coagulation factors and platelets, hypothermia, citrate toxicity, hypokalemia or hyperkalemia, and air embolism. Membrane damage and lysis can occur to red blood cells (RBCs) because of hypotonic or hypertonic solutions, heat damage from blood warmers, and mechanical damage caused by blood pumps. Platelets and coagulation factors may become depleted or diluted from a massive transfusion. Hypothermia, a core body temperature of less than 35oC, can occur from transfusions of large volumes of cold products. Hyperkalemia is caused by the intracellular loss of potassium from the red cells during storage. Hypokalemia may result from transfusion of potassium depleted cells such as washed RBCs. Signs and symptoms of physically or chemically induced reactions are non-specific. Some of the more common signs include: Chills Numbness Nausea Vomiting Cardiac arrhythmias Altered respirations Additional laboratory tests to investigate a reaction are electrolytes, blood pH, glucose, urinalysis, complete blood count (CBC), prothrombin time (PT) and activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT). Treatment involves correcting the underlying cause of the symptoms. For example, a patient with hypothermia may be given a heat blanket. Attention to proper transfusion practices will help prevent these types of reactions.

View Page
Diagnosis

The symptom most commonly associated with a delayed hemolytic transfusion reaction (DHTR) is unexplained decrease in hemoglobin and hematocrit. Patients may also present with fever and jaundice. Hemolysis occurs slowly and is primarily extravascular. Unlike an acute hemolytic transfusion reaction (AHTR), hemoglobinuria, acute renal failure, and disseminated intravascular coagulation (DIC) are not generally seen. On some occasions, patient's may not present with any symptoms. Serologic findings include a positive direct antiglobulin test (DAT) and/or a positive antibody screen in post-transfusion testing. In many cases, the physician will send a request for an additional transfusion because of the decreased hemoglobin levels, and not suspect a DHTR. The positive antibody screen will trigger an investigation including antibody identification. The DAT may have a mixed field appearance because of the antibody-sensitized transfused red cells and the non-sensitized patient red cells. Segments from the donor unit can be tested for the offending antigen once the antibody has been identified.Antibodies that are most often reported as the cause of DHTR are anti-Jka and anti- Jkb. Other antibodies that are also commonly implicated in a DHTR include Kell, Rh, and Duffy system antibodies.The patient's physician should be notified so that additional clinical and laboratory evidence can be evaluated.

View Page
Clinical Presentation and Diagnosis

Patients present with fever, a characteristic red rash from trunk or face to the extremities, watery diarrhea, nausea, vomiting, and hepatitis within seven to ten days following the transfusion. The rash may progress to blister-like lesions and erythroderma. Pancytopenia will develop due to the immune destruction of the recipient's bone marrow. The low platelet count causes hemorrhaging while a low white blood cell count can lead to infection. Most patients die within one to three weeks after the onset of symptoms. The diagnosis is often missed and is usually made too late or after death. Routine laboratory studies are not helpful. The only definitive method is the identification of donor lymphocytes in the circulation or tissues of the recipient which is accomplished through human leukocyte angtien (HLA) typing or cytogenic analysis.

View Page

Tuberculosis Awareness for Health Care Workers
TST Interpretation and Classification

The TST interpretation depends on the measured diameter of the induration and the clinical status of the patient.An induration of 15 or more millimeters is considered positive in all persons.An induration of 10 or more millimeters is considered positive in patients in the high-risk progression groups and in mycobacteriology laboratory workers.An induration of 5 or more millimeters is considered positive in the high-risk infection groups.

View Page
TB Infection Control in the Laboratory

The laboratory director is responsible for the development of a risk-based infection control plan for the laboratory.The personnel are trained in methods that minimize the production of aerosols.The personal protective equipment that is specified in the infection control plan is used consistently. A respirator is used when performing procedures that can result in aerosolization outside a biological safety cabinet.Disposable gloves are worn for all laboratory procedures.

View Page
Which of the following barriers are recommended in microbiology laboratories where manipulation of biosafety level 3 agents (e.g., Mycobacterium tuberculosis) is performed?View Page
Biosafety Levels

Laboratory workers who handle infectious materials in the microbiology laboratory should be aware of the work practices, safety equipment, and barriers that will protect them, and others in the area, from infectious agents. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) and the National Institutes of Health (NIH) created guidelines to assist laboratories in developing safe practices based on the infectious agents that are handled. These guidelines are referred to as Biosafety Levels 1 through 4. Each increasing number represents increased risk, requiring more stringent work practice and increasingly protective safety equipment and barriers. A copy of the Guidelines can be obtained from the CDC or accessed online on the CDC website:http://www.cdc.gov/biosafety/publications/bmbl5/index.htm. Accessed November 1, 2012.

View Page
Biosafety Level Criteria and Requirements for Handling Specimens Suspected of Containing Mycobacterium tuberculosis

All specimens suspected of containing M. tuberculosis (including specimens processed for other microorganisms) should be handled in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet (BSC). Appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) must be used. At a minimum, this includes gloves and fluid-resistant laboratory coat or gown. Non-aerosol-producing manipulations (eg, preparing direct smears for acid-fast staining when done in conjunction with training and periodic checking of competency) can be performed using biosafety level-2 (BSL-2) practices and procedures, containment equipment, and facilities. BSL-3 practices, safety equipment, and facility design and construction are applicable to microbiology laboratories that work with indigenous or exotic agents with a potential for respiratory transmission, and which may cause serious and potentially lethal infection. If the laboratory is propagating and manipulating cultures for M. tuberculosis, BSL-3 practices, containment equipment, and facilities are required. Barriers include controlled access to the laboratory and ventilation requirements that minimize the release of infectious aerosols from the laboratory. Secondary barriers should include self-closing double-door access and negative airflow into the laboratory. Exhausted air must not be recirculated. Work surfaces must be decontaminated, using the laboratory-approved disinfectant, upon completion of procedures, immediately following a spill, and at the end of the work shift, if the surface was recontaminated since the last cleaning. Laboratory equipment should be routinely decontaminated.Hands must be washed upon completion of work with potentially infectious materials and before leaving the laboratory.

View Page

White Cell and Platelet Disorders: Peripheral Blood Clues to Nonneoplastic Conditions
An automated hematology counter flagged the white blood cell count. Upon review of the peripheral blood smear, the technologist viewed many cells that appeared similar to those in this image. What should the technologist report?View Page
Assume that several other lymphocytes similar to the one in the center of the photograph, are found on review of the peripheral smear. A work up for leukemia should be recommended.View Page
An automated platelet count of 40.0 X 109/L was reported. Review of the peripheral blood smear (see image below) reveals single platelets in open fields as well as platelet clumps. The platelet count is likely INCORRECT.View Page
Smudge Cells

Smudge cells are remnants of cells that lack any identifiable cytoplasmic membrane or nuclear structure. Smudge cells, also called basket cells, are most often associated with abnormally fragile lymphocytes in disorders such as chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL). However, they can also be seen in degenerating samples; in which case, their origin may not be lymphocytic. Smudge cells are indicated by the arrows in this image. In some laboratories, a semi-quantitative estimate of the number of smudge cells may be made; in others, a report of "smudge cells present" may suffice. This reporting scheme must be understood by the physician in order to maximize patient care outcomes through his/her decision making process. For example, in the context of this exercise, does it make any difference to the physician if you report few or many smudge cells; or, is a report of smudge cells present sufficient? The answer to this question applies not only to smudge cells, but to the reporting of any other atypical white cells as well. An agreement must be reached between the hematology laboratory and clinical services as to how semi-quantitative estimates will impact the need for further testing in view of patient care outcomes.

View Page
Platelet Estimates

The findings in the image to the right (peripheral blood smear) would elicit a report comment of "increased platelets" of a high magnitude, such as "marked" or "4+." Estimates of platelet counts from review of a peripheral blood should be made on each smear examined. This provides a simple estimate of "high", "low", or "normal" which usually corroborates the value generated from an automated cell counter. A formula for estimating platelet counts must be established for each laboratory. One guideline for the estimation of platelets is as follows: Count platelets on 5 fields using 1000X magnification (care should be taken to ensure the fields used for counting are not too thick or too thin) Average the platelet counts obtained Multiply by 15 X 109/L to obtain estimated platelet count (some laboratories prefer a 20 X 109 multiplier in this step if capillary blood is used)Such a counting scheme for platelets when clustered, as in the image, is probably not needed, as there are more than 100 platelets in the field. This translates into a platelet count of 1500 X 109/L or more.

View Page
Additional Comments

The following pages in this presentation includes a series of white blood cell and platelet abnormalities (nonneoplastic) that may be identified in a peripheral blood smear. Many cases will simulate the practice of a peripheral smear review by a hematology technologist. He or she must assess what responses in patient care may be triggered by the clinician attempting to interpret the reported findings on a peripheral smear.Observations of white blood cell abnormalities in the peripheral blood smear should be reported in order to direct the physician to an immediate specific diagnosis, such as: Atypical lymphocytes, suggesting infectious mononucleosis rather than leukemia Toxic granules in neutrophils, as found in acute infections, or atypical granules suggesting a genetic disorder An unusual mix of cells, such as too many or too few neutrophils, monocytes, or other myeloid cells The presence of giant platelets, myelocytes, or other cells, suggesting a myelodysplastic syndromeIn summary, laboratory data should be presented to clinicians in a user-friendly fashion to promote effective decision making.

View Page
Evaluation Criteria: White Blood Cells and Platelets

In most clinical hematology laboratories, an initial blood count is performed by an automated cell counting instrument. Additionally, most of these instruments also produce a five-part differential count, indicating the percentage of neutrophils, lymphocytes, monocytes, basophils, and eosinophils. Some instruments can also provide information about cellular immaturity and abnormal cellular morphologies.Occasionally, atypical cells, similar to those shown in the image to the right, would be flagged or counted as mixed cells, at which point a smear review would be required to make an identification. In cases where there are automated instrument differential flags, mixed cell count is high, or there are other indications that atypical cells may be present, a review of the smear is indicated.

View Page


MediaLab, Inc.

http://www.MediaLabInc.net    |    (877) 776-8460 (tollfree)    |    sales@medialabinc.net